Radioplan

User Guide

Version 3.9

www.actix.com

Documentation Version: Software Version:

UG-v3.9, April 2008 Actix Radioplan v3.9

The content of this manual is provided for information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Actix. Actix assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that appear in this documentation. Copyright © 2001–2008 by Actix GmbH. All rights reserved. Trademark Notice Radioplan is a registered trademark of Actix GmbH in the European Union. Actix and the Actix logo are trademarks of Actix Ltd. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, MS Access, MS Query, and MS Excel are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. InstallShield is a registered trademark of InstallShield Software Corporation. UNIX is a trademark of X/Open Company Ltd. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Java is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. ESRI is a trademark or registered trademark of the Environmental Systems Research Institute (ESRI), Inc. Panasonic is a registered trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. CDMA2000 is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA-USA) in the United States. Oracle is a registered trademark of the Oracle Corporation. All other product or brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Contact: Actix GmbH Altmarkt 10 D-01067 Dresden Germany tel.: +49 (0) 351 404 29 – 0 fax: +49 (0) 351 404 29 – 50 e-mail: sales@actix.com www.actix.com Actix Ltd 200, Hammersmith Road Hammersmith London, W6 7DL United Kingdom www.actix.com

www.actix.com

Contents
1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ 13
1.1 RADIOPLAN .................................................................................................13 1.1.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................13 1.1.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................13 1.2 MEASUREMENT MODULE ...................................................................................14 1.2.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................14 1.2.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................14 1.3 DYNAMIC/SNAPSHOT UTRA/FDD RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM SIMULATOR (WINES)..............15 1.3.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................15 1.3.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................15 1.4 AUTOMATIC CELL PLANNING (ACP) .....................................................................16 1.4.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................16 1.4.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................17 1.5 AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY PLANNING (AFP)..............................................................17 1.6 AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR LIST PLANNING (ANP) ........................................................17 1.7 AUTOMATIC RRM PARAMETER OPTIMIZATION (APO) .................................................18 1.8 CAPITAL PLANNING ........................................................................................18 1.9 DATA INTEGRITY TO PRIOR VERSIONS...................................................................18 1.10 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................18 1.11 OUTLINE OF THIS USER GUIDE .........................................................................18 1.12 SUPPORT ..................................................................................................19

2 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 21
2.1 SETTING UP THE RADIOPLAN WORKING ENVIRONMENT ...............................................21 2.1.1 Radioplan Software Package .................................................................21 2.1.2 Radioplan Installation Process ...............................................................21 2.2 CUSTOMIZATION OF THE RADIOPLAN INSTALLATION ...................................................22 2.3 LICENSE MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................22 2.3.1 Hardware Dongles ...............................................................................22
2.3.1.1 2.3.1.2 2.3.1.3 2.3.2.1 2.3.2.2 Single Computer License......................................................................23 Floating License Management ...............................................................23 Remote Update Procedure for a Hardware Dongle....................................23 Registering Radioplan..........................................................................25 License Transfer .................................................................................25

2.3.2 Software License Files ..........................................................................24

3 RADIOPLAN INTRODUCTION ........................................................................ 27
3.1 COORDINATE SYSTEM .....................................................................................28 3.1.1 Geographical and Cartesian Coordinate Systems ......................................28 3.1.2 Euclidian Cartesian Coordinate Systems used in Radioplan ........................30 3.2 MENU BAR ..................................................................................................31 3.3 TOOLBARS...................................................................................................32 3.4 LAYER CONCEPT ............................................................................................32 3.4.1 Configuration Data Layers ....................................................................33 3.4.2 Measurement Data Layers ....................................................................40 3.4.3 Result Data Layers ..............................................................................40 3.4.4 Optimization Data Layers .....................................................................40 3.4.5 Image Layers .....................................................................................40
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

4

3.4.6 Post-Processing Layers.........................................................................41 3.4.7 Graphics Layers ..................................................................................41 3.4.8 Cell Visuals.........................................................................................41 3.4.9 Working with Layers ............................................................................41 3.4.10 Locking Layers ..................................................................................45 3.4.11 Converting Vector into Raster Layers....................................................46 3.4.12 Import/Export of Layers .....................................................................47 3.5 PERSONAL WORKSPACE ...................................................................................47 3.5.1 Workspace Handling ............................................................................47
3.5.1.1 3.5.1.2 3.5.1.3 3.5.1.4 3.5.1.5 Importing a Workspace........................................................................48 Exporting a Workspace ........................................................................49 Resetting the Workspace to Default Settings...........................................49 Handling of Legend Presets ..................................................................49 Managing Layer Templates...................................................................49

3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5

General Application Settings .................................................................50 Display Settings ..................................................................................52 Layer Settings ....................................................................................54 Color Palette.......................................................................................57

3.6 PAINT MODULE FOR GRAPHICS LAYERS..................................................................61 3.6.1 Creating a Graphics Layer.....................................................................61 3.6.2 Drawing in a Graphics Layer .................................................................62
3.6.2.1 3.6.2.2 3.6.2.3 3.6.2.4

3.5.5.1 3.5.5.2 3.5.5.3 3.5.5.4

Inspecting the Color Palette of a Layer...................................................58 Creating a Transition Color Palette ........................................................60 Using Legend Presets ..........................................................................60 Import and Export of Legend Presets .....................................................61

3.6.3 Deleting Graphics Layers ......................................................................64 3.7 TREE WINDOW .............................................................................................64 3.8 VIEWING AREA .............................................................................................64 3.9 ZOOM FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................65 3.10 MESSAGE WINDOW AND STATUS BAR .................................................................65 3.11 ONLINE HELP .............................................................................................66

Drawing Settings ................................................................................62 Drawing a Line ...................................................................................63 Drawing a Polygon ..............................................................................63 Inserting Text ....................................................................................63

4 GETTING STARTED WITH RADIOPLAN ............................................................. 67
4.1 SETTING UP A DEMO PROJECT ............................................................................67 4.2 RAN CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................68 4.2.1 First Site ............................................................................................68
4.2.1.1 4.2.1.2 4.2.1.3 4.2.1.4 Network Controller Configuration ..........................................................70 Site Configuration ...............................................................................70 Antenna Import ..................................................................................71 Cell Configuration ...............................................................................71

4.2.2 Second Site ........................................................................................73 4.2.3 Pathloss of the Cells ............................................................................73 4.3 USER CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................75 4.3.1 Equipment Profile ................................................................................75 4.3.2 Mobility Profile ....................................................................................76 4.3.3 Service Profile.....................................................................................76 4.3.4 Traffic................................................................................................76 4.3.5 UE Profile ...........................................................................................78 4.4 ENVIRONMENT CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................78 4.4.1 Streets ..............................................................................................79
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

5

4.5 NEXT STEPS ................................................................................................80

5 PROJECT HANDLING ................................................................................. 81
5.1 GENERAL PROJECT SETUP .................................................................................81 5.1.1 Project Folders ....................................................................................81 5.1.2 Project Actions....................................................................................82 5.2 MULTI-LAYER/MULTI-TECHNOLOGY PROJECTS .........................................................83 5.2.1 Network Layer Management..................................................................83 5.2.2 Multi-Layer Project Structure ................................................................84 5.2.3 Duplicating a Network Layer .................................................................85 5.2.4 Applying Network Configurations from other Network Layers .....................85 5.3 USER RIGHTS MANAGEMENT ..............................................................................86 5.4 CREATING A NEW PROJECT ...............................................................................87 5.4.1 Library Integration ..............................................................................87 5.5 PROJECT DATA IMPORT ....................................................................................87 5.5.1 Importing a Project from an RNP Tool.....................................................87 5.5.2 Importing Network Configuration Data from the OSS................................88 5.5.3 Importing a Project from another Radioplan Database ..............................88 5.5.4 Loading Configuration Data in Radioplan Format ......................................89 5.5.5 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Import ................................................................90 5.6 WORKING WITH EXISTING PROJECTS ....................................................................90 5.6.1 Duplicating a Project............................................................................90 5.6.2 Using the Project Maintenance Wizard ....................................................91 5.6.3 Merging Projects .................................................................................93 5.7 PROJECT DATABASE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................94 5.7.1 Project Update ....................................................................................94 5.7.2 Complete Project Update of the Database ...............................................95 5.7.3 List of Projects in the Database .............................................................96 5.7.4 Project Statistics .................................................................................96 5.7.5 Direct Comparison Between Project Configurations...................................96 5.8 PROJECT DATA EXPORT ....................................................................................98 5.8.1 Backward Synchronization of an RNP Project from Radioplan .....................98 5.8.2 Saving a Project into Files.....................................................................98 5.8.3 Actix CellRefs Export............................................................................99 5.8.4 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Export ................................................................99 5.8.5 Configuration Item Export ....................................................................99 5.9 MANAGING NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA IN A PROJECT .......................................... 100 5.9.1 Structure of Network Performance Data................................................ 100 5.9.2 Network Performance Data Import....................................................... 100 5.9.3 Deleting Network Performance Data..................................................... 100 5.10 DELETING AN EXISTING PROJECT ..................................................................... 101 5.11 HANDLING OF MASTER/SUB-PROJECTS .............................................................. 101 5.11.1 Deriving Sub-Projects from a Master Project ........................................ 101 5.11.2 Working with Sub-Projects ................................................................ 102 5.11.3 Synchronizing a Sub-Project with its Master Project .............................. 102 5.11.4 Deleting a Sub-Project ..................................................................... 103

6 MULTI-LAYER PROJECT CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 105
6.1 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 105 6.2 PROJECT SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 106 6.3 AREA MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................... 107 6.3.1 Rules for the Shape of Areas ............................................................... 108
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

6

6.3.2 Simulation Area ................................................................................ 109 6.3.3 Analysis Area.................................................................................... 110 6.3.4 Working with Area Polygons................................................................ 110
6.3.4.1 6.3.4.2 6.3.4.3 6.3.4.4 6.3.4.5 6.3.4.6 6.3.4.7 6.3.4.8 6.3.3.1 6.3.2.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Simulation Area ...................................... 109 Assigning an Area Polygon as Analysis Area .......................................... 110 Importing an Area ............................................................................ 110 Exporting an Area ............................................................................. 111 Duplicating an Area........................................................................... 111 Inspecting Area Polygon Settings ........................................................ 111 Drawing an Area (Sub-) Polygon ......................................................... 112 Editing an Area (Sub-) Polygon ........................................................... 113 Controlling the Visibility of Areas......................................................... 114 Deleting an Area (Sub-) Polygon ......................................................... 114

6.4 CONFIGURATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................... 114 6.4.1 Clutter ............................................................................................. 114
6.4.1.1 6.4.1.2 6.4.1.3 6.4.1.4 6.4.1.5 6.4.1.6 6.4.1.7 6.4.1.8 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5 6.4.3.1 6.4.3.2 6.4.3.3 6.4.3.4

6.4.2 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) ............................................................. 124

Clutter Matrix Format ........................................................................ 115 Defining Clutter Classes ..................................................................... 115 Importing a Clutter Matrix.................................................................. 118 Exporting a Clutter Matrix .................................................................. 119 Viewing a Clutter Matrix..................................................................... 119 Defining a New Clutter Matrix ............................................................. 121 Creating a Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers......................................... 122 Deleting a Clutter Matrix .................................................................... 123 DEM Matrix Format ........................................................................... 124 Importing a DEM Matrix ..................................................................... 124 Exporting a DEM Matrix ..................................................................... 125 Viewing a DEM Matrix........................................................................ 125 Deleting a DEM Matrix ....................................................................... 126 Inspecting Street Data ...................................................................... 126 Importing Streets ............................................................................. 127 Drawing Streets ............................................................................... 127 Deleting Streets ............................................................................... 129

6.4.3 Streets (for Simulation Only) .............................................................. 126

6.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE RAN .......................................................................... 129 6.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 129 6.5.2 Network Controller ............................................................................ 130
6.5.2.1 6.5.2.2 6.5.2.3 6.5.2.4

6.5.3 Site ................................................................................................. 131
6.5.3.1 6.5.3.2 6.5.3.3 6.5.3.4 6.5.3.5 6.5.3.6 6.5.3.7 6.5.3.8 6.5.3.9 6.5.3.10 6.5.3.11 6.5.4.1 6.5.4.2 6.5.4.3 6.5.4.4

Creating the Network Controller .......................................................... 130 Network Controller Settings................................................................ 130 Exporting the Network Controller ........................................................ 130 Deleting the Network Controller .......................................................... 130 Creating a Site ................................................................................. 131 Exporting a Site................................................................................ 131 Duplicating a Site ............................................................................. 131 Moving a Site ................................................................................... 132 Access to Site Settings ...................................................................... 132 General Site Settings ........................................................................ 132 Additional Site Status Info ................................................................. 134 Site Settings Overview ...................................................................... 134 Finding a Site................................................................................... 136 Controlling Sites’ Visibility .................................................................. 137 Deleting a Site ................................................................................. 137 Creating a Cell ................................................................................. 138 Exporting a Cell ................................................................................ 138 Access to Cell Settings....................................................................... 138 General Cell Settings......................................................................... 139
www.actix.com

6.5.4 Cell ................................................................................................. 137

Actix Radioplan User Guide

7

6.5.5 Repeater .......................................................................................... 145
6.5.5.1 6.5.5.2 6.5.5.3 6.5.5.4 6.5.5.5 6.5.5.6 6.5.5.7 6.5.6.1 6.5.6.2 6.5.6.3 6.5.6.4 6.5.6.5 6.5.6.6

6.5.4.5 6.5.4.6 6.5.4.7 6.5.4.8 6.5.4.9 6.5.4.10 6.5.4.11

Cell Custom Parameters..................................................................... 141 Cell Settings Overview....................................................................... 141 Transmitter Settings Overview............................................................ 143 Finding a Cell ................................................................................... 144 Active Flag of Cells and Transmitters ................................................... 144 Duplicating and Dragging a Cell .......................................................... 145 Deleting a Cell.................................................................................. 145 Adding a Repeater ............................................................................ 146 Access to Repeater Settings ............................................................... 146 General Repeater Settings ................................................................. 146 Repeater Settings Overview ............................................................... 148 Switching Repeaters On/Off ............................................................... 148 Dragging a Repeater ......................................................................... 149 Deleting a Repeater .......................................................................... 149 Adding an Additional Antenna at a Cell................................................. 149 Access to Additional Antenna Settings.................................................. 150 General Settings of an Additional Antenna ............................................ 150 Additional Antenna Settings Overview.................................................. 152 Switching Additional Antennas On/Off .................................................. 152 Deleting an Additional Antenna ........................................................... 153

6.5.6 Additional Antenna ............................................................................ 149

6.5.7 Neighbor Lists................................................................................... 153 6.5.8 Pathloss Matrix ................................................................................. 154
6.5.8.1 6.5.8.2 6.5.8.3 6.5.8.4 6.5.8.5 6.5.8.6 6.5.8.7 6.5.8.8 6.5.8.9 6.5.9.1 6.5.9.2 6.5.9.3 6.5.9.4 6.5.9.5 6.5.9.6

6.5.9 Antenna........................................................................................... 160

Importing a Pathloss Matrix................................................................ 154 Pathloss Matrix Format ...................................................................... 155 Inspecting the Settings of a Pathloss Matrix.......................................... 155 Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview ....................................................... 156 Viewing Pathloss Plots ....................................................................... 157 Editing a Pathloss Matrix.................................................................... 157 Duplicating and Dragging Pathloss Matrices .......................................... 158 Deleting a Pathloss Matrix .................................................................. 159 Working with Tuned Pathloss Matrices ................................................. 159 Importing an Antenna ....................................................................... 161 Exporting an Antenna ........................................................................ 162 Duplicating an Antenna...................................................................... 162 Inspecting the Antenna Configuration Data........................................... 162 Viewing the Antenna Diagram............................................................. 164 Deleting an Antenna.......................................................................... 165

6.6 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ............................................................. 165 6.6.1 Assembling a UE Profile...................................................................... 166
6.6.1.1 6.6.1.2 6.6.1.3 6.6.1.4 6.6.1.5 6.6.1.6 6.6.2.1 6.6.2.2 6.6.2.3 6.6.2.4 6.6.2.5 6.6.3.1 6.6.3.2 6.6.3.3

6.6.2 Equipment Profile .............................................................................. 169

Importing a UE Profile ....................................................................... 166 Adding a New UE Profile .................................................................... 167 Inspecting the UE Profile Configuration Data ......................................... 167 UE Profile Settings Overview .............................................................. 168 Duplicating a UE Profile ..................................................................... 169 Deleting a UE Profile ......................................................................... 169 Importing an Equipment Profile........................................................... 169 Exporting an Equipment Profile ........................................................... 170 General Equipment Profile Settings...................................................... 170 Duplicating an Equipment Profile......................................................... 171 Deleting an Equipment Profile............................................................. 171 Importing a Mobility Profile ................................................................ 173 Exporting a Mobility Profile ................................................................. 173 Inspecting the Mobility Profile Configuration Data .................................. 173
www.actix.com

6.6.3 Mobility Profile .................................................................................. 172

.........................6 Compressed Mode Configuration................... 174 Modeling Services ..........5 Load Control Configuration ...........6 Scrambling Code List Handling .....7 6.............................6...................................................3.......7.....6..............3.................. 201 Inspecting the Settings of a Revenue Matrix ...........6..........3 6.....................6................1...... 232 www.......6............. 191 Deleting a Service Profile ............................................................................................................................6.............................6............................................................... 193 Traffic Matrix Format........................... 177 Physical Layer Parameters ......................................................... 217 7......................1 UMTS Resources Configuration for Repeaters ...............1 6.............................6.................................................. 228 7................................3 HSUPA Cell Configuration ......................... 179 Packet Data Settings ...7....4.........1 OTSR Configuration . 207 7.......6.........2 Node B Hardware Configuration.. 202 Deleting a Revenue Matrix .......... 210 7.............................................................4...4 6...6.6............4 Handover and Cell Selection Parameter Settings ......1 6.......... 202 Creating a Revenue Matrix from a Traffic Matrix .............................5 Creating Generic User Profiles .........................7... 182 Duplicating a Service Profile ........6.. 195 Creating a Traffic Matrix from a Surface Plot Layer ................................................6........................3...6 Traffic Matrix ...3..................................1........ 201 Viewing a Revenue Matrix ........ 202 Duplicating and Dragging a Revenue Matrix ...................................................7...3 6................................5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ..........................4 6............7 Revenue Matrix ......................2 HSDPA Cell Configuration ........4..................................6 6.......6...............2..........6...6..............1 General RNC Settings.......................1.. 231 7.............7................... 221 7......................6.. 209 7...2 6........................................ 220 7....................................... 212 7......... 222 7...................................1 RNC CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................... 217 7........................ 231 7..........................4 Common Channels Configuration ...................................1..........3 6...6.. 206 7..........................6.............2 Power Control Related Configuration ............. 177 General Service Profile Settings ......................3...................7 6...............................4........ 194 Inspecting the Settings of a Traffic Matrix............................................. 193 Exporting a Traffic Matrix ........3 Radio Bearer Control Configuration ... 194 Defining a New Traffic Matrix..... 219 7....... 201 Importing a Traffic Matrix ......... 174 6.............6. 205 7.........................................com .......................5 Global Handover Configuration .......................6.........................6.................. 200 Deleting a Traffic Matrix...1 6.............................6...........1...............................3 UMTS CELL CONFIGURATION ............6 6.......................6.........6.......................6.................5 6..........................................................................7..... 200 Importing a Revenue Matrix .......................2 NODE B CONFIGURATION ................................1 UMTS Resources Configuration .............5 Duplicating a Mobility Profile.............6... 215 7. 226 7.................................6.........................................................................6.... 231 7............................. 203 7 UTRAN CONFIGURATION ........................6.......................4...........4 6..6........6..... 224 7..............................................6.......................6...............4...............3............................ 175 Importing a Service Profile .......2.. 201 Revenue Matrix Format.............. 177 Exporting a Service Profile ..............Actix Radioplan User Guide 8 6....3..7 6.......................6...... 229 7..6.2 6.................................9 6.............4..............................8 6......2 6...........3 Node B Connection Configuration............4 6.......................................................6.................................4 UMTS REPEATER CONFIGURATION ...............7......2.3.... 192 6.................4 Service Profile........ 196 Duplicating and Dragging a Traffic Matrix ..........................5 6.. 174 Deleting a Mobility Profile...........actix.........6 6...................................................................................4..........................4.....6..............6.....................8 6.......... 192 6. 205 7............... 191 6...................1....... 180 Traffic Model Configuration...........4.................. 194 Viewing a Traffic Matrix ......5 6......9 6.........................6...........................................................

.. 237 9..................3..................................Actix Radioplan User Guide 9 8 CDMA2000 RAN CONFIGURATION .............. 243 10.................................................. 233 8......1 Analysis Capabilities of Result Parameters ....... 242 10. 233 8............................................ 233 8.4..............3.... 236 9 GSM RAN CONFIGURATION.........................................................................4....................2 iDEN Transmitters Configuration ...4........................ 247 12 NETWORK DATA EVALUATION ................... 235 8.. 246 11....................................... 254 12. 238 9...................................... 233 8...................4 ANALYZING RESULT PARAMETERS ...................5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR .............................4 12...... 235 8.................3............1 NETWORK CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION ................................................4......1 GSM Resources Configuration.................... 240 10 IDEN RAN CONFIGURATION ......................................4......................................... 233 8.....2......................................2 Results Selection Dialog ......................................1 NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA MANAGEMENT.......3 IDEN CELL CONFIGURATION ................................................................2 CDMA2000 BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ..............1 GSM Resources Configuration for Repeaters ......................1 12......actix...........................................................1 iDEN Resources Configuration for Repeaters ........ 244 11 WIMAX RAN CONFIGURATION .....2 12...................... 249 12...................................... 262 Spatial and Temporal Restrictions ...........4...........................................................3 CONCEPT OF RESULT ANALYSIS ...................... 237 9..2....................................3. 249 12.... 262 www..........2 GSM BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ...4................................................................... 241 10..........com ................. 250 12...3.............................................. 245 11........ 237 9.... 245 11............. 239 9......2........................................................................................................................1 BSC CONFIGURATION ......................2 GSM Transmitters Configuration ................1 WiMAX Resources Configuration..............................2 IDEN BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ............3 12...............................................................3 CDMA2000 CELL CONFIGURATION .2 Scrambling Code List Handling ........................................................1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration.......... 255 12............................................... 241 10........................4........ 237 9......................4 CDMA2000 REPEATER CONFIGURATION ..................1 iDEN Resources Configuration ............................2 WIMAX BASE STATION CONFIGURATION .......................................1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration for Repeaters .........4....................................... 235 8........ 245 11.........................................................................5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ..................................... 253 12...............................................................2 BINARY FILE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND DEFAULT PARAMETER IMPORT SETTINGS ................................................4...............................1 WiMAX Resources Configuration for Repeaters ........ 245 11...................................................1 NETWORK CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION ............................................... 239 9.....5 Result Filter ...........................4......................3 WIMAX CELL CONFIGURATION .................5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ............................... 241 10............................... 243 10.........................................4 IDEN REPEATER CONFIGURATION ............... 256 Surface Plots.. 245 11.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ......................................................................................... 246 11.........................................................................4 WIMAX REPEATER CONFIGURATION ..................2......2............................................ 241 10................................3.............................1 RNC CONFIGURATION ...............................3............................... 241 10....................... 260 Histograms ..........3 GSM CELL CONFIGURATION ...........4 GSM REPEATER CONFIGURATION ..... 258 Chart Graphs .............................................................. 250 12.................................... 237 9...................................

................................ 303 12........11...................................................................................................9..............10........................... 278 12........................11............1 Creating a Chart Graph ...........................................................8..4 Export an Interference Matrix .......................9.4 Coinciding Surface Plot Layers .....2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Histograms .............5..................... 300 12.... 287 12.................... 272 12..11....6........2 Identifying a Certain Data Item for Trouble Shooting ..........4 Saving a Table/Report in the Project ......8................. 277 12...........................8..6 Statistical Data Evaluation in Tables .......9 Customization of Tables.............8 Clutter Statistics from a Layer .........................................5......................10 Layer Slide Show .5.... 282 12..............7 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH HISTOGRAMS .2 Traffic Matrix Generation......9 Discrete Value Layers....8..............8...............................................................................................................................................................8..........................10 TRAFFIC MATRIX GENERATION .......................11..........................5 UMTS Combined RSCP and Ec/I0 Analysis .................5 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH SURFACE PLOTS ...........................................................................................6.................................................................. 271 12.............7. 267 12..7 Transforming Table Data into Graphical Presentations ..........................................9.......... 314 www. 265 12.......................................1 Prerequisites ..................9...............................................................6.................................1 Creating a Table .........5 Deriving Histograms from Surface Plots ..................................5. 289 12...............7............. 312 12...............5...1 Prerequisites ...............5...............................................................9 NETWORK KPI ANALYSIS ..1 Creating a Histogram .......................1 Result Surface Plot Layers.........................................7................................................ 283 12...................... 304 12......... 283 12.. 283 12......................2 Creating a Surface Plot from Table Data ................................ 296 12...................................5.......12 RESULT SET AGGREGATION ....... 278 12..... 297 12..................................3 GSM KPI Analysis .8..........2 Create an Interference Matrix Result Set .......5 Customizing the Interference Matrix Generation ..5................................................10 Printing a Table ...................................8.... 314 12................. 279 12.................com 12.........................................4 Customization of Histograms ................................................................. 306 12..... 288 12..actix... 287 12............8...........................................5 Threshold Evaluation Methods in Histograms ........3 Interference Matrix Result Set .............. 288 12.. 280 12.......... 311 12.......6 Printing a Histogram ...............................2 CDMA2000 KPI Analysis.................................8 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH TABLES .................5 Printing a Chart Graph ................................................................................................................................... 263 12....... 274 12.....................................11..........................9...6..................................7......Actix Radioplan User Guide 10 12................7...........7 Cell Statistics from a Layer ................5............6.... 307 12...... 297 12..................5 Embedded Clipboard .......... 313 12...........2 Data Import into Tables.................................................................... 310 12.. 286 12..... 312 12......... 272 12.................7...................................................................................... 275 12...................................... 291 12..............8................3 Creating a Table from a Histogram............6 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH CHARTS (PLOTS OVER TIME) .......... 297 12........ 290 12.................................... 301 12.................... 306 12................7...........6 Extracting Tables from Surface Plots and Cell Visuals ..............................................................................5..................... 284 12................ 276 12..1 UMTS KPI Analysis .. 281 12............. 289 12.....11 INTERFERENCE MATRIX GENERATION ..7.............................4 Customization of Charts ...........3 Data Export from Tables ..............4 KPI Analysis with Measurements .. 293 12.......... 292 ..... 292 Creating a Mapped Surface Plot or Cell Visual from Table Data ......10....................11 Printing Surface Plots ............................3 Creating a Table from a Graph.............................1 12...............3 Manipulating a Surface Plot Layer ....................8....................................... 280 12........2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Chart Graphs...................... 275 12..................................5................. 264 12...............8 Converting Table Data into a Result Set .8.. 266 12....

.............. 335 13...................5..................... 333 13..................... 334 13..........................5.........12 PCI Labeled Raw Format ........................................5.............6........................................................................... 336 Arc/Info ASCII Interchange Format .....1 ESRI World File Format................................ 333 13..................................................... 334 13. 334 13................................com .........10 JPEG File Format.............................................. 335 13................5.........................................1 TIFF / Geo TIFF Format .............................. 335 13....................14 USGS DOQ Format....1..................................... 329 13...............5...............2 BIL File Format...........................6........................... 317 13...... 318 13.... 334 13................ 317 13..................................................................17 ERMapper Compress Wavelets Format ................16 X11 Pixmap Format............................................................8 Hierarchical Data Format (Release 4) ..................1 Menus....... 345 www.....................................................................2 Network Configuration File Format .............................................. 332 13.actix............................ 317 13.......6...................................5.................. 332 13..............................................3......................5.......................5................................................. 328 13..................2 Toolbars..................... 333 13..................5........... 333 13.........................................4 EOSAT Fast Format....2....3 Arc/Info Raster Formats .....................6 GIF File Format .........................................3 LIBRARY OVERVIEW ................................. 334 13....... 332 13..2 13.............................5 SUPPORTED RASTER DATA FILE FORMATS .....................5 Asset Vector Binary Format......................................... 318 13........................4..........5......................... 330 13........... 335 13........................... 336 13...............................11 Atlantis MFF Raster File Format ..................6.........................................1 Shape File Format .............1 Directory Structure of the Network Configuration Files ...................................................4 EXAMPLES OVERVIEW ........................................................................5............ 341 16 INDEX ... 332 13....................................6................................. 317 13...............................1 NETWORK CONFIGURATION DATA SPECIFICATION ..................................... 333 13....... 332 14 ABBREVIATIONS ..2....5.4............1.....................7 Grid eXchange File Format ........................................... 325 13................. 337 15 REFERENCES ...................................................... 332 Arc/Info Binary Grid Format .................. 333 13...............6 SUPPORTED VECTOR DATA FILE FORMATS ..............2..........................................................................................................................13 Portable Network Graphics ..............................3.....................5.................. 329 13......................................................15 USGS SDTS DEM Format..5................................................................. 334 13..... 333 13.......Actix Radioplan User Guide 11 13 APPENDIX ..............5.......5..........9 Japanese DEM Format ............................. 332 13........2 MapInfo File Format .......................................3 Additional Table Grid Settings.........1 13.....................................1 Demo Project ................ 334 13....3 Arc/Info Binary Coverage File Format .......4 Planet ASCII Vector Format....5 Erdas Imagine Format ...5...............5...................................................................2 WINDOW CONTROLS REFERENCE .................................2 Dresden City Example ................................................................5.........................1................................... 327 13.........5......

actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide 12 www.com .

1 Radioplan Radioplan is a comprehensive system for planning.1. optimization. Radioplan Dyn. cut down costs in engineering and planning due to more reliable and quicker data provision. Fig. and to increase network revenues and subscribers' satisfaction by delivering and securing maximal network capacity and high Quality of Service. The present product is targeted at systems like UMTS (UTRA/FDD).. or WiMAX. QoS Network Validation Traffic Mgmt. Fig. iDEN. This platform collects and manages all network related data. Radioplan supports the workflows and procedures in radio network planning. These modules are briefly introduced in the subsequent sections. cope with the increasing network complexity and thus reduce the operational effort. deployment...com . Neighbor List Planning Automating workflow steps Customer Engine. and comprises a variety of functional modules. 1. Its hierarchical database structure and complete GIS functionality enable a convenient usage and an efficient analysis of the network settings and behavior. An overview of the Radioplan system architecture can be found in [R-Admin]. 1-1. CDMA2000. GSM. partly interacting tasks. it comprises the following features: • • complete representation and storage of large area network and environment data automated synchronization of network planning data with other RNP tools www.1 Values and Benefits Radioplan is the perfect solution to • • • • accelerate and secure the development and introduction of mobile networks and wireless services. It functions as the central framework to guide the user throughout the network planning and deployment workflows. deployment. Capital planning .actix.2 Functional Overview Attributed to its framework character. Policies Cell/Antenna optimization Site selection Data Verification Pathloss Tuning Neighbor list generation Neighbor list optimization Traffic matrix generation Interference matrix gener. In order to fulfil its purpose. and operation. 1-1 Radioplan Several modules are embedded into the platform for different.1. Network Simulator Automatic Cell Planning Measurement Module Aut.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 13 1 Overview 1.. 1. and operation support of mobile radio networks. and realizes the pertinent data synchronization with other databases and applications.

measurement data import Measurement Software GPS Receiver Measurement Device Vendor specific Fig.. It efficiently supports the network deployment and optimization workflows.actix. special plots and a measurement summary report can be generated to efficiently extract the www.1 Values and Benefits • • • • comfortable drive test solution for UMTS/FDD open interfaces for a large variety of drive test systems across various network technologies direct connection and synchronization of measured data with a network planning database direct competition analysis between different networks 1. These components interact via the indicated interfaces.com . Furthermore.. Radioplan Filter 1 Measurement Module Filter 2 Filter 3 . 1-2 Network performance measurement system The Radioplan Measurement Module supports two different operation modes which are indicated by the numbers (1) and (2) in the above Figure: • Measurement analysis mode (1): Measurement data can be imported from all major commercially available drive test systems.2.2 Functional Overview The complete network performance measurement solution consists of several components that are shown in Fig. These data can be analyzed using the variety of data evaluation opportunities of Radioplan.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 14 • • • • • • comprehensive interfaces for data exchange and platform integration tuning and verification of network planning data with measurements unified data evaluation system for planning and measurement data fully GIS enabled for numerous Cartesian/geographic coordinate systems and geographic data formats rich analysis and visualization functions with diverse data presentation opportunities database with user rights management for multiple users 1.2. 1. 1-2.2 Measurement Module The Measurement Module is one embedded module of Radioplan.

1 Values and Benefits Radioplan WiNeS comprises both a snapshot and a dynamic network simulator. More detailed information about the Radioplan Measurement Module can be found in [RMeas].3. determine the realistic capacity limits under dynamic conditions. • Drive test mode (2): For directly taking live measurements from the network. e. 1-3. The measurement status can be observed online in different diagram windows (presenting certain measurement parameters) and in a map that automatically follows the current position using an autopad function.actix. All measurement results are stored during the drive test.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 15 main network performance indicators out of the recorded data. secure decisions concerning service level agreements. www. the Panasonic W-CDMA Area Analyzer with a dedicated measurement software Mcollect is supported. minimize the number of dropped services to increase subscriber satisfaction. by imitating trouble regions with different traffic and mobility scenarios. Planning data can be adjusted and calibrated by means of the measurement data incl.3. support optimization tasks. pathloss tuning. 1. The Radioplan WiNeS simulator architecture is depicted in Fig. 1.g. A selection of them with regard to mainly the dynamic network simulator is given below. for example to • • • • • • • find out and define rules for an optimal network rollout.com . maximize the throughput by improving parameter settings under dynamic conditions. It supports both the network planning and rollout phase as well as the network optimization. The drive test mode is only available for UMTS/FDD. 1. configuring the RRM for hierarchical cell layers and multiple frequencies.2 Functional Overview The UTRA/FDD Wireless Network System Simulator comprises many outstanding features that are founded in its superior hybrid technology that unifies the dynamic and snapshot network simulation approaches. In particular the dynamic network simulator can be applied for numerous tasks that make it an excellent solution for 3G network rollout and operation.3 Dynamic/Snapshot UTRA/FDD Radio Network System Simulator (WiNeS) The UTRA/FDD network simulator is one embedded module of Radioplan.

The WiNeS Simulator allows to assess the impact of a multi-service UMTS network.4. • • • • • More detailed information about the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator Module can be found in [RSim]. The WiNeS Simulator supports multiple Transport Channel types thus offering the whole flexibility of the UTRA/FDD air interface.com . Especially in UMTS. The WiNeS Simulator comprises a detailed modeling of Radio Resource Management (RRM) algorithms.1 Values and Benefits • • • • • cut down operational and capital expenditures significantly increase data service revenues and maintain QoS without investments in new sites reduce the time to market for new network setups and new services significantly evolve the network in a controlled manner in alignment with the marketing traffic forecast ensure a leading edge position regarding network quality and capacity against competing networks www. The WiNeS Simulator offers different ways of result reporting (monitoring): The opportunities range from comprehensive data monitoring and statistical analysis to individual link tracing. [R-Snapshot]. Mixed traffic scenarios with both circuit-switched and packet-switched services can be investigated.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 16 Radioplan Topography Technology & Network Setup User Profiles User Behavior WiNeS Simulator Monitor Fig. [R-TecRef].4 Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) is a functional module of Radioplan. 1. 1-3 Wireless Network System Simulator Architecture • The WiNeS Simulator imitates the real radio access network behavior dynamically at system level. 1. there are significant differences between these link directions. It enables a very fast and accurate network optimization. and [R-API]. The WiNeS Simulator enables the study of both uplink and downlink. It was especially designed for investigating the precise impact of these algorithms on the network behavior.actix. This means that a whole radio access network topology (or a representative part of it) with many concurrent users is modeled on a frame based approach with 10 ms resolution.

antenna azimuth. 1. and cell transmission power optimization algorithms for capacity optimization (maintaining coverage level).com . The key characteristics of the Radioplan ACP are given below.4.actix. 1. and site integration very fast: optimizes larger clusters (more than 100 cells) within a few minutes very reliable: can be tuned with live network measurements in conjunction with the Measurement Module More detailed information about the Radioplan ACP Module can be found in [R-ACP]. More detailed information about the Radioplan Automatic Neighbor List Planning Module can be found in [R-ANP]. Radioplan contains a miniAFP Module that allows to automatically optimize the frequency plan and other 2G related cell configurations. network setup DEM map pathloss maps clutter map traffic maps constraints Simulations or Measurements (optional) pre-analysis Simulations or Measurements (optional) reconfiguration of the network setup objective function QoS validation High-speed iterative process Fig. site selection. More detailed information about the miniAFP Module can be found in [miniAFP].6 Automatic Neighbor List Planning (ANP) Neighbor List Planning is another functional module of Radioplan.electrical). antenna height. antenna type. All the usual platform functions including the visualization of AFP related aspects are possible. It allows to automatically create and update neighbor relations between cells based on planning data and measurements.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 17 1. 1-4 Network optimization process supported by the Radioplan ACP • • • • • optimization target: reduce interference between cells and create dominant cell areas.2 Functional Overview Network optimization is the process of steadily improving the network setup from the planning stage up to the live optimization of the running network. coverage optimization. The principle of network optimization as implemented in Radioplan is visualized in Fig. www. balance traffic load between cells while reducing peak traffic reconfigurable parameters: antenna tilt (mechanical or -remote. 1-4. Of particular interest are neighbor relations between cells of different network layers and/or different technologies.5 Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) Relying on the Actix Cellopt AFP technology.

large network configurations may require more memory at least 200 MB hard disk space (10 GB recommended) at least 1. and synchronization. 4 (Getting Started). The actual description of Radioplan is presented in chapters 3 (general usage). new and renamed result parameters are treated in a way that full data integrity is guaranteed. and 12 (data evaluation). The prioritization can be configured using different interference scenarios and is also dependent on the traffic assignment in order to give the most reliable plan for implementation. 1.com . Radioplan contains a module for tuning different parameters of the RRM.actix.0 GHz microprocessor clock speed recommended CD-ROM drive (for installation) 1. The following system prerequisites are required for this module: • • • • • Java JRE 1. 5 (project handling). also new configuration parameters are steadily introduced.7 Automatic RRM Parameter Optimization (APO) Automatic Parameter Optimization embraces all aspects of network optimization that exceed the purely physical parameter set of Automatic Cell Planning or the resource assignment parameters of Automatic Frequency Planning. In addition. 6 to 11 (project configuration).10 System Requirements The general system requirements for running Radioplan in different environments can be found in [R-Admin]. www.8 Capital Planning Capital planning allows the user to prioritize the implementation of cell and site modifications. The required database update of your existing data will be conducted automatically when Radioplan is started for the first time with a new version. The database update will not corrupt your existing data in any way.9 Data Integrity to Prior Versions With the implementation of new features.11 Outline of this User Guide This user guide describes the usage of Radioplan. However. 1. Radioplan comprises all general functionality for network data representation. 1.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 18 1. the configuration data format is fully downward compatible.e. The user guide is concluded with the appendix containing some reference manuals. various seamlessly integrated modules are available that are targeted on certain application scenarios in a real mobile radio access network. the following chapter 2 gives instructions on the installation of the system. i.5 or higher at least 1 GB RAM. After an introduction to the basic principles of the mentioned modules and their interaction in this chapter. one can work with older configuration data without changes since all new parameters are set to according default values. Also. analysis. The WiNeS simulator as part of Radioplan is written in Java.

com +65 6333 7469 +65 6333 5540 Regional contact EMEA: Email: Support direct number: Fax: Actix switchboard: EMEAsupport@actix.com +1 703 707 4779 +1 8777 72 ACTIX +1 703 707 4778 +1 703 707 4777 Regional contact Asia Pacific: Email: Support direct number: Fax: ap.com +44 20 8735 6303 +44 20 8735 6301 +44 20 8735 6300 Direct Actix Radioplan product support: Email: Support direct number: Fax: support.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 19 1.dresden@actix.12 Support Comprehensive product support is available at the following contact points: Main support web portal: Main support email contact: Regional contact Americas: www.support@actix.actix.myactix.com .com • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Email: Support direct number: Support US toll free: Fax: Actix switchboard: support.us@actix.com support@actix.com +49 351 404 29 20 +49 351 404 29 50 www.

com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 20 www.actix.

insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Then just follow the instructions on the screen. More information about the installation in different environments can be found in [RAdmin].Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 21 2 Installation 2. Make sure that you have those rights when Radioplan is installed with hardware dongle support. Radioplan can generally be installed on a stand-alone computer or in a Citrix environment. optionally certain modules of Radioplan that are enabled depending on license flags user manuals (this and other documents. side-by-side installations of different releases are supported. see references) incl. The installation of the driver for the hardware dongle requires administrator rights on the computer. a client-server application that manages all configuration data and results. The setup program is automatically started.1.3.actix. Thus. the software is installed comparable to any other Windows application.1. make sure that any of the dongles is not inserted before the entire installation procedure has been finished! This will ensure that the USB port driver for the hardware dongle is installed correctly before the dongle is inserted for the first time. If floating licenses in a computer network shall be used. an on-line help function. The Windows Installer is configured and the setup procedure is started. To install the software on a stand-alone computer (Windows 2000/XP platform).com . and several example projects. In the first case.1 Radioplan Software Package The Radioplan application comprises • • • • • the AO Platform. If no other path is specified the default Radioplan installation folder %ApplicationPath% is: c:\program files\Actix\Radioplan\<Radioplan-version>\ . The InstallShield installer software is used for the setup process. Any previous Radioplan installation of a different version is not removed by this setup process.1 Setting Up the Radioplan Working Environment 2. www. please consider the additional information in section 2. Important Notice for Hardware Dongle Usage If the Radioplan installation is delivered with a hardware dongle.2 Radioplan Installation Process This section describes the normal installation procedure for Radioplan on a single computer. a library with building blocks for radio network configurations.

Important Notice for Installation Make sure that the hardware dongle is not inserted into the USB port before the entire installation procedure has been finished! This will ensure that the USB port driver for the dongle is installed correctly before it is inserted into the computer for the first time. Further information can also be found in the module-specific manuals: [R-ACP] [R-ANP] [R-Meas] [R-Sim]. More information on license management can be found in [R-Admin].3 License Management Radioplan has a built-in software protection function to avoid illegal copies of registered products.5 or higher. Normally such settings are configured only during the installation process. 2. or to repair the installation. 2. If necessary.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 22 Important Notice for the WiNeS Network Simulator The WiNeS Network Simulator requires a Java Runtime Environment.actix. Since most of the computers have already installed an up-to-date JDK or a JRE. They support the following two options: • • Single License: The Radioplan software can only be used on that computer where the hardware dongle is inserted. to install any other feature. if necessary they could also be adjusted at any given time. The end-user-relevant options are explained in the following sections. In order to uninstall the Radioplan software. Two different options can be used: either hardware dongles or software license files. it must be done separately. also floating licenses can be supported. release 1.ini files that contain application parameters and.3. thus. All *. However.ini files are located in the Radioplan configuration folder %APPDATA%.2 Customization of the Radioplan Installation There are several *. In the case of hardware dongles. 2. just run the setup program again.8 and higher) by default: c:\documents and settings\all users\application data\actix\radioplan\<Radiopl an-version>\configuration [R-Admin] gives more explanations on the most important of those initialization files. enable a customization of Radioplan. These security devices can be plugged into the USB port of a computer. which is (for Radioplan version 3.com . The Radioplan software can be used concurrently on any computer in the network up to the number of purchased floating licenses. Floating License: A single hardware dongle controls the software usage in a computer network. The original JRE by Sun Microsystems is available on the installation CD-ROM in the directory \jre\ as additional setup executable. www.1 Hardware Dongles Radioplan can be delivered with hardware dongle protection by MARX Datentechnik GmbH. the Java Runtime Environment is not installed by InstallShield.

g. 2-1 General procedure of the hardware key update process The necessary steps for creating a transaction key and updating the hardware security device using an activation code provided by Actix is described in detail in the following. as schematically depicted in Fig. Using this activation file.g. 2-1. the calculations will continue and the user will be prompted to reconnect to the license at a later time.3.com . the number of purchased Radioplan licenses is equal to the number of hardware dongles shipped.2 Floating License Management The installation and administration of the floating license manager is described in [RAdmin].2 and also [R-Admin]): [License] License = 0 Port = "USB" Server = "USB" 2. This section describes how the license information can be updated at the end user’s side without sending the USB dongle to Actix.3. the customer can update the respective hardware dongle. As long as Radioplan is running. additional software modules– also for a limited time period – these modules can be activated remotely by reprogramming the hardware dongle.ini file. the dongle should be kept inserted.1. which is located in the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.3 Remote Update Procedure for a Hardware Dongle If Radioplan is protected by a hardware dongle and all the necessary license information is retrieved from this USB hardware security device.3. make sure to have the following settings in the license. 2. the dongle must be inserted into the USB port of that computer where Radioplan is used. an optimization). When a customer licenses e. Should the dongle become dislodged while calculations are being performed (e. In order to use a hardware dongle for license control on a single computer. the customer generates a transaction file for the currently connected hardware dongle.1. www. So in this case.actix. This file must be sent to Actix. First. and in return an activation file is submitted to the end user.1 Single Computer License When using a hardware dongle for a single computer license. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 23 2.1.

Initially. In this case.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 24 The transaction necessary to start a license update can be generated with the utility rupdate. please send the following information via email to support. the application is bound to the hardware of a specific workstation. If an open transaction is detected. reinstalled or an update is installed. the update procedure executed by pressing the Update button will reprogram your hardware dongle. 2. Fig. www.2 and also [R-Admin]) before you start Radioplan for the first time.actix. It is not possible to reprogram other hardware dongles using the submitted activation code. a warning appears and the user has the choice to cancel this open transaction. the license is in a locked status where the application can be executed a maximum of 30 times. the customer must contact our support in order to unlock the license. If successful. This transaction key is also stored onto the hardware dongle. copy the license file into the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.com or via the portal www. However.rfp. Thus. The application window of the Remote Update utility is shown in in Fig.rfp). The license file must be saved before Radioplan is removed.exe. Note that only that hardware dongle can be updated that the transaction key was created for. Then. The license file mechanism distinguishes two states of the license. This application was installed together with Radioplan and can be found in the %ApplicationPath%\licensing\RUpdate subdirectory. namely an activation code (default: ActCode.com .myactix. 2-2. the customer will receive a file that comprises the updated hardware dongle information. all license information is stored in a file (wineslicense.dresden@actix. During this period. In return.com: • • the serial number of the dongle (as found on the little badge attached on the dongle) and the transaction key file TrKey. Once the license has been unlocked. it is only possible to create a new transaction key. This key can be exported to a file with the Export button. see also [R-Admin].3. Please. refer to the next Section for further details. it is still possible to overwrite a previously created transaction key which cancels the transaction started before.2 Software License Files The alternative to hardware dongles is license files.lf) which is delivered on a separate diskette. if no transaction was initialized before or if the last transaction was already completed. a new transaction key is shown in the upper field. Finally. It is possible to transfer a registered license from one PC to another PC. 2-2 Remote update utility used for hardware dongle reprogramming A transaction key is created by executing the New Transaction button. This file must be imported into the Remote Update utility by using the Import button.

In this case.3. and submit the computer ID number of the workstation where Radioplan shall be unlocked.com).actix. you can enter these values in the fields Registration Code 1 and Registration Code 2 of the dialog. 2-3 License registration dialog 2. a simple three-step procedure is performed utilizing a blank floppy disk. refer to Fig. Within this period.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 25 When using a license file. Immediately. 2-3. Then you press the button Process Registration Codes to update the license file. The current license status is shown in the lower part of the dialog.1 Registering Radioplan It is necessary to unlock the Radioplan license for normal use.ini file: [License] License = 2 This file is located in the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. we return the registration codes to unlock the application. 2. Do not use the original license file diskette that was delivered with Radioplan! www.2.dresden@actix.com . customers may want to move licensed software from one machine to another. the customer must contact our technical support via email (support.2 and also [R-Admin]). The computer ID of your workstation is shown in the License Registration dialog. Radioplan can be executed a maximum of 30 times. a shared directory can be used as transfer media as well.2.2 License Transfer From time to time. The dialog is reachable in Radioplan by the menu entry Tools License Management License Registration…. This license transfer scheme can be accomplished without having the customer call for registration codes. Without doing so.3. which initially contains no license file. Fig. When you have received the registration code(s) from the technical support. As an alternative. it must be ensured that the following settings are valid in the license.

This file has already been properly enabled for the target machine. Then choose the menu item Tools License Management Start License Transfer to create a blank license file on the floppy identified with the computer ID number of the new machine. Step 2: In the second step. This software will be locked.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 26 Step 1: To transfer a license from one computer to another. the license file on the floppy is enabled and the license file on the current (old) computer is disabled. www. the blank floppy disk is taken to the licensed (old) machine.actix. Choose the menu item Tools License Management Transfer this license on the old machine which manipulates the license file stored on the floppy and de-authorizes the license on the current machine.com . so it will not run for an unlimited time. Step 3: The last step is to simply move the license file from the floppy disk onto the new computer to be licensed. The license file can be copied using the menu item Tools License Management Complete License Transfer on the target machine. During this step. Radioplan must be installed on the new machine.

. it enables the user to • • • • • • manage/load/save projects view and evaluate configuration data in several ways configure a complete network setup incl. in a Citrix environment by double clicking an application icon or directly out of an RNP tool. There are also other ways of invoking Radioplan. www. environment invoke and control modules of Radioplan as.. The application window looks as in Fig.) Components Toolbar Message Window Status Bar Fig.g. A reference to the controls can be found in appendix 13. Cell Search Toolbar Tree Window Menu Bar Standard Toolbar Views Toolbar Module Toolbars Paint Toolbar Viewing Area (surface plot. deployment. e. As soon as a project has been opened. the viewing area is filled. 3-1 Window controls of the Radioplan application In the following. the ACP module load/export network configurations and various measurement data view and evaluate network related data in a large variety of ways Usually.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 27 3 Radioplan Introduction The Radioplan application provides a comfortable graphical user interface for a variety of tasks in the radio network planning..2. however initially with an empty viewing area. 3-1.actix. chart graph. e. table. In particular. .g. and optimization workflows. the main window controls of Radioplan are introduced. Radioplan is started from the Windows start menu under a local installation.

the orientation of the supported 3D coordinate systems is explained.1 Coordinate System Radioplan. This can be done by choosing a second display coordinate system.com . This display coordinate system can be a Cartesian or a geographical coordinate system. Fig. a rotation. To understand how Radioplan handles different coordinates.1 Geographical and Cartesian Coordinate Systems A geographical coordinate system describes a position in 3D space with respect to the earth by a longitude and a latitude. it is possible to represent display coordinates in a second projection or in a second geographical coordinate system. often given in degrees that are measured relative to a reference ellipsoid. Since the earth is not an ideal sphere.actix. it may be helpful to represent coordinates in a different coordinate system compared to the projection system. Many different coordinate systems exist in order to describe a small piece out of the earth’s surface by a flat plane as accurately as possible.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 28 3. given by a datum transformation. In some cases. first a short introduction into types of coordinate systems and their transformation is given. Therefore. the projection of its surface onto a flat plane is done part wise. Note that this projection coordinate system is used for all coordinates stored internally. Table 3-1 contains a description of the parameters. a projection coordinate system must be defined. 3-2 explains the coordinate system transformation between a projection and a display coordinate system schematically: www. 0 0 ⎤ ⎡ 1 ⎡ x ⎤ ⎡ dx ⎤ ⎡1 + m ⎢ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢dy ⎥ + ⎢ 0 1+ m 0 ⎥ ⋅ ⎢ − rz ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ z ⎥ ⎢ dz ⎥ ⎢ 0 0 1 + m⎥ ⎢ r y ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ rz 1 − rx − ry ⎤ ⎡ x0 ⎤ ⎥ rx ⎥ ⋅ ⎢ y 0 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ 1 ⎥ ⎢ z0 ⎥ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ (3. Such a transformation can be described by seven parameters in a way given by (3. Next. A datum transformation is the composite operation of a translation.1. Some of the projections are defined relative to a set of common reference ellipsoids. supports both geographical and Cartesian coordinate systems. 3. It constitutes the transformation of Cartesian coordinates into geographical coordinates and vice versa. earth-fixed) system. as a GIS-enabled platform. the projection plane.1) Table 3-1 Datum transformation parameters Parameter Description Unit dx dy dz m rx ry rz translation dx to WGS84 translation dy to WGS84 translation dz to WGS84 scaling factor to WGS84 rotation ro (rho) to WGS84 rotation rf (phi) to WGS84 rotation rk (kappa) to WGS84 m m m ppm (parts per million) radian radian radian In order to represent a position in both Cartesian coordinates and geographical coordinates. and a scaling of a point in 3D space. This type of coordinate systems is frequently called an ECEF (earth centred. A Cartesian coordinate system defines the projection of a part of the earth’s surface onto a flat plane.1).

3-2 Principle of coordinate system transformation between projection and display coordinate systems The coordinate systems can be chosen in the projection dialog. Fig. 3-3 Projection settings dialog From the upper list box in the coordinate settings dialog one of the coordinate systems for the projection can be selected.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 29 Projection Coordinate System Cartesian Coordinates Geographical Coordinates Datum Transformation (optional) WGS 84 Datum Transformation (optional) Display Coordinate System Geographical Coordinates Cartesian Coordinates Fig. The format used in the ini-file is called Well Known Text (WKT) format. It can be handled by several GIS tools. accessible via View Projection… from the menu bar. GPS positions from drive test measurements) are imported. optionally a display coordinate system can be chosen. the display coordinate system can be a Cartesian or geographical system. The snapshot below shows a definition of a standard projection coordinate system with a certain datum transformation to and from WGS84: www. Especially if geographical coordinates (e.actix. In the lower part. The coordinate system list itself can be modified by editing the wkt. Depending on the selection buttons.com . The choice of a proper projection coordinate system is decisive for a correct import of georeferenced data or maps. Each coordinate system is defined by at least two lines.g. An optional third line can be used for a user-defined datum transformation. located in the coordinatesystems subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.ini file.2 and also [R-Admin]). the right projection coordinate system must have been chosen before.

0. directions in the 3-dimensional coordinate system are given in terms of the angles ϕ and ϑ. 3. www.0]. Therefore.PARAMETER["central_meridian".PARAMETER["false_easting".1528128]].DATUM["Deutsche_Hauptdreiecksnetz". the EPSG identifiers will be stored into the SQL database for the projection and optionally the display coordinate system.105.SPHEROID["Bessel 1841".0. Especially when handling antenna diagrams. They have the following meanings: • • • • North: positive y-direction South: negative y-direction West: East: negative x-direction positive x-direction These relations are depicted in Fig.696e-6.4500000].0].2 Euclidian Cartesian Coordinate Systems used in Radioplan Internally. 0].0.GEOGCS["DHDN".1]] TOWGS84=582. 0174532925199433]].actix.5.1. z y x Fig.1.12].PARAMETER["scale_fac tor".414.PARAMETER["false_northing".Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 30 EPSG=31494 PROJCS["DHDN / Germany zone 4". Radioplan uses a 3-dimensional Euclidian coordinate system as depicted in Fig. It consists of a horizontal x-y-plane and a vertical z-axis. 3-4. 3-4 Coordinate system used in Radioplan Often the coordinates of the x-y-plane are denoted by means of the orientations North – South – West – East. The orientation of these angles is presented below.8. it is necessary that all users who use the same database work with equal coordinate system definitions that can be simply achieved by using one identical wkt. 3-5.1].-1.042e-6.0.155.4932e-5.UNIT["metre".299.UNIT["degree".com .ini file.PRIMEM["Greenwich".3 Internally.PROJECTION["Transverse_Mercator"].PARAMETER["latitu de_of_origin".6377397.

As an example.g. an angle of ϕ = 90° denotes the direction of the y-axis (North). i. Then the angle ϕ starts counting at the y-axis (North). However. see section 6.e. 3-5 Horizontal x-y-plane of the coordinate system The angle ϕ in the horizontal x-y-plane is defined in the range [0° … 360°). An angle of ϑ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis. with the same orientation as described above. positive angles represent a corresponding downtilt of an antenna. 3-7. The antenna orientation used in a project is shown for information in the project settings dialog with the checkbox Use Horizontal North-To-East Orientation. ACP Optimization Module. The angle ϑ is counted downward and is defined in the range [-90° … 90°]. horizontal antenna patterns are given in a North-to-East alignment. It is also involved in the 3-dimensional antenna pattern interpolation algorithm as described in section 6.2 Menu Bar Most of the functionality of Radioplan can be reached from the menu bar. An angle of ϑ = -90° denotes the direction of the z-axis. It is counted clockwise such that an angle of ϕ = 90° denotes the direction of the x-axis (East). By default. Alternatively. The vertical x-z-plane is shown in Fig. WiNeS Simulation Module) can be accessed there. the North-to-East alignment is used. the angle ϕ could be counted counter-clockwise.8. 3-7 Radioplan menu bar www.actix. an antenna with ϑ = 10° means that the antenna has 10° downtilt. 3-5). An angle of ϕ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis (East). Measurement Module. this setting cannot be changed. Besides the general functions.e. vertical antenna patterns are usually defined for a range of ϑ = [0° … 360°) where an angle of ϑ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis. 3-6 Vertical x-z-plane of the coordinate system In contrast to this.com . see Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 31 North North-to-East orientation Alternative orientation East ϕ = 0° y West ϕ x ϕ = 0° South Fig. also the distinct modules (e.2. there are two possible orientations of ϕ (refer to Fig. i. 3. The rear hemisphere of the pattern is then in the range ϑ = [90° … 270°) from bottom to top. Naturally.5. 3-6. z ϑ x Fig. Fig. • • In the standard case.

This toolbar is undocked by default and is only visible if the graphics mode is active. The same functionality is also contained Visible Components submenu. 3-8. functions to load.2.2. and partly the View menus. e. When positioning the mouse pointer over a toolbar icon. www. They embrace. 3. the window controls can be used in the normal way.4 Layer Concept Radioplan supports an arbitrary number of layers for surface plots.actix. The paint toolbar defines the mode that controls the actions of the mouse pointer. or text) in graphics layers to produce e. An explanation of the respective function is also shown in the status bar. in the View cells. annotations for surface plots. • • • • • • More information about the toolbars and their customization can be found in appendix 13.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 32 3.6. the WiNeS network simulator.. and an optional legend can be toggled. Paint submenu. Edit. Cells are identified both in the map and in the hierarchical data tree. among others. streets. In the default It comprises the same functionality as the View paint mode. also a dedicated menu is provided. and save configurations and network data. a tooltip with a short description of the corresponding function appears. All created layers are collected in the Layers tab of the tree window. In all the other modes. In particular.com .g. An example set of different layers is shown in Fig. and to print and to zoom active views. • The standard (or default) toolbar offers functionality that is mainly contained in the File.3 Toolbars Several toolbars are provided for easy access to frequently used functions. the presentation of sites.g. These plots can also be called from Configuration Data Plots submenu among others. The module toolbars summarize the main controls for the different modules of Radioplan as. The graphics toolbar allows to draw certain graphical objects (e.g. refer to section 3. simulation/analysis area boundaries. the mouse pointer is used to perform special actions. The views toolbar provides quick access to the network layers and some surface plot views of configuration and network data. the View The cell search toolbar offers easy access to a text based search function for cells in the network. For each of the modules. labels of the sites and the cells. These layers can be displayed in arbitrary order and with freely definable transparency. The components toolbar has some checkboxes to show or hide the distinct configuration data items in surface plots. All toolbars can be freely moved inside the application window by dragging and dropping with the mouse. lines. polygons.

actix. Only if the corresponding layer is created anew. They are summarized in Table 3-2 along with the symbols as they appear in the Layers tab.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 33 Fig. a configuration matrix is moved). Most of these data can be shown by clicking the respective icon from the views toolbar.1 Configuration Data Layers Several configuration data can be presented in layers. the layer presentation is updated. 3.g.com . 3-8 Sample view of the Layers tab Layers can be created from several things. More configuration data plots are Configuration Data Plots submenu where also some technology available from the View specific plots can be visualized. The only exception is the traffic data that cannot be viewed www.4. Table 3-2 Different layer types Symbol Layer Contents configuration data measurement data result data (network performance data from different Radioplan Modules) optimization plots images post-processing layer (created by coinciding two layers) post-processing layer (created by manipulating a single layer) cell visual graphics layer A layer is not recalculated if the underlying data are modified (e.

2 Alternatively. the antenna patterns. 2 When creating a surface plot that utilizes antenna diagrams (like pathloss incl. if pathloss matrices are available. This accelerates any further creation of such plots. the Interpolate Image checkbox is selected in the layer settings dialog. best cell received power Best Cell Received Power Creates a layer of the best cell received power distribution in the network from all active cells of the currently active network layer(s).4. a single pathloss matrix can be shown including the currently active cell antennas by selecting Show this Matrix incl.5.5).1. Antenna Diagrams from the corresponding pathloss matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. a single pathloss matrix can be shown by selecting Show this Matrix from the corresponding pathloss matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. cell overlap. it can only be created if pathloss matrices are available. or all cell area mapped plots) for the first time. pathloss incl. www. interference ratio.2 A pathloss.actix.5.e.5. Read more details about the distinct configuration data layers in Table 3-3. RSSI.5).com 1 . Table 3-3 General configuration data layers Data Views Toolbar Icon Menu Entry in View Configuration Data Plots Use Plot Settings Dialog? Comment pathloss — Composite Pathloss — Creates a layer of the composite pathloss distribution in the network from all active sites.8.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 34 from a toolbar icon or menu entry because it is service specific. a best pilot received power. best cell received power. antennas — Composite Pathloss with Antennas — Creates a layer of the composite pathloss distribution including antenna patterns in the network from all active sites / cells.8.1 Alternatively. see section 3. a caching procedure is done. or an interference ratio layer is interpolated by default. and the cell pilot powers. antennas.1. Since this plot is generated from the pathloss distribution. an RSSI. i. if pathloss matrices are available.

i.actix. see below.2 Creates a layer of the Active Set size under the assumption of 0dB hysteresis.2 Creates a layer of the best serving cell plot considering all active cells of the currently active network layer(s).Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 35 Data Views Toolbar Icon Menu Entry in View Configuration Data Plots Use Plot Settings Dialog? Comment interference ratio Interence Ratio Creates a layer of the relevant signal-to-interference measure depending on technology for the active network layer(s). This margin can be configured as the Cell Overlap Window in the plot settings dialog.5.3 Creates a layer of the cell overlap under the assumption of 0dB hysteresis and a configurable HO margin below the best pilot for the currently active network layer(s). configurable in the plot settings dialog.2 best serving cell Best Serving Cell cell overlap Cell Overlapping Active Set size — Active Set Size frequency plan — Frequency Plan RSSI — RSSI 3 A best serving cell plot layer is presented with discrete colors to make adjacent cell areas better distinguishable. where each cell area is assigned a certain color. Thus the Discrete Colors checkbox is selected in the layer settings dialog.2. www.com . this layer can only be created if pathloss matrices are available.1.1. It shows the cell areas in colors that correspond to the carrier frequencies of the cells. it can only be created if pathloss matrices are available. i. for GSM or iDEN networks a C/I plot of the BCCH signals is shown. see below. with a HO margin below the best pilot and a maximal Active Set size for the currently active network layer(s). CDMA2000) an Ec/I0 plot of the pilot signals is shown. For CDMA-type networks (UMTS.2 Creates a layer of the RSSI under the assumption of a certain network load for the currently active network layer(s). for WiMAX networks a CINR plot of the pilot signals is shown. The best serving cell areas are derived from the best cell received power.2 Creates a layer of the frequency plan of the network for the currently active network layer(s).4. see section 3.e.e. The determination of the cell areas is based on the best serving cell plot.

4. clutter or DEM).2.com .1.6.5). clutter Clutter Data DEM matrix DEM Terrain Data — traffic — — — All the configuration data layers that do not just represent a direct mapping of matrix configuration data (such as e. each traffic matrix can be shown for itself in a separate layer. the plot parameters are described in Table 3-4.1.4). www. Creates a layer of the DEM matrix (if available). require some further parameters to be specified before the plot is created.4. a plot settings dialog is shown before the actual plot is created. It shows the clutter class indices by colors according to the current color palette. it is not expedient to generate a composite traffic plot. Instead. To accomplish this. The plot settings dialog is given in Fig. So for all layers that have the corresponding checkbox ticked in the Use Plot Settings Dialog? column in Table 3-3.6. Since every service has its own traffic matrix. This layer can also be created by choosing Show this Matrix from the clutter matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. The default settings in the dialog are initialized from the general surface plot settings dialog that can be accessed from the Tools menu.g. 3-9.actix. The different ground height levels are displayed according to the current color palette. choose Show this Matrix from the respective traffic matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. This layer can also be created by choosing Show this Matrix from the DEM matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 36 Data Views Toolbar Icon Menu Entry in View Configuration Data Plots Use Plot Settings Dialog? Comment C/A — C/A Creates a layer of the carrier-toadjacent channel interference for all active cells of the currently active GSM or iDEN network layer(s).5).2 — Creates a layer of the clutter matrix.

The pixel size of the layer to be created. 3-9 Plot settings dialog (here: for Best Pilot Power plot for UMTS) Table 3-4 Plot creation parameters Parameter Description Unit Plot Title The plot title for the layer to be created. a possibly existing layer of the same type would be re-used and overwritten. — Use Pathloss Clutter Offsets (= Indoor Coverage) Restrict Plot to Simulation Area — — www. This field is initialized with the proper layer name depending on the chosen layer type and active network layer. This setting is by default active. Pixels where the Rx power is lower than this threshold will by empty in the created layer. this flag will be disabled initially. If this checkbox is active.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 37 Fig. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the layer functions. This effectively models indoor coverage thresholds. additional pathloss offsets as defined in the clutter classes definition are applied in relation to the Minimum DL Rx Power. If this checkbox is active. the new layer will be restricted to the simulation area.com . — Pixel Size Minimum DL Rx Power m dBm Options Overwrite existing Layer If this checkbox is active. if the corresponding flag in the general surface plot settings is set.actix. The assumed minimum required DL Rx power of the pilot to be considered for the plot.

for UMTS.e.actix. for GSM. the interference ratio plot is created using an expected interference approach. The resulting plot then represents the general overlap / interference situation between all cells. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool. If this checkbox is active. for GSM. for UMTS. areas with zero traffic will be empty in the layer. additional antennas and repeaters will use the same color in best cell area plots as their associated primary cell. The network load can be specified by the Network Load parameter.com . The user can choose between the 1st and 5th best server. for UMTS. any shadowing margin or mobile terminal noise figure (sensitivity) to create an interference ratio plot. all BCCH and TCH channels would be assumed on the same frequency. The resulting plot then represents the actual interference situation on the BCCH. the frequency plan is considered in the interference calculation for an interference ratio plot. The total cell power can be specified by the Cell Tx Power parameter. CDMA2000 only dBm Constant Network Load — Constant Cell Tx Power A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming a constant cell Tx power in all cells. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. iDEN only — Co-Channel Network If this checkbox is active. for GSM.g. — Noise Floor The total noise threshold that is used as the thermal background noise incl. CDMA2000 only — Frequency Plan If this checkbox is active. In this case the interference depends on the total number of available frequencies in the network and the forbidden frequencies at each cell/radio. — Use Color of Primary Cell for Additional Antennas and Repeaters Special Plot Settings — Evaluate Nth Best Server Interference Defines the Nth best server for the creation of a received power / RxLev plot. i.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 38 Parameter Description Unit Mask Area by Traffic If this checkbox is active. CDMA2000 only — Individual Cell Tx Power A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming individual cell Tx powers. iDEN only — Expected Interference If this checkbox is active. iDEN only — www. A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming a constant network load in all cells. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e. the new layer will be masked with the traffic matrix.

i + RSCPCCCH . and NF is the (average) noise figure at the terminals. A network load of 0% corresponds to DL control channel power only. Ppilot. the Ec/I0 at each pixel of the best pilot Ec/I0 plot for UMTS is calculated in the following manner: Ec I0 = RSCPbest pilot RSCPpilot .Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 39 Parameter Description Unit Network Load The DL network load for data traffic that is used to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Network Load option is selected. cable losses.com . The constant DL transmit power assumed for all cells to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Cell Tx Power option is selected. PLeffective. i = P[ pilot / CCCH ]. antenna gain. best cell + other cells j ∑ Ptotal . j − PCCCH . best cell − Ppilot . j − Ppilot .5. PCCCH. j where nl is the presumed total DL network load. In case the Constant Network Load option is selected in the plot settings dialog. body loss. i is the maximal transmit power of cell i (given by the cell parameter Maximum Power or Output Power). refer to section 3. i is the compound transmit power of the other common control channels in cell i. e. etc. best cell PLeffective . i is the effective pathloss from cell i (incl. Interference ratio plots of other technologies are calculated in a similar way. i PLeffective. j PLeffective . www.). L is the compound loss factor (including e. % Cell Tx Power dBm # of Available Channels # Cell Overlapping / Active Set Cell Overlap Window The cell overlap margin below the best received pilot where cells are counted for the cell overlap and Active Set size plots.g. N is the thermal noise floor. i is the PCPICH transmit power of cell i. i + 1 N ⋅ 4 L 4 NF ⋅ ⋅ 23 100% all cells i all cells i all cells i total noise threshold ∑ ∑ ∑ with RSCP[ pilot / CCCH ]. i and all cells i ∑ RSCP dedicated traffic . The maximal Active Set size applied for creating the Active Set size plot. antenna directivity.g.2. The default values for the network load nl and the total noise threshold L ⋅ N ⋅ NF (noise floor) can be configured in the general settings dialog. cable losses. The assumed number of available channels in the network to be considered for creating an interference ratio plot if the Expected Interference option is selected. dB Max.actix. body loss and any additional attenuation).2. Read more about the network layer management in section 5. i + nl RSCPdedicated traffic . 100% of network load mean that all cells transmit at their maximum output power. i = Ptotal . Active Set Size # All layers created by help of the plot settings dialog represent the current setting of active network layer(s). best cell − PCCCH . Ptotal.

a DL C/I). an overview is provided in appendices 13.g. However. especially if so-called ‘before – after’ comparisons shall be made. the result data are mapped homogeneously to the corresponding best cell areas.1. one can hold down the <Shift> key while selecting the corresponding toolbar icon or menu entry.5. described in [R-ACP]. See appendix 13.com .4. Some data formats directly support georeferencing information. described in [R-Meas]. Read more about the creation of result data surface plots in chapter 12. raster images can also be imported by clicking the icon from the standard toolbar (tooltip: Import Raster Image …).6 (vector formats). 3. Otherwise. 3. Measurement data layers are only available in the Measurement Module. however. Also plots created from values in a table are result data layers. Once an image file has been loaded into a project. A large variety of file formats is supported.wld.actix. For cell/site specific parameters. the result data are mapped to the respective UE positions to create a pixel matrix. multiple file selection is supported. 3. www.gif or *. respectively.jpg) can be georeferenced by using an ESRI world file with the same name and commonly the extension *.4. This means that the previous layer presentation is lost because its data is overridden. all respective images are loaded automatically. in some cases it is useful to retain older layers of the same configuration data. a reference to it is stored in the database. To accomplish this. The image file must be georeferenced in order to be properly loaded and displayed at the desired coordinates. A file open dialog appears where the user can select the file name(s) of the image(s).4 Optimization Data Layers The network optimization process is visually supported by some special surface plots. *. For UE specific parameters (as e. although their appearance in the surface plots is slightly different in order to distinguish between them.5 Image Layers An arbitrary number of images from raster or vector data files can be imported as distinct Import layers by using the entries Raster Image… and Vector Data… from the File submenu.2 Measurement Data Layers All network related data imported from a measurement device are displayed in measurement data layers.1 for details on the georeferencing capabilities of the distinct file formats.5 (raster formats) and 13. Optimization data layers are only available in the ACP Optimization Module. a certain configuration data layer is reused if the layer is created anew. Then a new layer is created containing the current status of those configuration data. These surface plots represent either optimization results or auxiliary measures that help to understand and asses the progress of the network optimization. 3. This classification is used both for online measurement data during a drive test and for measurement data post-processing. Whenever the same project is opened again.3 Result Data Layers It is possible to create layers from all result parameters.4. others (such as e.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 40 Usually.4. Remember Holding down the <Shift> key while creating a layer will add a new layer even if another layer of the same nature already exists. This type of layer could serve as background images. the previous layer would be overridden. Alternatively.g.

A newly created layer will be placed topmost. the order of the layers in the Layers tab decides upon the visibility of the layers. the < > and < > arrow keys can be used to step up or down in the list.4. Checking a layer automatically selects that layer. Then the layer name can be edited. Even post-processing layers themselves can be manipulated or coincided again. 3. thickness. To rename a layer. the same function can be chosen from the layer’s context menu by clicking Activate only this Layer. Also. so various parameters can be displayed simultaneously. In general. Accessing the manipulating and coinciding layers function is described below in section 3. 3.4. All graphics layers once created in a project are retained in the database when the project is closed. more details about this function can be found in chapter 12. in particular. Higher ordered layers are always www.. The only exception from this rule is image layers that are always appended below all other layers. it will appear as first layer in the Layers tab. swapped in a layer slide show. if several layers are displayed simultaneously.g.4. any pair of two layers (except image layers or graphics layers) can be coincided using various functions to generate a new. the key command <RETURN> can be used to invoke this function for the currently selected layer item.actix. Thus when re-opening the project previous graphics layers are still available and can be used for flexible graphical annotation of surface plots. polygons. e. A layer is visible if the checkbox left of the layer is marked. The usage of these graphical capabilities is described in section 3. Such objects could be lines. Cell visuals represent an alternative to mapped surface plots – both of them visualize cell related values. and choosing an appropriate order of the layers. 3. its tree item has to be clicked another time once it is selected. A double-click on a layer selects that layer and makes it the only visible one. inversion or adding a value etc. Also. too. the cell symbol (normally a simple arrow) is replaced by a wedge-like form which is colored according to the associated cell value and the chosen color scale.com . Cell visuals can easily be overlaid on normal surface plots. a selected layer need not be visible.4. size. In this layer type.). i.9 Working with Layers All created layers are presented in descending order in the Layers tab of the tree window. fill color. though. Alternatively.7 Graphics Layers Graphics layers can be used to add arbitrary graphical objects as e.8 Cell Visuals Any kind of cell related data can be displayed in cell visuals. In turn. key commands are available to navigate in the layer list. or text objects with different properties for color.6 Post-Processing Layers Any layer containing values can be manipulated by a mathematical function (e.g. Any pair of two cell visuals can be coincided using various functions to generate a new.4.e. The layers can be selected in the tree window by clicking on them with the left mouse button. Thus it is always ensured that they lie in the background and could be permanently visible even if some other layers are. annotations for surface plots. A selected layer can be deleted by pressing the <Delete> key. assigning graphical objects to these layers. Another application of graphics layers is displaying cell neighbor list relationships graphically or highlighting a site in a surface plot. post-processing layer. post-processing cell visual.g. line style.6. By creating new graphics layers. etc. the user has a powerful tool to add arbitrary annotations and marks for surface plots. Tooltips are also enabled for cell visuals.9.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 41 3.

is suppressed. Opens the color palette dialog of the layer. The same function is also available by pressing the <Delete> key for the currently active layer item.com . this dialog can be used to modify the layer properties in a single step (see below). click on a layer icon and hold the left mouse button pressed down.. only belong to a single layer. Then the visible view in the viewing area and the shown color scale in the black legend might not be matching! • All the functions of the layer context menu are summarized in Table 3-5. e. Shows the layer settings overview dialog that summarizes the graphical presentation settings of all layers.g. The currently selected layer can be lower than other visible layers in the tree window.. Manipulate this Layer…. The layers are automatically reordered then. This is a separate access to the color palette settings of the layer which are also accessible from the layer settings dialog.actix. e. The order of the layers can be changed either by means of the context menu functions or by moving layers with the mouse. The black legend shown to the left of the viewing area always belongs to the currently selected layer (not immediately visible). Despite the overview. The context menu can be reached by right-clicking the respective layer in the Layers tab. scaling. Which layers are shown is solely controlled by the checkbox left of the layer item in the tree window. the display of the layer color scale in the black legend to the left is suppressed. Then drag and drop that layer to the desired position in the hierarchy of the Layers tab. This is always the selected layer in the tree window. Removes the layer.e. For the latter option.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 42 displayed above lower ordered layers. color palette. of course. The legend can. A flag to lock a layer. Performs a zoom command that shows the entire layer contents in the viewing area. Locks all layers in one step after a confirmation query. the color scale etc. A locked layer is stored permanently in the project and is retained even if the project is closed.e. alpha blending. Legend Colors… Settings Overview… Activate only this Layer Zoom to Layer Boundaries Lock Layer Lock All Layers Unlock All Layers Remove www. Its properties can be set in the layer settings dialog (see section 3. If the checkbox of the currently selected layer is not checked. Note that the context menu of graphics layers is shorted because certain functions are not necessary for them as. checkbox not set). Unlocks all layers in one step after a confirmation query. By properly using alpha blending and transparent colors. all other layers are unchecked. see the description of the different move functions in Table 3-5 below.4) by clicking into the legend or selecting Settings… from the context menu of the layer. Table 3-5 Layer functions Layer Function Description Settings… Opens the layer settings dialog of the layer. i. Selects the layer and makes it the only visible one.g.5. • The viewing area can show an arbitrary number of overlaid layers simultaneously. several layers can be presented at the same time. If the selected layer is not visible (i. It is especially useful to modify the opacity (alpha blending) of layers to visually overlay several of them. There is a difference between the visible view in the viewing area and the color scale and layer captions shown in the black legend. etc. For the first option. The only exception are cell visuals – only one of them can be visible simultaneously. Can be used to define all graphical properties of a layer as.

Fig. Submenu for vector layer functions. the following actions can be performed in the table: www. This changes the order of layers which has an impact on visibility. The settings overview dialog can be maximized such that the whole screen size can be used to view the layer settings.4.12 below. This function is useful if many layers of a certain type have been created that consume a large amount of memory. e. Opens a dialog to select a function to manipulate this layer (see below).4. Submenu for various layer export functions. 3-10. refer to Fig. Available moving commands are Move to Foreground. Graphics overlays are excluded from the layer settings overview dialog because of their different properties.11 below). Submenu to move layers in the Layers tab tree. as clutter or traffic matrix.com . it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary layer’s context menu. Move one Layer Down. Removes all layers of the same type as this one. Manipulate this Layer… Coincide with other Layer… Layer Navigation Vector Layer Export In order to get a better overview of the graphical presentation settings of all layers together. In particular. Thus selecting this function frees the memory again.g.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 43 Layer Function Description Remove All Remove Layers of this Type Removes all layers. this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the layer properties. The resulting layer is ready for further use. Opens a dialog to select a function to coincide the layer or cell visual with another one (see below). Move to Background. For more detailed information about layer export please refer to section 3. 3-10 Layer settings overview dialog Besides the practical overview.actix. A vector layer can be converted into a raster layer by using the entry Convert to Raster Layer… (see section 3. Move one Layer Up.

3-11 Layer manipulation dialog Another interesting option is to coincide the data of one layer or cell visual with that of another one. Choose the entry Manipulate this Layer… from a layer’s context menu to show a dialog where the required settings can be made. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of layers in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). DIFFERENCE. For a practical example on how to make efficient use of the table filter functions to modify some settings in the overview dialog.com . simply mark the left checkbox of all the layers that shall be removed and then choose Remove Marked Layers from the Tools pulldown menu in the upper left corner of the dialog. etc. It is also possible to derive an x-y scatter analysis (as graph or table) or scatter statistics (as surface plot or table) from two layers. Fig. QUOTIENT. Especially for the result analysis this function can unveil relations between different parameters that otherwise would be difficult to discover. The basic principle is to relate the pixel-oriented data of two layers by means of a certain operation (e.5. To delete layers. PRODUCT. 3-12. Fig. An interesting option is to manipulate the data of a layer. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu.5 regarding the site settings overview dialog. SUM.3. www.g. Multiple layers can be erased in one action. Choose the entry Coincide with other Layer/Visual… from a layer’s or cell visual’s context menu to show a dialog where the required settings can be made. The layers will eventually be deleted as soon as the action is committed by pressing the OK button of the dialog.) to produce a new layer. read more later in section 6. 3-11.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 44 • • • • Individual parameter values can be changed. Fig.actix. Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function). Read more about the layer manipulation and coincidence functions in chapter 12.

In order to do this.10 Locking Layers Normal data containing layers (configuration/measurement/result/optimization/postprocessing data layers) can be locked in a project.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 45 Fig. Then the layer icon gets a small lock symbol to indicate the locked status of the layer as shown in Fig. so it will still be in the project when it is opened again. Fig. This function is not available for measurement layers because they are only temporarily shown while MCollect is active. A locked layer will be preserved when closing the project.4. these image files are loaded into the project whenever the project is opened. www. When changing the network configuration. the user has to choose either of the functions Lock All Layers or Unlock All Layers from the context menu of an arbitrary layer item. It should be noted that in the case of background images (as image layers). Optionally the user can choose to have all layers initially locked when they are created by editing the Display Settings dialog (see section 3. This should be borne in mind when locking layers. the Lock Layer function from that layer’s context menu must be invoked. 3-12 Layer coincidence dialog 3. Image layers and graphics layers (overlays) cannot be locked because they are permanently available in a project. the same context menu function has to be selected again. This function is particularly useful to preserve layers that have been created by coinciding other layers etc.actix. 3-13 Locking a layer It is also possible to lock or unlock all layers at a time in one step. Caution It should be clear for the user that especially a locked layer which possibly was created some time ago need not immediately reflect the current status of the network. the layers are not automatically updated. In order to lock a layer. 3-13.5. To unlock a layer.3).com .

Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 46 3..g. Selecting this radiobutton.4. e. 3-14 Vector to raster layer conversion dialog Table 3-6 Vector to raster layer conversion settings Parameter Data Selection Description Unit Use values from a data field Data Field Use fixed value Fixed Value Area Filter If this option is selected. a traffic matrix or a clutter matrix. the resulting raster layer will be clipped to the analysis area.com . Then the conversion dialog can be opened from the context menu of the imported vector layer Convert to Raster Layer…. The fixed value that all surrounded pixels in the new raster layer shall be initialized with. the resulting raster layer will be clipped to the simulation area. the polygons of the vector layer are filled with the associated values given by a certain data field of the vector layer.6.11 Converting Vector into Raster Layers Sometimes it can be useful to convert a vector layer into a raster layer which then can be further used as e. Selecting this radiobutton.g. www. — — — — Whole Area Selecting this radiobutton.4.actix. by choosing Vector Layer the settings are described in Table 3-6. the polygons of the vector layer are all filled with the same given value. the resulting raster layer will comprise the entire rectangle that is spanned by the extents of the original vector layer. — Simulation Area Analysis Area Resolution — — Pixel Size The pixel size of the resulting raster layer. If this option is selected. 3-14. It is assumed that a vector layer was imported using File Import Vector Image…. m After committing the settings in the dialog. The data field that shall define the values of the surrounded pixels in the raster layer to be created. This dialog is shown in Fig. Fig. be used as a traffic matrix by using the context menu function Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… at a service profile in the Configuration tab. It contains pixels with values as specified. a new raster layer is created as result layer. For more information please refer to section 6. The new layer could be saved or.

This function is invoked by choosing Export Export to MapInfo/Shape File… from the layer’s context menu. whereas the following subsections highlight different aspects of the workspace. etc. they can be saved as a vector file in Shape or MapInfo format. transparency settings. scale. such layers Export to can be saved as a raster file by using the context menu functions Export Raster Image… or Export Save as TIFF File….5 Personal Workspace This section introduces the options to modify the graphical presentation in the viewing area.5. www. This function is invoked by Export… from the layer’s context menu. georeferencing. A layer that was saved to a file can be imported into a project by choosing either of the Import Layer from File… or File Import Graphics Overlay menu functions File from File…. and individual layer templates.1 Workspace Handling The workspace is the conglomeration of all properties that affect the appearance of the graphical elements in the viewing area. Alternatively. 3. The first subsection describes the workspace handling in Radioplan. The layer can later be loaded again by choosing the menu entry Import Layer from File… or File Import File Graphics Overlay from File…. The TIFF file is created in a format definition that is compatible with the import capabilities of Forsk’s ATOLL. The workspace settings are initially set to default settings that can be defined globally for all users at a customer. display settings. every user can individually adjust his workspace settings in the respective dialogs of the Radioplan application. Saves this layer as a georeferenced vector file. Shows a file save dialog to select a file name.4. Table 3-7 Layer Export Functions Export Function Description Export… Saves this layer in native Radioplan format. ranges. Such presentation properties are collectively called the workspace that can be adjusted by each user individually. etc.) are preserved. All layer properties (values. color palette. values. color palette. Saves the current layer presentation into a TIFF file. For example.com . The layer is saved together with a TFW file.actix. it contains: • • • general surface plot settings. legends. transparency. Data containing layers (configuration/measurement/result/optimization/post-processing data layers) can also be exported to file in other formats. Export to MapInfo/Shape File… Export to Raster Image… Save as TIFF File… A layer can be saved to a file in native Radioplan format. In particular. All information of the layer is choosing Export stored then into a file incl. 3. All settings of the layer are restored then. However. Saves this layer as a georeferenced raster file.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 47 3.12 Import/Export of Layers The distinct layer export functions are listed in Table 3-7. captions. the layer type.

A workspace can be imported by choosing the menu entry Tools User Settings Import Workspace….ini file in the applicable Radioplan user folder. if the WINESHOME path is not defined in the wines. 4 Documents and Settings\ <username>\ Application Data\ Actix\Radioplan\ If neither step 2 nor 3 were successful.g. the system tries to read workspace settings from winesworkspace. Citrix server). the new workspace settings are active and will be used for newly created layers. www. which is located in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.5. if no WINESHOME path is defined at all: the Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Actix\Radioplan\ folder. the user can at any time import another *. are automatically re-applied when opening Radioplan.ini from this location.ini file In the wines. which may be located at one or more different locations.ini file does not exist at this location. Then the user is prompted for the workspace ini file in a open file dialog. 3 %WINESHOME%\ A Windows environment variable WINESHOME can be created to define the location of user-specific Radioplan settings such as the workspace.com .ini file.1 Importing a Workspace In addition to the predefinition of the workspace by the winesworkspace.ini file is found there.ini file is found there.2 and also [R-Admin]). Table 3-8 Order of workspace import on start of Radioplan Order Checked Location Comment 1 the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. Radioplan-internal factory defaults apply. but this variable is defined and the winesworkspace.1. 3. 2 WINESHOME path as defined in the wines. WINESHOME may define the location of user-specific Radioplan settings such as the workspace. Thus.ini file. After the workspace import. If the winesworkspace. The order of their consideration is specified in Table 3-8.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 48 When Radioplan is shut down. which is: • • • the WINESHOME path defined in the wines.2 and also [R-Admin]) A central workspace is always loaded during Radioplan startup. all workspace settings – including any user specific adjustments – are automatically saved to a winesworkspace. This option might not work if Radioplan is run on a remote server (e. specific workspace settings defined by the user in the application. If step 2 was not successful. the central workspace settings are overridden by that.ini file: the WINESHOME path defined as Windows environment variable. If it is defined and the winesworkspace. the central workspace settings are overridden by that.ini files. Accordingly. on start of Radioplan.ini file as described above. This central workspace can be overridden by a consecutively loaded workspace file with userspecific workspace settings.ini file. Radioplan tries to load the winesworkspace. thereby overriding the installation defaults.actix.

5.5. the installation defaults are taken from there. this dialog gives the opportunity to delete layer templates that shall no longer be stored in the workspace. 3. If a winesworkspace. Such a workspace definition could later be retrieved as described in the Subsection above.2 and also [R-Admin]).ini file(s) are handled in the same way as described above for the workspace file (see section 3.5 Managing Layer Templates In order to get an overview of all the individual layer templates that are stored in the workspace. specific legend presets defined by the user in the application.actix. 3. 3-15 Layer templates overview dialog Besides the overview. User Settings The workspace export is initiated by choosing the menu entry Tools Export Workspace…. If no winesworkspace.4 Handling of Legend Presets Similar to the workspace.5. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 49 3. www. Thus. Legend presets can also be imported and exported separately by using the according User Settings submenu.5.ini file. also the legend presets (defining the available color palette templates to be applied for layers) can be stored in a legend. Then the user is prompted for the workspace ini file in a save file dialog.1. the user is prompted with a query dialog to commit the workspace reset action. the Delete button gets enabled which can be used to permanently erase that layer template from the workspace. In order to avoid unintended deletion of any settings.4.5. 3.5.ini file has been installed. Read more about the handling of legend commands in the Tools presets in section 3. When a layer template is selected.1). Read more about how to add new layer templates to the workspace in section 3.com . 3-15.ini file is available in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.3 Resetting the Workspace to Default Settings All workspace settings can be reset to installation defaults by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Reset Workspace….1.2 Exporting a Workspace The current workspace settings can be exported to an ini file at an arbitrary location. one can use the layer templates overview dialog. which are defined internally in Radioplan.1. factory defaults are applied. the legend presets are not a part of the actual workspace.5.1. are automatically re-applied when opening Radioplan.5. The legend. thereby overriding the installation defaults. As such. This can be opened by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Manage Layer Templates…. see Fig.

2 General Application Settings Some general settings for the entire application can be specified in the general settings General Settings… menu entry. dBm Default Settings for Interference Plot Constant Network Load A radio button to preselect the usage of a constant network load in all cells for interference ratio plot creation. CDMA2000 only — www. its parameters are described in Table 3-9. any shadowing margin or mobile terminal noise figure (sensitivity) for various technologies. The general settings dialog is shown in Fig. Fig. all created plots are clipped to the simulation area.4. If the creation of dialog that is opened by using the Tools a surface plot can be further specified in a plot settings dialog (refer to section 3.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 50 3. then the parameters of the plot settings dialog is initialized with the general settings. The default network load can be specified by the Network Load parameter. 3-16 General settings dialog Table 3-9 General application parameters Parameter Description Unit Raster Matrix Display Settings Default Minimum Plot Pixel Size Restrict Plots to Simulation Area This parameter defines the minimum pixel dimensions for the generation of surface plot layers.com . This option is particularly useful if network data are available for a large area.actix.1). 3-16. and the simulation area cuts out a smaller area of interest. m — Noise Floor for Interference Calculations (Nt + MS Noise Figure) The total noise floor for downlink transmission as defined as the thermal background noise Nt incl. for UMTS. If checked.

The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. All pilots receivable within this margin below the best pilot are counted in the (potential) Active Set or as pilot polluters. — Store Temporary Files in Local TEMP Directory — Multithreading Number of Processors The number of threads to be exploited for parallel processing.1 and also [R-Admin]). from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool.e. % Cell Tx Power dBm Default Settings for Cell Overlap Plot Cell Overlap Window The overlap margin below the best pilot for cell overlap and Active Set size plots. The default total cell power can be specified by the Cell Tx Power parameter. This logfile is located in the Radioplan user folder (see section 3. The available maximal number corresponds to the number of processor cores of the underlying hardware. 100% of network load mean that all cells transmit at their maximum output power. CDMA2000 only — Total Downlink Network Load The default DL network load for data traffic that is used to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Network Load option is selected. — www. in a TEMP directory location in the shared file system. The default constant DL transmit power assumed for all cells to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Cell Tx Power option is selected.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 51 Parameter Description Unit Constant Cell Tx Power A radio button to preselect the usage of a constant cell Tx power in all cells for interference ratio plot creation. The setting ‘Auto’ chooses the value according to the system variable NUMBER_OF_PROCESSORS.actix. Choosing this option will enforce the storage of temporary files in the user’s TEMP directory on the local machine. dB Message Logging Log Messages to File If this checkbox is active. all messages that are printed in the message window of the application are also logged into a file. This setting is recommended to enhance the efficiency of Radioplan. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e. A button to open an explorer window with the folder where the logfile is saved. where the application runs. that are created and maintained by the memory management of the application.g. A network load of 0% corresponds to DL control channel power only.5.com . CDMA2000 only — Individual Cell Tx Power A radio button to preselect the usage of individual cell Tx powers for interference ratio plot creation. This setting is recommended if the disk quota on the local machine are very restricted for the user. — Explore Log Folder… — Storage Location of Temporary Files Store Temporary Files in Shared File System Choosing this option will store temporary files. for UMTS. i. for UMTS.

3 Display Settings The general display settings can be configured in the display settings dialog which is shown Display Settings…. presenting the cells by arrows that point towards their respective antenna orientation. The opacity (alpha blending factor) of the site symbols can be smoothly changed between 0% and 100%. Simplified Use Halo Effect Size Opacity Hide cells with inactive transmitters www. Alternatively. this radiobutton enables a simplified display of sites. 3-17 Display settings dialog Table 3-10 Display settings options Parameter Rendering of Sites Description Radiation Pattern This radiobutton enables the display of sites by using the horizontal antenna patterns with their respective orientations at each cell. in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 52 3. A checkbox to suppress the display of inactive transmitters. This dialog is opened by choosing the menu entry Tools Its configuration is described in Table 3-10.com .actix. The display size of sites can be regulated in 10 steps. Thus it can be better distinguished on a speckled background.5. Fig. Setting this flag displays a white halo in the background of the site symbol. 3-17.

scrambling codes in site labels.) are derived from the printer settings. visible area. If this is inactive. etc. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active. A checkbox to optionally show the site name in site labels. This watermark can consist of an image and a text message.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 53 Parameter Site Labels Description Show Labels A checkbox to generally switch on or off the display of site icon in the labels. If this checkbox is active. exactly the same area will be printed. the viewing area settings (e. The text size for site labels given in points. The same opacity (alpha blending factor) as for the site symbols applies. Show Site Names Show Cell Names Background Box Text Size Text Color Background Color Rendering of Streets Color Opacity New Layers The color for displaying streets. Default Opacity Lock all Layers Initially Options The default opacity (alpha blending factor) for all newly created layers. drawing streets. The grid size in [m] applied for all editing operations. The text color for site labels. This feature can be activated (which is recommended) to improve the viewing of tooltips.g. In particular. Double Buffered Display Shading for Cell Visuals Data Tooltips Tiny Legend Imprint Watermark Grid Size for Editing Restore Defaults www. text size. A checkbox to optionally show the cell names incl. A checkbox to activate the color shading for cell visuals. cell visuals are drawn with a plain color corresponding to their value according to the color scale. The appearance of the watermark can be configured by using the Configure… button.com . The black legend is drawn with half the usual width. The background color for site labels. Tooltips are displayed in surface plots that contain data if this option is activated. etc. scaling factor. such as drawing simulation/analysis areas. it will appear on all printouts of the viewing area plots. modifying clutter/traffic matrices. The same function is controlled by the components toolbar. This means that when choosing to print a surface plot. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active. A button to restore the factory settings of the display options. A checkbox to optionally have all layers being locked when they are first created. see below. Shading for Simulation/Analysis Area Enable WYSIWYG A checkbox to active the shading in the outside regions of simulation and analysis areas. A checkbox to optionally show site labels in a box with selectable background color. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active. The opacity (alpha blending factor) for displaying streets. A watermark can be faded in at the bottom of the viewing area.actix.

3-19 Viewing area with imprint watermark 3. Then a small color chooser is shown the usage of which is explained in section 3. Both dialogs can be quickly accessed by clicking into the respective sensitive areas in the black legend of the currently active layer as apparent from Fig. for label text or streets) the user can simply click on the respective color button. The customer can specify an image (e.com . 3-21) can also be opened by selecting the entry Settings… from the respective layer item’s context menu. www.actix. 3-18. 3-20. 3-19.5.g. Its parameters are explained in Table 3-11. Fig. The watermark configuration dialog is shown in Fig. The layer settings dialog (see Fig. It has a subdialog for a flexible configuration of the color scale for the layer.5. a logo) and a text (e. 3-18 Watermark configuration dialog Fig. an exemplary viewing area with imprint watermark can be seen in Fig.5. a copyright message) in the watermark configuration dialog which can be opened by using the Configure… button from the display settings dialog. The layer settings dialog summarizes those settings.4 Layer Settings Besides the general display settings. A watermark can be faded in at the bottom of the viewing area which then would also be visible on all printouts.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 54 For selecting a color (e. each layer has its own settings for presentation.g.g.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 55 Fig.actix.com . 3-21 Layer settings dialog www. 3-20 Quick access to the layer settings Fig.

A checkbox to display contour lines instead of the actual layers.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 56 Table 3-11 Layer settings parameters Parameter Content Description Description Caption Tree Label Unit The layer caption. The scale factor of the layer. A checkbox to choose interpolation between adjacent pixels of a layer. A checkbox to apply a discrete color representation to the layer. The position of the upper left corner and the pixel resolution of the layer are given here for information. They are displayed in the lower part of the black legend. The unit applied for the layer. The displayed scale factor is automatically adjusted whenever the display is rescaled by a zoom operation.5. This feature is useful for assigning each cell a dedicated color for mapped surface plots (plots with cellspecific values mapped onto the best server cell areas). If this field is left empty. This name is shown in the black legend in the viewing area. a white space should be entered for the unit. this option should not be used. Only available for image layers. On the contrary.5). The two colors that span the transparent color range for the layer presentation. A checkbox to apply a transparent color range (spun between two colors) to a layer. The number of contour levels and their colors are determined by the color palette of that layer (see section 3. The label of the layer item in the tree window. It can be set to some dedicated scale factors by using the pre-defined list field entries. This option is particularly suited for displaying measurement data. Additional comments for the layer. for normal surface plots with specific values in each pixel. A slider to define the opacity (alpha blending factor) between 0% and 100% for the layer. The latter option is recommended for true-to-scale printing of the viewing area. A checkbox to choose display of a slim border line around each individual layer pixel. no color scale will be shown in the upper part of the black legend. Layer Details Options Customize Colors and Ranges… Interpolate Image Use High-Contrast Pixels A button to open the color palette dialog.com . www. If the color scale shall still be shown. All pixels of the current layer that belong to the specified color range according to the active color palette are presented transparently. Make sure that the colors are not too different – otherwise the color space could not be properly delimited. Draw Contour Lines Discrete Colors Gray Scale Image Transparent Color Range Color 1/2 Opacity Scale Factor Information Legend Scale Limits Orientation and Resolution The legend scale limits are shown here for information. A checkbox to switch the layer presentation to gray scale. They can be modified in the color palette dialog.

the alpha blending factor (opacity) and transparency of a color range can be controlled for each layer individually. www. A button to open the vector layer settings dialog (only enabled for vector layers). In the sequel. the user may define special color palette settings for a Best Pilot Power plot and remember those settings.ini file as described in section 3. the user can specify a field name to be visualized.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 57 Parameter Description Layer Template / Layer uses template ‘LayerTemplate’ Save these Settings as Template for all layers of this type / Update Layer Template to these settings Open Display Settings… Open Vector Settings… If this checkbox is active when the OK button of the dialog is pressed.actix. The transparency feature can also be used to selectively mask a certain value range of a parameter which is very helpful especially for the analysis of network related data in a surface plot.5. If the layer settings dialog of a vector layer is opened. Furthermore. for point data a symbol and a symbol size can be chosen.1. certain colors of a layer can be set completely transparent by defining a proper transparent color range. If the checkbox Save these Settings as Template for all layers of this type / Update Layer Template to these settings is active when the layer settings are confirmed by clicking the OK button of the dialog. Whenever a new Best Pilot Power plot will be created after that. Furthermore. then the settings of the current layer are stored in the workspace as template for all layers of the same type.5. By reducing the opacity of a layer it becomes more and more transparent such that lower layers can shine through. 3-22 Vector layer settings dialog Several layers can be overlaid and displayed simultaneously. so all userdefined layer settings are retrieved when Radioplan is restarted next time. As an example. all plots of this type will adopt these layer settings. After a user-defined layer definition has been added to the workspace. Furthermore. To this end. 3-22.5 Color Palette Data in surface plots is displayed using a color palette. the previously stored layer settings will be retrieved from the workspace and are applied for the new layer. Then lower layer get visible at the respective pixels. By clicking it the vector layer settings dialog is opened as shown in Fig. Fig. the Open Vector Settings… button is enabled. the workspace can be saved into a winesworkspace. A button to open the general display settings dialog. The layer settings include the color palette definition which is described in the following section. the workspace is automatically saved on shutdown of Radioplan. 3.com . if the vector layer contains data fields. A value at a certain position is shown in that color that corresponds to its scaling in the color palette between the maximum and minimum values. these settings are stored in the workspace as template for layers of the same type. In particular.2. This way the user can define his own layer appearance settings and store them in his workspace.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 58 3. a quicker access to this dialog is provided by clicking into the upper part of the black legend area where the color scale is shown (see Fig. The minimum value of the scale limits. Insert Entry Append Entry Delete Entry Move Up Move Down Inserts a new color entry in the color palette below the currently marked entry. Fig. Alternatively. Appends a new color entry at the end of the color palette. 3-20). Moves the currently marked color entry one step down. 3-23 Color palette dialog Table 3-12 Color palette configuration Parameter Scale Limits Description Autoscale Minimum Maximum Colors A flag to automatically retrieve the scale limits from the extreme values of the current layer.5. The usage of this dialog is described in Table 3-12.5.1 Inspecting the Color Palette of a Layer The color palette of the currently active layer can be configured in the color palette dialog that is shown in a separate window when clicking the Customize Colors and Ranges… button. The same function can also be performed by typing <Delete>. refer to Fig. The maximum value of the scale limits. Moves the currently marked color entry one step up.actix. www. Deletes the currently marked color entry. 3-23.com .

This situation is shown in Fig. A button to mirror the currently defined color palette. 3-25. Adds a new user-defined color legend preset. another column appears to the right of the colors. 3-24. In order to specify the minimum values for each color range.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 59 Parameter Description Use Shading A radiobutton to use a shaded color palette. All current color palette settings are stored in the new preset. The colors of the color palette are equally spaced between the scale limits. values between the discrete interpolation values of the palette colors are smoothly shaded between the corresponding colors. see Fig. Deletes the currently selected user-defined color legend preset. the spacing between the discrete color ranges can even be non-linear. If this flag is selected when the dialog is closed by clicking the OK button. Fig. 3-24 Defining an individual color scale with discrete colors Each color of the color palette can be modified by clicking on the corresponding color field in the table and choosing the desired color from the appearing color dialog. The distinct colors of the color palette each cover certain value ranges that are defined by giving a minimum value for each color. A radiobutton to use discrete color steps.com .actix. The colors are not shaded. the currently active color palette is stored as default in the user’s registry. Delete Add… Replace Current Default with these Colors In case the option Use Color Steps is chosen. Updates the currently selected user-defined color legend preset with the current contents of the color palette table in the upper part of the dialog. Moreover. instead. www. the discrete colors are used for all values in the respective ranges. Use Color Steps Create Transition… Legend Presets Load Update Loads the selected color legend preset into the color palette table in the upper part of the dialog. A button to define a color palette by transition over a certain color range.

5. This function can be invoked by pressing the Create Transition… button in the color palette dialog.2 Creating a Transition Color Palette In addition to the manual definition of the distinct colors of a palette. The new color palette is immedialy created when the Create button is hit. The minimum value of the color palette. The preset “Current Default” contains the color palette settings that were latest stored in the user’s registry when having the Replace Current Default with these Colors flag being set. it is also possible to automatically create a color transition with a defined number of values. The range between maximum and minimum divided by the step size determines the number of colors in the palette. Here all parameters of the color transition can be specified as described in Table 3-13. later users can add their own legend presets. Fig. The color that is associated with the minimum value. The color that is associated with the maximum value.3 Using Legend Presets In order to ease the definition of a color palette. the dialog offers some pre-defined color palettes in the Legend Presets pane. Threshold Color Step Size The maximum value of the color palette. the previous palette is overridden then.5.5. 3-26 Color transition dialog Table 3-13 Color transition settings Parameter Description Max. Threshold Min.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 60 Fig.actix. 3. 3-25 Color dialog 3. A dialog is opened which is shown in Fig. Factory preset are delivered with the Radioplan installation. Threshold Max. The step size from one color entry to the next between maximum and minimum. 3-26. Threshold Color Min. There are three types of legend presets as shown in Table 3-14. www. Color Wheel Direction Clockwise or Counter-Clockwise A radio button to move clockwise or counter-clockwise from the maximum to the minimum color through the hue/saturation/brightness color space.com .5.

The user can add an arbitrary number of user-defined color legend presets. could be changed by using the Before any graphics element can be drawn in the graphics painting mode.1 and also [R-Admin]). This is done by clicking the left icon in the graphics toolbar (tooltip Add Overlay). www. a legend. An existing entry can be updated by pressing the Update button.1 Creating a Graphics Layer All graphics layer functions are controlled by the graphics toolbar. first a graphics layer needs to be created. first the desired settings should be adjusted. Then press the Add… button and specify a legend name in the appearing dialog. Fig.ini file can be imported into Radioplan by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Import Legend Presets….com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 61 Table 3-14 Legend preset types Symbol Legend Preset Type Current default Factory preset User-defined preset A legend preset can be chosen by either double-clicking on the respective entry or by selecting a preset and then press the Load button.4 Import and Export of Legend Presets It is possible to store the currently defined legend presets in an ini file in order to retain them for future use.actix. a snapping grid is shown in the viewing area. These settings are persistently stored in the user’s registry. The graphics toolbar is shown in Fig. This is very useful for often used parameters that shall always be shown with the same scaling (i.5.ini file is the Radioplan user folder (see section 3. see Fig. 3. to compare between plots). The default location for the legend. Likewise. 3. This can be accomplished by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Export Legend Presets…. it can be deleted by pressing the Delete button. 3-27 Graphics toolbar As long as the graphics painting mode is active. The distance between the grid points is determined by the configured grid size which icon (tooltip Grid Size) from the paint toolbar to the left.e. 3-28. This toolbar window can be freely moved on the screen and could even be docked at the preferred toolbar places of the application window.5. This toolbar can be icon (tooltip Draw Graphics displayed by entering the graphics painting mode using the Overlays) from the paint toolbar to the left.6. This name will then be appended in the legend presets list. Immediately. 3-27. All previous manipulations of the color palette will be overridden in that case. In order to create a new color legend preset. Then a small dialog is shown where the user can specify a name for the new graphics layer.5.6 Paint Module for Graphics Layers 3. the newly loaded legend presets are available as legend templates in the color palette dialog.

6. 3.2. 3.actix. for showing neighbor list relationships of a cell or for highlighting a certain site for finding it. Any graphics element that is drawn is appended to the currently active graphics layer.g. Table 3-15 Graphics toolbar controls Icon Description Create a new graphics layer. and text) as well as different property controls for graphics elements. they initially have a lower alpha blending factor. The new layer is initially empty. Then the graphics toolbar and the snapping grid disappear. checkbox set). Insert arbitrary text. if needed. Graphics layers are also used e. The graphics painting mode can be left by changing to another painting mode (one of the other icons of the painting toolbar) or leaving any painting mode by using the icon (top most icon of the painting toolbar).2 Drawing in a Graphics Layer The graphics toolbar offers several paint functions (lines. This is a prerequisite for any drawing action.6. In order to select one of the drawing functions for line. Such special layers are like normal graphics layers that could even be used for drawing. Any graphics layers and their content that have been produced so far are retained. refer to section 3. its alpha blending factor (opacity) is 100%. Toggle arrow heads for line ends. The two left of them are just toggle buttons to add an arrow to the end of a line and to fill a drawn polygon.6. www.1.2.6.com . refer to section 3. Shows the drawing settings dialog. Toggle filled status for polygons. Draw a polygon. However.e.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 62 Fig.1. the layer is created and listed on top of the Layers tab in the tree window. If no graphics layer is active or if the active one is not visible. polygon. the icons of the drawing functions remain gray and cannot be chosen. Draw a straight line. 3-28 Specifying a name for a graphics layer Once the creation of the new graphics layer has been confirmed by pressing the OK button in this dialog. These icons are described in Table 3-15.1 Drawing Settings The properties of the graphics elements to be drawn can be influenced by the three icons to the right of the graphics toolbar. or text. polygons.e. selected) and visible (i. it is required that a graphics layer is both active (i.

3-29 Drawing settings dialog All currently active property settings are thenceforth applied to any graphics drawing action.4 Inserting Text To insert text in the graphics layer. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair.2. The drawing command can be aborted by pressing the <ESC> key as long as the last vertex has not been set yet. Fig.6. 3.2.com . Fig.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 63 The last icon opens the drawing settings dialog that can be used to set the line width and the color used for lines and polygons. and fill status. 3-30. The last vertex is marked with a double click of the left mouse button. see Fig.6. end) vertex has been set.3 Drawing a Polygon To draw a polygon. just click on the color button and select the new color from the appearing color chooser. The drawing settings dialog is shown in Fig. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. After the last vertex has been set. The drawing command can be aborted by pressing the <ESC> key as long as the end vertex has not been set yet. After the second (i. The start and end vertex of the line are then set with the left mouse button while their positions are snapped to the chosen grid size.e. The upper left corner of the text to be inserted is then set with the left mouse button according to the snapping grid.2.actix. select the icon in the graphics toolbar. Then a dialog is shown that can be used to enter the text and to define its properties. 3.2 Drawing a Line To draw a straight line. select the icon in the graphics toolbar. the new line is shown with the selected properties in terms of color. the polygon is closed automatically to the first vertex and is shown with the selected properties in terms of color. The distinct vertices of the polygon are then set with the left mouse button while their positions are snapped to the chosen grid size. To change the color. line width. line width. 3-30 Text insertion dialog www. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. 3-29. select the icon in the graphics toolbar. 3. and arrow status.

These viewing options are used to present all kinds of network related data. the text color (upper color button) and an optional background color (lower color button) can be specified. All changes that are made in the tree structure are directly updated in the underlying database. 3. It is possible to drag and drop items to a different position in the tree if the data structure allows this. So after closing and re-opening the project. chart graph (diagram.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 64 The big text field in the lower part of the dialog is for text label itself. all graphics layers can be deleted in one step by using the menu entry View Remove All Overlays. the font size (in points).7 Tree Window The tree window lets the user control all project data.actix.3. the text would be surrounded by a box that is filled with the background color. Each tree item (leaf) has a context menu that can be accessed by right-clicking the item. More details on the different viewing options can be found in conjunction with the explanation of the network data evaluation in section 12. summary report. The standard toolbar provides a quick access to switch between the different viewing options.3 Deleting Graphics Layers Once a graphics layer has been created. a cell can only be dragged from one site to another. These buttons are only active if a view of the corresponding kind has already been created. but it cannot be dragged to a network controller (RNC/BSC). 3. Configuration tab. 3.com . In general. Further. So the font. The respective icons are listed in Table 3-16. the text is inserted at the defined position. A graphics layer can be deleted by using the according entries from the layer context menu.6.). and Layers tab. all its contents is still available. Table 3-16 Icons for different viewing options Icon Description Show surface plot Show diagram chart Show histogram chart Show table (not result summary report) Show result summary report www. result parameters. Results tab. or table (measurement data. After the label settings have been commited by pressing the OK button of this dialog. For example. etc.8 Viewing Area The viewing area can display data in three different kinds: • • • surface plot (simulation/analysis area. It consists of four tabs: Projects tab. If the flag Draw Background Box is set. pixel-based input/output data). histogram). The other controls in the upper part of the dialog are for determining the text properties. each tab presents its data in a tree structure. it is retained persistently in the project.

a progress bar is shown in the statusbar that informs the user about the current working status. Alternatively. then this view will also show these regions. there is a graphical zoom mode for surface plots that can be entered by icon (tooltip Zoom) from the paint toolbar to the left. For example. Default Zoom: In surface plots. the the shortkey <F4> can be used. messages originating from the underlying database or simulator output messages are displayed in the message window. loading data into the database. relevant data as.com . the shortkey <Shift-F4> can be used. Alternatively. In surface plots.g. this function shows the complete area that is covered by configuration data (e. Zoom Out: Shows a down-scaled (thus larger) portion of the current view by Zoom Zoom Out or by clicking the icon (tooltip Zoom Out) selecting View from the standard toolbar. The user can then clicking the draw a dragbox with the mouse pointer by holding down the left mouse button. It can be chosen by selecting View Zoom Fit to Window or by clicking icon (tooltip Fit to Window) from the standard toolbar. the zoom mode need not be chosen to scale the diagrams..10 Message Window and Status Bar The message window is for showing messages including warnings. chart graph. and MSG for other messages. Alternatively. two additional default zoom actions are supported: Zooming on the simulation area or the analysis area. Any zoom actions in surface plots can be undone by using the previous scaling) from the standard toolbar. the shortkey <Ctrl-F4> can be used.e. For tables.actix. it is also possible to zoom in and out using the mouse wheel while holding down the <Ctrl> key. If the mouse pointer is located in the viewing area. The following functions are available: • • • Zoom In: Shows an enlarged (thus smaller) portion of the current view by selecting View Zoom Zoom In or by clicking the icon (tooltip Zoom In) from the standard toolbar. e. e. the shortkey <F3> can be used. If there are configuration data placed outside the simulation area. The different types of messages have according prefixes: ERR for errors. The status bar shows the current status of Radioplan.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 65 3. www. 3. Alternatively.g. Additionally.g. pathloss matrices). the current position is shown there. then zooming with the mouse pointer also works in the default mode.9 Zoom Functions The scaling of the presented data in the viewing area is basically controlled by the zoom functions. The status bar is also used to display the tooltip texts when the mouse pointer is positioned over an item providing tooltips. icon (tooltip Zoom to If a chart graph is displayed in the viewing area. irrespective of the type of presentation (surface plot. errors. These functions are helpful to quickly focus on these regions that are especially important for the network data analysis. If an action is started that takes some moments as. the viewing area is scaled to the just drawn dragbox. When releasing the mouse button. Zoom on analysis area: This view is shown by selecting View Zoom Fit to Analysis Area or by clicking the icon (tooltip Fit to Analysis Area) from the standard toolbar. Alternatively. or table).. They can be accomplished as follows: • • Zoom on simulation area: This view is shown by selecting View Zoom Fit to Simulation Area or by clicking the icon (tooltip Fit to Simulation Area) from the standard toolbar. the shortkey <F2> can be used. and status indications of the distinct modules during the usage of Radioplan. WRN for warnings. i.

actix. This leads to the relevant help page.com . Then the mouse pointer available from the turns into a symbol. the help system is opened with the relevant page.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 66 3. The help dialog can be accessed from any situation (in particular in dialogs) in Radioplan by typing <F1>. When clicking on a GUI element. the GUI elements of Radioplan can be investigated with the help function icon (tooltip Help) in the standard toolbar. Furthermore. www.11 Online Help Radioplan has a context sensitive online help system. The general help page can be opened by using the menu entry ? Help Topics.

type Ctrl-N. This tutorial is instructive for understanding the handling of the different network configuration items while setting up a complete network layout. A project with a simple network configuration is created and properly configured.com . or choose File size of 1 km2. Fig. The project dialog appears where you should change the project title to “Demo Project”. Then the project is ready for usage with the different Radioplan modules. 4-1. 4-1 A newly created project Open the project settings dialog by double-clicking on the project item in the Projects tab of the tree window to the left.4.actix. see appendix 13. To create a new project. Now the dialog should look as in Fig. www. or click the New Project. This situation is depicted in Fig. 4. the viewing area to the right is initially empty (light icon in the standard toolbar gray).1. 4-2.1 Setting Up a Demo Project On start of the Radioplan application. The default project name is “New Project” which appears in the project list to the left.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 67 4 Getting Started with Radioplan The main focus of this chapter is to demonstrate the ease of working with Radioplan. The new project will have an initial beneath the menu bar. The entire demo project configuration can also be found in the provided examples directory.

For the purpose of this demo project.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 68 Fig. 4-2 Project settings dialog of the demo project Next. The configuration data can be inspected in the Configuration tab of the tree window. Please note that initially only a UMTS network layer was generated in the new project. It is shown in the left part of the views toolbar as “UMTS::0::Default”. the network setup is divided into four groups: • • • • areas (polygons).actix. Fig. you must enter the Site and Cell Add Mode. www. Then a snapping grid is shown. This is accomplished by clicking the icon (tooltip Add Sites and Cells) in the paint toolbar to the left. 4-3. A simple UMTS network with two sites with threesectored cells shall be defined.com . user behavior. and RAN setup.2 RAN Configuration We start configuring the RAN setup. As apparent from the configuration data treeview in Fig.2. 4-3 Configuration tab of the tree window giving the hierarchical configuration data structure 4. we do not need to add further network layers.1 First Site To set a site at a certain position in the simulation area. environment. the whole network setup to be investigated has to be configured. 4.

250m). and the hierarchical network setup in the Configuration tab of the tree window is updated accordingly. Locate the mouse pointer at the given position and hit the right mouse key. The cells of the site are currently symbolized by orange arrows because no antenna has been chosen yet for them. The current situation is shown in Fig.actix. In the appearing dialog. 4-4. www. also three associated cells and a superordinate network controller have been created. Fig. A context menu appears where you choose the entry Add Site + 3 Cells. 4-6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 69 You should change the grid size to 50m by clicking the icon (tooltip Grid Size) in the paint toolbar. Fig. the new site is shown in the viewing area.com . 4-5 Network setup with first site Note that together with the site. Immediately. This is apparent from the tree window as shown in Fig. 4-5. you can modify the grid size as shown in Fig. 4-4 Changing the grid size to 50m Now you can place the first site at the position (250m.

The resulting site configuration should look as given in Fig.1 Network Controller Configuration For this demo. the parameter settings of the newly created network controller do not need to be changed.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 70 Fig. If desired. site.actix. 4-8.1. 4-6 Hierarchy of network controller. www.2 Site Configuration Next the site settings are to be adjusted.1. the configuration dialog for the network controller can be opened by double clicking the network controller item in the tree window.2. and cells 4. The dialog should look as shown in Fig. 4-7.2. Open the site configuration dialog by double clicking the respective item in the tree window and make the following simple change: • Change the ID to “Site 1”.com . Fig. 4-7 Network controller configuration dialog 4.

Then the antenna diagrams can be displayed by pressing either of the Show Diagram buttons. Antennas are like templates that are referenced from a cell.2.cfg file.1. Fig. 4-8 Site configuration dialog 4. 4-9 Vertical antenna diagram of a sector antenna 4. For this you should first leave the Site and Cell Add Mode and return to the normal mode by clicking the icon in the paint toolbar to the left. 4-9 shows the vertical diagram of the dipole antenna. The new antenna is added to the Antennas node in the tree window below the No Family category. You can inspect both the horizontal and the vertical diagrams from the antenna settings dialog which can be opened by double clicking the antenna item.1. the cells can be configured. www.3 Antenna Import Prior to configuring the cells.actix. Fig. The import is done by choosing Import Antenna… from the context menu of the Antennas node in the tree window.com . first an antenna has to be imported. You should choose the Antenna_6deg_Tilt.2. Then a file open dialog appears that shows all available antennas in the library by default.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 71 Fig.4 Cell Configuration After the antenna has been imported.

4-11. All other settings may remain unchanged for now. 4-11 Cell configuration dialog The cell is shown then as a black arrow in the surface plot instead of an orange one. 4-10 Opening a cell configuration dialog by double clicking a cell You should make the following adjustments for the cell: • • • Modify the ID to “Cell 1-1”. 4-10. This value is interpreted relative to the altitude value in the site which was set to 0m previously (default). Their names should be “Cell 1-2” and “Cell 1-3”. Fig. This is shown in Fig.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 72 The cell configuration dialog is opened by double clicking the respective cell symbol in the viewing area. The resulting cell configuration should look as given in Fig. This is the antenna that has just been imported. Set the height over ground to 25m.com . www. the cell symbol is selected on the screen and the according cell item highlighted in the tree window to the left. Fig. Choose the sector antenna from the antenna pattern list field. In addition to opening the cell configuration dialog this way. Now the other two cells can be configured accordingly.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 73 4. Note that the coordinates of the upper left corner of the pathloss matrix are changed. 4-12. 4. Fig.com . As you will notice. Of course.cfg that is located in a subdirectory of the Node B configuration data in the library. “Cell 2-2”. 750m). In the IDs you should denote them by “Site 2” and “Cell 2-1”. otherwise you could not graphically create the new site. “Cell 2-3” accordingly. The plot settings in the appearing dialog can simply be confirmed by pressing the OK button. Open the settings dialog of the pathloss matrix by double clicking its item in the configuration data tree. This pathloss matrix models free space propagation with a pathloss exponent of 3. the pathloss matrix is still misaligned. 4-12 Demo network setup with two sites Now you can leave the Site and Cell Add Mode and return to the normal mode by clicking the icon in the paint toolbar.3 Pathloss of the Cells Each cell needs an associated pathloss matrix. Make sure that you are in the Site and Cell Add Mode . Place the second site at the position (750m. the network setup should look as shown in Fig. Please make sure to hold down the <Shift> key while selecting the menu entry.2 Second Site Likewise. After leaving the settings dialog again. Click this button to align the lowest attenuation value in the pathloss matrix with the cell position.2. the best received pilot power plot must be recreated and the new situation as in Fig.2.actix. The file open dialog for the pathloss matrix is shown. www. Now the resulting best received pilot power can be displayed in the simulation area by clicking the icon (tooltip Plot Received Power) in the views toolbar. In the appearing dialog there is a button Synchronize Position with Site/Cell. Make similar adjustments of the configurations of the second site and its associated cells. Select the pathloss matrix freespace_pathloss_pl3. the network controller need not be changed because there is only a single network controller in the network that all sites are connected to. a second site shall be created in the very same way as the first one. 4-13 is reached. After the second site has been configured properly. choose Import Pathloss Matrix… from this cell’s context menu. To import one for the first cell.

4-14. www.actix. the network setup will look as shown in Fig. If all pathloss matrices have been configured correctly. This operation is shown in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 74 Fig. 4-13 Cell 1-1 with pathloss matrix The pathloss matrix of the other cells is created by copying the first one and dragging it to the other cell items in the configuration data tree. Just hold down the <Ctrl> key and drag the new matrix with the mouse to the next cell and drop it there as soon as that cell item is selected under the mouse pointer. drag&drop copying Fig. You can center them to the antenna position in the way as described above. 4-14 Dragging&dropping + copying the pathloss matrix This action shall be repeated until all cells have their pathloss matrices. Notice the small + sign beside the mouse pointer that indicates the simultaneous duplicating action while dragging the matrix item. 4-15.com . Make sure that the pathloss matrices of the cells at the second site are properly positioned.

moving on streets at vehicular speed. 4-16. Such a detailed configuration is usually only needed for network simulations. moving straight forward at pedestrian speed. The subprofiles are like templates that are referenced from a UE profile. 4-15 RAN setup of the demo project 4.3.2kbit/s. mobility profile.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 75 Fig. 4. typically a simplified user modeling with a single. This is shown in Fig.actix.3 User Configuration The user behavior is summarized in the UE profile that consists of three subprofiles: equipment profile. www. Once this equipment profile has been loaded. For network optimization. User with a packet-switched web browsing service at 384kbit/s. Now we will create two different UE profiles with the following specifications: Table 4-1 UE profiles for the demo project UE Profile Subprofiles Description Speech UE R99 Terminal Street Movement Vehicular Speech R99 Terminal Straight Movement Pedestrian Internet User with a circuit-switched speech service at 12. the user configuration in this sample project uses several services.cfg.1 Equipment Profile Import the equipment profile that is specified in Table 4-1 from the library by choosing Import Equipment Profile… from the context menu of the Equipment Profiles item of the configuration data tree. The configuration file is called R99. and service profile. you can inspect the parameter settings of it by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree. Internet UE For demonstration purposes.com . generic service is sufficient. The correct subdirectory in the library is already preselected in the file open dialog.

Note that this matrix is initialized with ones. We will create a new traffic matrix each for the service profiles and define a simple traffic distribution in the matrix. import the mobility profiles from the library by choosing Import Mobility Profile… from the context menu of the Mobility Profiles item of the configuration data tree. The traffic can be displayed by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix. In the appearing matrix resolution dialog the pixel size for the new matrix can be specified. Since the initial matrix was filled with ones.g. you should change the setting to e.3 Service Profile Import the service profiles from the library by choosing Import Service Profile… from the context menu of the Service Profiles item of the configuration data tree. corresponding to a traffic of 1user per square kilometer.cfg. 4-17.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 76 Fig. 4.actix. A traffic matrix contains pixel-based relative/absolute traffic density values. 40 Erl/km2.com . 4-16 Importing an equipment profile 4. choose the movement models Street Movement Vehicular. 4-18. www. It is recommended that this region should cover almost the complete simulation area and only leave the areas close to the margins empty. The first traffic matrix is assigned to the service profile “Speech” by choosing Add new Matrix from the context menu of the service profile.3. You should enter 25m as a reasonable setting.cfg and Straight Movement Pedestrian. 4. Now let us draw a rectangular region in the traffic matrix where users should be created. 4-17 Setting the traffic value for a new traffic region The resulting traffic matrix should look approximately as in Fig. The service profiles for the demo project are called Speech. You can inspect the parameter settings of the mobility profiles by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree. Fig. For this one has to enter the traffic region drawing mode by clicking the icon (tooltip: Add Traffic Region) from the left toolbar. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key. After the last vertex was set.2 Mobility Profile Likewise. The new matrix is added to the configuration data tree below the service profile.4 Traffic Each service profile shall have an own associated traffic matrix. The final vertex is set with a double click. You can inspect the parameter settings of the service profiles by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree.cfg for importing. The rectangle is drawn vertex by vertex with the left mouse button. see Fig.3. a dialog appears where you have to specify a (relative) traffic value for the drawn polygon in the lower field. In the appearing file open dialog.3.cfg and Internet.

actix. Here the traffic density in the drawn polygon should be set to e. Fig. 5 Erl/km2. 4-18 Traffic matrix of the “Speech” service profile Repeat the procedure for the second service profile “Internet”. The matrix should look approximately as in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 77 Fig.com . Now the region where UEs are activated should be confined to the right half of the simulation area around Site 2. 4-19. 4-19 Traffic matrix of the “Internet” service profile www.g.

So here it shall only be demonstrated to draw some streets.3. www. Fig. and service) as indicated in Table 4-1. just duplicate the first one by choosing Duplicate Profile from its context menu.5 UE Profile Create a first UE profile by choosing Add UE Profile from the context menu of the UE Profiles item in the configuration data tree. The settings are shown in Fig. Usually such data come from geographic databases and can be imported from there into Radioplan. The new profile called “Added UE” immediately appears beneath the UE Profiles item. Change the ID to “Speech UE” and select the three profiles (equipment. Enter its settings dialog by double-clicking the item. DEM matrix. Change its name to “Internet UE” and choose the other subprofiles as indicated in Table 4-1.com . Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 78 4. 4-21 Defining the UE profile “Internet UE” 4.actix. 4-20. mobility. 4-21. and optionally streets. 4-20 Defining the UE profile “Speech UE” To define the second UE profile. The settings for this UE profile are shown in Fig.4 Environment Configuration The environment consists of clutter data.

Try to draw a rectangular street quarter with the mouse. The last corner is set with a double-click.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 79 4. www. Select the only available street category “Category1” (default street category) as shown in Fig. 4-24. Open this dialog by double-clicking the Streets item in the configuration data tree. Fig. street vectors could simply be imported as a background image. 4-23 Defining a street category The resulting street could look like in Fig. Possibly modify the grid by clicking the icon from the left toolbar. Each street corner (vertex of the polyline) is set with the left mouse button. There they can be used for the street movement model. Otherwise. Then a dialog appears where the street category of the street just drawn must be given. 4-22.g. and specify the street width of that category.actix.1 Streets Normally streets are only needed for network simulations. 4-22 Selecting a category for a newly drawn street The street categories can be edited in the street settings dialog. Streets can be drawn as polylines in the streets drawing mode. Here you can change the category name. Enter this mode by clicking the icon (tooltip: Add Streets) from the paint toolbar to the left. Modify the default category as shown in Fig. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key. enter a description. Before you start drawing make sure that the grid is fairly rough. Fig. 4-23.4. In the appearing dialog you can enter the new grid size (e. 50m).

com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 80 Fig. simulation or optimization) to further explore Radioplan. Detailed information on the usage of these modules you can find in the corresponding chapters of this user guide or in the specialized documentations.actix.g.5 Next Steps Now your first little sample network is completely set up and ready for more. 4-24 The “Highway” 4. www. You can use the different Radioplan modules (e.

Project folders can be renamed by using their context menu entry Rename Folder or by simply clicking the folder item twice in the tree window. 5-1. All available projects are shown in the Projects tab of the tree window. the project management supports loading and comparing different results from slightly modified configurations within the same project or even between different projects. The project titles need not immediately be unique. 5. all loaded network performance data are contained in the Results tab. the network configuration data are accessible from the Configuration tab. Thus it is possible to properly group projects in nested folders www. 5. New folders and subfolders can easily be created by using the New Folder entry from the main node’s or any other folder’s context menu. In order to obtain an improved network setup. it is good practice to choose unambiguous project titles. For the currently open project.actix. However. A new folder has the default name “New Folder”.1 Project Folders Projects can be hierarchically organized in the Projects tab. or result data of a certain investigation scenario and is embedded in the entire network planning and operation workflow. measurement. Folders and projects can easily be shifted by the mouse pointer inside the tree with a simple drag&drop action. Fig.com . A sample project hierarchy is shown in Fig.1.1 General Project Setup A project defines the general radio network setup in a certain geographic region.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 81 5 Project Handling Working with Radioplan is basically working with projects. and all created surface plot layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window. Projects are stored in a database. and so are the simulation results and performance measurements. 5-1 Sample project hierarchy The hierarchy of the project tree can be reordered according to the user’s requirements. The complete network configuration is managed in the project. Then the new name can be edited. A project comprises all configuration.

actix. from another Radioplan database. Import/load a project into the database: ▫ ▫ ▫ from a Radio Network Planning (RNP) tool. Read more about the different ways of working with projects in the subsequent sections. a frequent requirement is to use existing data from other entities of the radio network planning/configuration workflow in the network simulation. 5-3. 5-2. Shows the project settings dialog (only for open project) Opens this project (only for another project) Duplicates this project Creates Sub-project based on this project Deletes this project Updates Opens a Opens a Opens a the project and shows a parameter overview (only for open project) wizard for manipulating various project data dialog to merge this project with another one dialog to choose which Sub-Project to use for Synchronization Shows project statistics overview (only for open project) Deletes the result data stored in this project Refreshes the tree presentation Fig. the respective folder will be deleted including all subfolders and projects contained in it. 5. Merge projects inside the built-in database. Thus working with projects in Radioplan means to use and rely on predefined configuration components. Unused folders can be deleted by using the context menu entry Delete Folder(s).2 Project Actions Due to the complex nature of mobile communications systems.com . In order to avoid undesired deletion. Moreover. the following opportunities are offered to the user: • • Build a new project by using preconfigured items from the library. In particular. the construction of a project right from scratch would be very tedious. Most of the project handling actions are available from the context menu of a project. The complete context menu of the projects folders is shown in Fig. Save/export a project or single network items from the database.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 82 with arbitrary depth. • • • Use and modify an existing project from the built-in database.1. or from configuration files (in the proprietary Radioplan format). too. This way the convenience of usage is increased remarkably. the user is prompted with an alert dialog to confirm the action. The menu items are described in Fig. Creates a new project folder below this one Deletes this project folder incl. 5-2 Project folder context menu Please note that in case of using the function Delete Folder(s). subfolders Renames this project folder Refreshes the tree presentation Fig. 5-3 Project context menu www.

2.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 83 5. see section 5. each network layer ID must be unique. The network layer ID. Each project can contain several of such network layers. ‘CDMA’. This could be the ARFCN used by the network layer.2. and ‘WiMAX’. the user can choose File Layers from the menu to open this dialog.6. The general network layer management is done in the network layer management dialog which can be opened by pressing the icon (tooltip Manage Network Layers) from the Current Project Manage Network views toolbar.2 Multi-Layer/Multi-Technology Projects Radioplan supports hierarchical cell structures (HCS) consisting of network layers.1 Network Layer Management The network layers of a project are managed by the elements in the left part of the views toolbar. A possibility to create a multi-layer project is to merge projects containing different network layers.com . ‘GSM’.actix. 5-4. Within the same project. The user can choose between ‘UMTS’. A network layer is characterized by a radio technology. The frequency band of the network layer. 5-4 Network layer management dialog Table 5-1 Network layer properties Property Description System Frequency Band HCS Priority Cells The system technology of the network layer. Alternatively.3 for details. the various configuration items are described in Table 5-1.3 below. A sample network layer setup is shown in Fig. www. Fig. see section 5. Radioplan projects can generally manage multiple network layers and even multiple technologies simultaneously. Another possibility is to duplicate a network layer while choosing a different technology for the copied layer. For iDEN and GSM layers a priority can be set in order to support traffic assignment for concentric cells (Capital Planning Module) The number of cells currently assigned to the network layer (for information only). ‘iDEN’. 5.

Measurement analysis and pathloss tuning can only be performed for the currently active network layer(s). it can also quickly be selected from the combo box directly. Network simulation is only performed for the currently active network layer(s).1) only consider the currently active network layer(s). If several network layers are active. Always select a system technology and enter proper values for the frequency band and HCS.actix.2 Multi-Layer Project Structure Multi-layer/multi-technology projects are modeled in Radioplan by having common sites across technologies and network layers. It is possible to activate several network layers in a project simultaneously using the checkboxes at the left side of the dialog.4.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 84 For the definition and management of network layers. At least one network layer must be active at any time. Network optimization is only performed for the currently active network layer(s).com . Table 5-2 Available cell symbols Cell Symbol Description UMTS cell CDMA2000 cell GSM cell iDEN cell WiMAX cell The selected network layer(s) determine the network elements that are considered for any actions in Radioplan: • • • • All configuration plots (see section 3. Each site can have cells of various technologies. By having cells of different systems at the same site. all active network layers must belong to the same system technology. site sharing and even antenna sharing can be modeled. www. • 5. Only empty network layers (no cells assigned) can be deleted by pressing the X button to the right. A site is mainly characterized by its position and can have various system specific hardware parameters. the following rules should be followed: • • • • • A new network layer can be created by pressing the Add… button on the lower left of the dialog. Table 5-2 shows the available system technologies with their associated cell symbols. However. And each cell is assigned to a network layer according to technology and frequency band.2. A cell contains all relevant system specific parameters. If only a single network layer shall be active. the string “Multiple Layers” is shown there. The currently active network layer is shown in the combo box to the left of the views toolbar.

If this button is active. the ARFCN of the new network. repeaters. all network elements in the project are visible. This is done by the (tooltip Show only Active Layers) from the views toolbar. ‘GSM’. One can choose from ‘UMTS’. additional antennas) of a network layer can be duplicated.4 Applying Network Configurations from other Network Layers Similarly. the target network layer must be active. and ‘WiMAX’. The frequency band of the new network layer. During this action. 5. www. Initially.2.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 85 In addition to the selection of the active network layer(s).2. ‘iDEN’. The filter status is also indicated by a special icon at the Network Elements node item in the tree window. Otherwise. Both the network elements in the configuration data tree to the left as well as in the viewing area are controlled by this visibility flag. Then the duplicate network layer dialog appears as shown in Fig. network configurations can be copied from one network layer to another one. the technology of the new network layer can be freely chosen.com .g. The duplicate function is invoked by selecting the menu entry File Current Project Duplicate Network Layer…. 5-5 Duplicate network layer dialog Table 5-3 Duplicate network layer setup Parameter Description Source Network Layer The user can choose a single network layer out of all existing ones in the project to be duplicated. Target Network Layer System Frequency Band HCS The technology of the new network layer. Fig. 5-5. This could be e. the visibility of the network icon elements in the various layers can be controlled separately. This function is particularly useful if a different technology network shall be rolled out based on the site configurations of an existing network. ‘CDMA2000’. The according dialog appears that is shown in Fig. The name of the HCS for the new network layer.actix.3 Duplicating a Network Layer The network elements (cells. 5. 5-6. the visibility of the network elements is filtered to the currently active network layer(s). Then this function can be invoked by Current Project Apply Cell/Antenna Parameters from selecting the menu entry File other Network Layers…. The usage of this function is explained in Table 5-3.

the current project is closed. However. In the lower part of the dialog. Currently open project (unrestricted access) Read how to specify the owner of a project and how to select the access policy in section 6. which means that at a certain time only one project can be open. The current access status of a project is symbolized by the project icon in the Projects tab according to the key given in Table 5-4.2. The database is multiuser enabled such that several users can work with the same project data. Multiple selection is possible by using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys. it is possible to duplicate the project and work with the copy. If no sector alias is defined for the cells of source and target network layer(s). The current user has no access to this project.actix.com . refer to [R-ASM]. This icon can also appear together with the green or red lock symbol for showing the above mentioned access restrictions. Such sector aliases can be imported from Atoll. All project data are saved in the database automatically. Table 5-4 Access restrictions of projects Project Icon Description Project with unrestricted access for all users Project with unrestricted access for the owner (within brackets) only Project access restricted to the user given in brackets (different user). If. 5-6 Dialog for copying network configurations from other network layers In the upper part of this dialog. Radioplan is project oriented. www. 5. one or more network layers can be chosen to retrieve their configurations. Radioplan can be opened several times while using the same underlying multi-user enabled database. then this association is used for applying the cell parameters to the target network layer.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 86 Fig. It is possible to restrict the access to a certain project to a single user. Sub-project (see section 5. different aspects of the network configuration can be chosen for being applied to the current network layer. If the user wants to work with two or more projects simultaneously. however.3 User Rights Management In general. If the user wants to work with another project. cells of different network layers are associated by identical sector aliases (irrespective of their names). the cells need to have identical names in order that the specified parameters can be copied from one network layer to another.11) with unrestricted access for all users.

5. the login of the user who created the new project is taken as the owner. If an owner of the project was specified.8. but e. one has to perform the following steps: • • Choose File New Project from the menu. icon The initially empty project will immediately be transferred to the Radioplan database. Especially the RAN items like network controller.5 for a more detailed description on this. However. The simplest form of import is just a file based import. 5. you can click the from the standard toolbar or type Ctrl-N. In order to greatly simplify and automate this process.1 Library Integration If all parameters of a network configuration had to be configured manually this would be a tedious and error-prone work. a radio network setup that has been previously planned in Radioplan or another RNP tool can be imported into the current Radioplan database to further improve and optimize it. Furthermore. different user levels are available to allow or restrict the access to certain functions and controls of the application on a user individual basis.ini file located in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. in case of the www. 5. Refer to section 5.1. As an alternative. 5. Please.1 Importing a Project from an RNP Tool Radioplan provides several interfaces to import entire project configurations from other RNP tools. and service can be exported. A network configuration can also be imported from the OSS. When importing a new item into the network configuration.5 Project Data Import Usually. the user is prompted with a file open dialog that presents the available library items by default. It is possible to extend the library by exporting certain simulation items into it that have been identified for future/general use. to validate the radio network quality and to adjust the RRM algorithm parameters. the name is given within brackets behind the project title. refer to chapter 4 where it is shown how to use the library to easily build a simple example configuration. In order to create such a new project. no network elements are contained in the project yet.2 and also [RAdmin]). the user has the opportunity to build a new network configuration from scratch. Read more on Radioplan user rights and their configuration in [R-Admin]. cells.4 Creating a New Project For the case that no preconfigured project data are available.g.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 87 As another aspect of the user rights management.5.4. mobility. These parameter settings are contained in the defaultparameters. most of the configuration settings dialogs have a Default button that can be used to reset all parameters of that profile to pre-configured default values. User levels and their special access rights can be configured by *. and antennas.ini files. it is possible to load a network configuration from Radioplan’s own file format.2 and also [R-Admin]). A new list entry in the Projects tab of the tree window appears. Alternatively.actix.com . By default. The project is automatically initialized with a default simulation area of 1 km2. sites. Read more about how to edit the general project settings in section 6. a representative set of preconfigured project items is provided with the installation in the library subdirectory of the Radioplan installation folder (see section 2.2. and the three user profiles for equipment.

An OSS network configuration is imported by choosing the menu entry File Import OSS Network Configuration….g. A dialog appears where the user can select a network configuration file and an optional filter polygon for the network cluster. such Radioplan Modules allow to perform network optimization entirely based on live network data. This dialog is shown in Fig. pathloss matrices etc.g. 5-7. MMR data or switch counters). Fig. 5-8. Further import interfaces can be added at short notice. 5-7 OSS network configuration data import dialog If this dialog is confirmed without further option. Still the network configuration data available from the OSS is sufficient for several Radioplan Modules. In conjunction with performance measurement data from the live networks (e. 5. also a fully integrated COM based bidirectional data Import exchange is supported. On the other hand. After that the network configuration is imported. the network configuration of the currently open project can be updated with the selected network configuration file by checking the option Update Current Open Project. This can be accomplished by choosing the menu entry File Import Project from other Database….actix. 5. The project import can be invoked from the File submenu.). Please refer to the Automatic Parameter Optimization Module and the Automatic Neighbor List Planning Module. DEM.com .5. In case of creating a new project. OSS network configuration data does not contain any map data (e.5.2 Importing Network Configuration Data from the OSS Radioplan supports the import of network configuration from the OSS in certain formats. Then a dialog appears where the user can specify the database that contains the project(s) that shall be imported as apparent from Fig. the selected network configuration will be imported as a new project.3 Importing a Project from another Radioplan Database Sometimes it might be necessary to transfer a Radioplan project between databases. The benefit of this function is that the imported network configuration would directly reflect the parameter settings in the live network without the need to maintain the data in an RNP tool. next the user is prompted with the projection settings dialog where the projection and display coordinate systems can be selected. for example.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 88 ATOLL Synchronization Module (ASM). clutter. www.

a new project is created. In order to load an existing project from an external configuration directory into the Radioplan database.5. the project owner is either retrieved from the original project(s) or set to the user who performs the import. the following steps must be conducted: • Choose File Load Project Data… from the menu.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 89 Fig. you can click the icon from the standard toolbar. 5. Depending on the setting of the flag Change owner of project(s) to myself. 5-8 Project import from database dialog Once the database specified by the wines. The network configuration must be available in the Radioplan configuration format that is briefly described in appendix 13. The user can select an arbitrary number of projects for import. In the course of the loading process.1.ini file has been recognized. A file open dialog appears. Alternatively.actix.4 Loading Configuration Data in Radioplan Format If the specific network configuration to be investigated is not yet contained in the Radioplan database. The project(s) will be imported including their folder hierarchy of the original project tree. the user has the possibility to load a configuration that is stored in a hierarchical file structure. Multiple selection in the list is possible by using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys. all available projects from that database are listed in the dialog. The project import starts by pressing the OK button.com . www.

alternatively. i. When you then open another project.5 for loading an externally stored network configuration into the Radioplan database. that one is highlighted in the list with the symbol. the user can select several files that would be combined into a Radioplan project. just double-click on the respective list item or choose Open Project… from the item’s context menu. To change the access rights. This preliminary title can be changed in the project settings dialog. Although it is permitted to have projects www.sign left of them. the new copied project appears in the tree window. Then the project is opened and the simulation area is shown in the viewing area. Additionally. refer to section 6. Immediately. Project folders in the tree can be expanded/collapsed by clicking the +/. denoted by an appropriate suffix. If currently any project is open. refer to section 6. 5. See section 5. one has to perform the following steps: • Select the Projects tab of the tree window by clicking the corresponding clip in the lower part of that window. A function is invoked by choosing the menu entry File dialog is shown where the user can select the Cellopt AFP file. 5. The extent of configuration items shown there depends on the settings of the viewing options. see the section on the Components toolbar in appendix 13. the progress of the action is shown in the progress bar that appears in the status bar.2. it is assured that only a single project is active at any time. • To open the desired project.2. When loading is finished the simulation area is shown in the viewing area. The project is loaded into the Radioplan database as soon as you choose the main configuration file.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 90 • • Select the main configuration file from the appropriate configuration directory of the project you want to load. Here it is described how a network configuration is used that has already been loaded into the internal database of Radioplan. In order to open an existing project.6 Working with Existing Projects A usual case of working in the network planning/configuration process is to improve the network setup by performing recursive investigations in basically the same scenario. While the project is loaded.com . A hierarchical list of all projects that are available in the database appears in the tree window. Typically only a very small number of parameters is changed in this type of investigations.e. This Import Cellopt AFP Project….2. Import of both CellOpt AFP 2 and 3 formats is supported.5.6. The clear choice in this case is to use a predefined network environment. This is done by selecting Duplicate Project from the corresponding project’s context menu.1 Duplicating a Project In the case that a certain project configuration shall be preserved before modifying it. the previous one will be closed at the same time.actix. The user rights of the new project are automatically confined to the current user (owner). one can modify them in the project settings dialog.2. a project in the database can also be copied. 5. In case of the Cellopt AFP 2 format. the project title is displayed in the title bar of the application window.5 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Import A network plan from Actix Cellopt AFP can be imported as a project into Radioplan.

it is possible to duplicate such a project and work with the copy. This dialog is shown in Fig. Thus it is assured that the configuration data of other users are not disturbed while enabling access to the very same data in copied projects. its usage is explained in Table 5-5.2 Using the Project Maintenance Wizard In order to reduce the memory consumption of a project and to strip the project data taylored to a certain area.com . it is recommended to assign each project an unambiguous name in order to distinguish them from one another. The first wizard dialog appears which allows to remove unnecessary sites and cells from the project.6. This dialog is shown in Fig. 5-10. all sites and cells outside the simulation area will be removed from the project.actix. Here the user can convert the pathloss matrices into multi-resolution matrices and possibly clip them to the extensions of the simulation area.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 91 with identical titles in the database. Even if a certain project is not accessible due to the user rights management. It can be invoked from the project context menu by using the entry Maintenance Wizard…. 5. If this checkbox is activated. all inactive cells will be removed from the project. the project conversion wizard can be used. its usage is explained in Table 5-6. This is especially useful if several users work with the same database. all sites that have no attached cells will be removed from the project. 5-9. If this checkbox is activated. www. Pressing the Next button leads to the second wizard dialog. 5-9 Project maintenance wizard: site removal Table 5-5 Site removal options in the project maintenance wizard Function Description Remove Sites from Project Remove Sites and Cells located outside of Simulation Area Remove Inactive Cells Remove Sites with no cells attached General flag to enable the subsequent site removal functions. If this checkbox is activated. Fig.

5-11. The radius of the highres part of the new pathloss matrices. a value of 4 reduces the pixel resolution outside the highres area by a factor of 4.e. it is possible to configure antenna families or to remove unused antenna families. 5-10 Project maintenance wizard: pathloss conversion Table 5-6 Pathloss conversion options in the project maintenance wizard Parameter Description Unit Convert Single Resolution into MultiResolution Pathloss New HighRes Radius If this checkbox is activated. its usage is explained in Table 5-7. all pathloss matrices are clipped to the extensions of the simulation area.com . As an example. this value should be chosen smaller than half the original matrix extension. The resolution reduction factor per dimension for the lowres part of the new pathloss matrices.actix. all single resolution pathloss matrices in the project will be converted into high/low resolution matrices. i. In order to reduce the memory consumption.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 92 Fig. — m New LowRes Resolution Factor — Clip Pathloss to Simulation Area — In the last wizard dialog. www. This dialog is shown in Fig. the memory consumption for that part is reduced by a factor of 42=16. If this checkbox is activated.

actix. 5. the user can navigate back and forth through the wizard using the Back and Next buttons. See section 6. In order to merge another project into the current one. This is particularly the case if the RNP tool which is used as the data source does not support multi-layer projects including the corresponding cross-layer constraints (e. or repeater. shared antennas).g.5. 5-12.3 Merging Projects In general it is possible to handle multi-layer projects in Radioplan. all antenna families are stripped from the project that are not referenced by any cell. This dialog is shown in Fig.com .9 for details on the antenna family definition. as the case may be. www. If this checkbox is activated.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 93 Fig. Then a dialog is shown where the other project can be chosen that shall be merged into the current one. 5-11 Project maintenance wizard: antenna configuration and removal Table 5-7 Antenna family options in the project maintenance wizard Function Description Configure and Remove Antennas from Project Create Antenna Families General flag to enable the subsequent antenna conversion functions. the function Merge Projects… from the project’s context menu is to be selected. additional antenna. At any time before pressing the Run button. the antennas in the project are grouped into antenna families according to the naming convention of the antennas. However. such different network layers might only be available in separate projects.6. Remove Unused Antenna Families Pressing the Run button in the final wizard dialog will start the project conversion. If this checkbox is activated.

Sites can be merged either according to their location or their name. alternatively. 5-13. Any network layers that did not yet exist in the current project and that are associated with any network elements copied from the other project are also copied. An example view of the configuration parameters overview is given in Fig. 5.com . the network elements in the simulation area. and pathloss matrices) are copied from the other project into the current one. It is in the responsibility of the user to update and maintain the cross-layer contraints. Furthermore.7 Project Database Management 5. a suffix can be specified that is added to all cell names of the imported network layer(s). The parameter settings of all configuration items are shown then in a table in the viewing area. additional antennas. Only network elements (sites and cells with their associated antennas. Parameters that were unset and that are thus filled with a default value. Please refer to [R-ACP] for a description on the usage and configuration. So the user can choose to confine the merging to only the active network elements. A blue background color indicates that the respective parameter was filled with a value based on another parameter.7. selecting File Current Project List Project Parameters from the menu bar.actix. www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 94 Fig. repeaters. are highlighted in red.1 Project Update A complete overview of all configuration data settings of the current project including an update of possibly missing or obsolescent parameters can be obtained by choosing the entry Update Project from the project’s context menu or. in particular the shared antenna flags. and only the used antenna families. 5-12 Merge projects dialog There are a few flags that can be used to customize the project merging.

Make sure that the latest and up-to-date *. Then the project update is started immediately.2 Complete Project Update of the Database Especially in the case when upgrading to a new Radioplan release. the processing of the database update can take some minutes.com . Hence this function is perfectly suited to update old project configurations to the latest version (presumed the defaultparameters. it might be necessary to update all projects in the database in one step. www.ini file is up-to-date).7. 5-13 Complete parameter overview of a project Previously unset parameters (backed blue or red) are set to the displayed default values as soon as the Parameter Report & Update function is invoked. The complete project update of the database can be invoked by using the Tools Database Update All Projects menu entry. 5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 95 Fig. Depending on the number and size of projects in the database. Then each project would be updated in the same way as done with the ‘Update Project’ function in the previous subsection. These default values are taken from the defaultparameters.ini file in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.ini files are installed when starting the database update.2 and also [RAdmin]). This will be automatically ensured if the new Radioplan release was correctly installed.actix.

first a summary of the entire project is given in the project statistics report. the different areas. a list of projects can be created. Fig. after a network optimization to compare the original with the optimized network setup.actix. a comparison between the configuration of two different project can be done.5 Direct Comparison Between Project Configurations Besides the configuration overview of a single project.7. www. Fig.7. This function is invoked by Database List All Projects. 5-14. 5-14 Project overview list 5.4 Project Statistics A report with project statistics about the memory consumption. 5-15 shows a sample statistics report. the statistics report is opened in a separate window.3 List of Projects in the Database In order to get an overview of all projects in the database with their current access rights and memory consumption. 5. Fig. and the number of sites/cells inside the areas can be created from the entry Project Statistics when right-clicking on the currently active project’s item in the Projects tab of the tree window. Below that the figures for each network layer are given separately.7.g.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 96 5. This makes particular sense e. When holding down the <Shift> key while choosing the menu entry. 5-15 Sample project statistics report If there are multiple network layers in the project. An example of a project list is using the menu entry Tools given in Fig.com .

7. The project comparison function can be invoked by choosing File Current Project Compare with Other Project… from the menu bar.actix. 5-17. If certain configuration parameter values differ between the projects. Fig. After all necessary data have been collected.1 above. Then a dialog is shown where the other project for the comparison can be selected. the configuration comparison overview is determined. The progress is indicated in the status bar. the respective fields are highlighted with a turquoise background. a similar table is displayed as the parameter overview in section 5. This dialog is presented in Fig. This operation can take a moment. 5-17 Project comparison overview www. 5-16 Project selection dialog for project comparison As soon as the selection of a project has been confirmed. 5-16. An example of a project comparison overview is given in Fig. Additionally.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 97 The project comparison function can only be called for an open project. Then the parameters of the current project are compared to those of another project that can be selected from all projects in the database.com . Fig. the deviating value of the other project is given in parentheses.

Besides saving a complete project it is also possible to export single configuration items into external configuration files.2 Saving a Project into Files A project can be saved into a hierarchical directory structure in a file system. Both of these alternatives are described in the following subsections. this is necessary to exchange a network configuration between independent platforms/workstations. This is accomplished by opening the project update dialog and possibly selecting the cells to be updated. select “Browse…” in the upper list field to display a file select dialog.g.8. see [R-ASM] for details on the ASM.8 Project Data Export Projects are normally held in the Radioplan database. For example.cfg (e. If the determined destination directory still contains some older configuration data. For example.8. a dialog is shown where the user can specify the main configuration file name. A project can also be saved entirely to external files. project. via COM API or direct database access).Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 98 5. the user is informed in the center list field which files must be deleted before saving the current project configuration. 5. 5-18 Save dialog for the configuration data In order to enter a proper path.cfg). Then. A sample view of the dialog is shown in Fig. 5. www. The main configuration file must have the extension *. modifications in the network layout can also be transferred back to the original project in the RNP in order to keep them synchronized. Before saving icon (tooltip Save the project. by clicking the Project Data) or by choosing File Save Project Data… from the menu.actix. Fig.1 Backward Synchronization of an RNP Project from Radioplan If the current Radioplan project was imported from an RNP via an integrated interface (e.com . 5-18. it must be open in Radioplan. Details of the backward synchronization with different RNP tools can be found in the according documentation material.g.

Typically.3 Actix CellRefs Export It is possible to export a network plan in Actix CellRefs format. the flag Check validity of project configuration is inactive to just store the project data as is.ini file with the same name is stored.4 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Export A network plan can also be exported in Cellopt AFP 2/3 format in order to be further used Export in Actix Cellopt AFP.8. single configuration items can be exported to external configuration files.actix. the site locations given in the CellRefs are always exported in WGS84 projection. Even if another projection system is used in the project. If the user would like to abort the saving action. several options can be chosen: • By default. This *.5 Configuration Item Export Likewise. The option Use Primary Keys as File Names instead of Name of Network Elements is activated by default.g. www. On the contrary. 5. A file open dialog appears where the user can specify the filename and path where to store the item configuration. The hierarchical directory structure of the configuration data and the configuration file format are further described in appendix 13. Using the Restrict Environment data to Simulation Area option allows to limit the amount of data stored in the project to minimum. • • • The configuration data are saved eventually by clicking the Proceed button. In the appearing file save dialog the user can choose the filename of the exported CellRefs file.1. a completeness check of the project data will be performed during export. he could click the Cancel button instead. exchange certain configuration items of a network setup between different projects or to extend the library by user-defined items.ini file can be utilized by Analyzer when the CellRefs file is read.. For a network simulation. locations. To accomplish this. This function is invoked by choosing the menu entry File Export Cellopt AFP Plan…. one has to choose the entry Export <Item Name>… from the respective item’s context menu in the Configuration tab of the tree window.8.8. If it is checked. The progress of the saving action is shown as a progress bar in the status bar. path and the version of the Cellopt AFP file. meaning that the filenames of the configuration files are directly derived from the primary keys of the respective items in the database. This check would only have importance if the network configuration is intended to be simulated which requires a complete set of configuration data. the menu entry Tools Actix CellRefs File Export can be used. the option Export for Simulator must be selected. however.com . the filenames would be derived from the IDs of the distinct items. This function can be used to. Then a dialog is shown where the user can select the filename incl. a smaller area from a large master project can be cut out effectively with the help of this option. Such information can be used in the ActixOne Platform and related products such as Actix Viewpoint or Actix Analyzer as references of cell and site names. 5. e.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 99 In the lower part of the dialog. In order to export a CellRefs file. In conjunction with the actual CellRefs file also an *. 5. and some further parameters.

simulation results are imported nonincrementally.e. or select Simulation Import Results from the menu. refer to chapter 12. the user has the choice to either delete just a single parameter. Table 5-8 Types of result sets Result Set Icon Description Measurement result set Dynamic simulation result set Snapshot simulation result set Performance counter data result set Generic result set (converted from table data) 5. In order to load simulation results.9 Managing Network Performance Data in a Project Network performance data from measurements or simulations can only be loaded into an existing project in the database. For a more detailed description. one can click the icon from the simulator toolbar. etc. To add new simulation results data to the already existing ones in the database. i. This can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding Delete <…> entries in the context menus of the project (in the Projects tab) or an item in the Results tab. the result sets are symbolized by different icons that are summarized in Table 5-8. or all results together. the network data (parameters) are grouped in certain Categories. It is also possible to load results from several simulation runs incrementally into the project for the purpose of comparison.9. i. Measurement data are loaded by using the menu entry File Such data are always incrementally imported to the project. network element. Import Measurements….1 Structure of Network Performance Data The network performance data of a project are listed in the Results tab in a hierarchical tree structure. newly loaded data override all existing network performance data in the project. By default.2 Network Performance Data Import The direct import of measurement data from different measurement devices is supported. newly loaded measurement data are added as a new result set. All network performance data originating from a single measurement or simulation is collectively called a result set. www. 5. position. The removal of result parameters is described in greater detail in chapter 12. The data are ordered in several hierarchical levels that are explained below. the user can also display the data of other projects from the same database in the Results tab and use them for an evaluation. The simulation results loading process is described in greater detail in [R-Sim].e. a whole result set. According to the different types of network performance data. This way it is assured that they are always tied to a certain network configuration.actix. 5.3 Deleting Network Performance Data To remove simulation results or drive test data from a project. respectively. In the appearing dialog the desired parameters can be chosen for loading.9. Each parameter contains a set of values that have an associated time stamp. The network performance data management is briefly described in the following sections. the checkbox Add Results – Existing Result Sets will not be removed in the import dialog must be selected.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 100 5. Inside each result set. In order to compare network data from different projects (with possibly similar network configuration).9.com .

refer to Fig. Caution! The deletion of a project cannot be undone. A dialog appears where the user can select a filter area for the sites to be copied to the sub-project(s). they can be used in the Capital Planning process to calculate different scenarios for a network and compare the solutions to the initial master project. • • Choose Delete Project from the project’s context menu. 5.10 Deleting an Existing Project It is possible to delete an existing project from the Radioplan database. the user can select Yes to all in order to delete all projects together. This saves disk space when several sub-projects are in use since all the pathloss and GEO data is contained in the one master project. Several projects can be deleted in one step by first marking them in the Projects tab and then choose Delete Project from the project context menu.g. A project can only be deleted if the current user has access permission to that project. open the context menu in the Projects tab and select Create Sub-Project(s)…. Fig. As one example. clutter matrices. In the appearing confirmation dialog. A sub-project would then be a copy of the network configuration including the user configuration and the traffic matrices of the master project. cluster results are synchronized back and combined in the master project.com .1 Deriving Sub-Projects from a Master Project To create sub-projects from the currently open (master) project. The user is asked to confirm the deletion of the current project. The following steps have to be performed to accomplish this. After the optimization. As another option. 5-19 Create sub-projects dialog www. 5-19.11. Otherwise it is completely deleted from the database including all results or drive test data that might have been loaded into it. Sub-projects are useful for various purposes. All pathloss data as well as GEO data (e.actix. a larger master project could be divided into sub-projects of smaller clusters that can be optimized separately. 5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 101 5. If the question is negated the project will be preserved.11 Handling of Master/Sub-Projects It is possible to create one or more ‘Sub-projects’ from a given ‘Master Project’. The according project item in the tree window is removed. DEM) will only be contained in the master project.

This could be the recommended setting for a typical workflow of a super user assigning the subprojects to different engineers for further processing. amended by the name of the filter polygon they were created for. this would mean that pathloss tuning would only have to be performed once (i. see Fig. in the master project). especially in the case where more than one sub-projects were derived from the same master project. the new sub-projects are created.11.3 Synchronizing a Sub-Project with its Master Project After different optimization scenarios have been perfomed it is then possible to perform a synchronization of the site and cell settings between the master and sub-project. Fig. After the filter selection is committed. In addition.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 102 In this dialog.11. Multiple sub-projects can be made from a given master project that allows. e. If the option Filter Sites by Area is chosen.2 Working with Sub-Projects Since the pathloss matrices would be contained in the original master project. If in addition also the option Copy only the selected filter area is activated then for each new sub-project only the respective area polygon will be copied as the new simulation area. a new sub-project for each selected area from the list would be created. This synchronization can be accomplished by opening the context menu of the master project in www. using separate sub-projects. it is excluded to call the project maintenance wizard from a sub-project for the same reason. 5.g. all area polygons available in the project are listed. so this is prohibited. simply open the project settings dialog of the sub-project. Likewise. The reason for this is that merging the sub-project would have an impact on the master project. In order to determine the corresponding master project for a given sub-project. Otherwise just a single sub-project as a full copy of the master project would be generated. 5-20 Project settings dialog of a sub-project It is not possible to merge a sub-project with any other project – the respective entry in the project context menu is grayed out. 5. They appear as new entries in the Projects tab of the tree window with a special sub-project icon (possibly amended by the green or red lock symbol) and having the same name as its master project. the investigation of different optimization scenarios or neighbor list optimization. 5-20. the projects are identified as a sub-project by ‘<Sub Project>’ behind the name.com .actix. The user may want to adjust the sub-project name accordingly for better identification. the option Create without assigning an owner should be activated. The corresponding master project is shown below the project title.e. If the new sub-projects shall be made available for more users than just the owner of the master project.

Alternatively. This will open a dialog to choose which sub-project should be used for applying the network settings to the master project as shown in Fig. Sites/cells that would have been added afterwards to the master project would not be touched. 5-21 Selecting a sub-project for synchronization with its master project This dialog lists all existing sub-projects of the currently open master project. also new or deleted sites/cells will also be updated to the sub-project. There are two different ways to accomplish this: • Synchronization: A parameter synchronization in the sense as described above can be done by opening the context menu of the sub-project in the Projects tab and selecting Synchronize from Master Project…. When pressing this button. the sub-project is updated immediately because it has only a single master project. After the user has confirmed the selected sub-project. www. • 5.10 for details.11. all the affected sub-projects are listed in the lower part of the dialog. In this case the network plan in the entire simulation area of the sub-project is refreshed from the master project. 5-21. all parameters that have changed in that subproject since the branching are updated in the master project. in contrast to a simple parameter synchronization. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 103 the Projects tab and selecting Synchronize from Sub-Project…. In this case. 5-22. If a master project is deleted then automatically all its sub-projects will be deleted as well.actix. Please refer to section 5. In this case the project deletion dialog contains a Detail… button as shown in Fig.com . Fresh-up: The complete sub-project can be refreshed from its master project by selecting Refresh from Master Project… from the sub-project’s context menu. it is also possible to apply the network settings of the master project to the sub-project.4 Deleting a Sub-Project A sub-project is deleted like any normal project. This means that. During the master/sub-project synchronization only network parameters of cells that exist in both projects are updated.

actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 104 Fig.com . 5-22 Project delection dialog with sub-projects www.

or WiMAX is described in chapters 7 through 11. environment data. An example configuration is shown in Fig. Projects can be used for various planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization. pathloss tuning. 6.1 Configuration Overview The Configuration tab of the tree window contains all configuration data of a project. The structure and particular meaning of the configuration data is explained in detail in this chapter. RRM parameter optimization. www.com . The configuration of system technology specific elements for UMTS.actix. 6-1 Configuration data tree view The project configuration data are separated into four major categories: • • areas (polygons). CDMA2000. GSM. Fig. iDEN.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 105 6 Multi-Layer Project Configuration This chapter describes the general configuration of multi-layer/multi-technology projects in Radioplan. and dynamic or snapshot network simulation. site selection. 6-1. measurement analysis. neighbor list planning.

Altogether they constitute a hierarchical structure of configuration items that is represented in a tree. it can be dragged to another position in the tree.2 Project Settings The overall settings of a project can be configured in its project settings dialog. The options are summarized in the following: • • • Settings dialog: Choose Settings… from the item’s context menu to display the settings dialog. 6. just expand the corresponding folder by either double-clicking the folder icon or single-clicking the +/. • • • • The following sections treat all the above mentioned major configuration data categories. In order to make the data items in a tree branch visible. and can configure the user rights management. it can be shown in the viewing area by choosing Show this Matrix. This can be opened from the project’s context menu (either in the Projects.com . www. They are initialized with default settings. These groups are further subdivided as appropriate to ease the intuitive understanding of the configuration data structure. A new item will be added to the tree. Export: Certain configuration items (UTRAN items and user profiles) can be exported into single configuration files by choosing Export <Item Name>….sign in front of it. 6-2. Repeating the same action will collapse the branch items. and RAN configuration. Most of these options can be reached via the context menu of an item (right-click on the item). Show Matrix: If the tree item is a matrix. new objects can be created by choosing Add <Item Name>. The user can specify the project title along with a description. and the distinct fields are described in detail in Table 6-1. The dialog is shown in Fig. Creation: For some types of configuration items (especially matrices or network elements). or Results tab in the tree window) by clicking the entry Settings… or by simply double-clicking the project item. Removal: Existing items can be deleted from the tree by choosing Delete <Item Name>. It shows all of the configurable options of the particular item. In general. all data items in the tree can be manipulated in several ways. The new item is added to the database then. or they can be retained in the library. Configuration. Choose Duplicate <Item Name> from the context menu of an existing item. This way items can be exchanged between projects. If required.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 106 • • user profile. Copy: New items can be created by duplicating existing ones. Import: A new item can be imported from a configuration file (from the library by default) by choosing Import <Item Name>….actix. This can be renamed and manipulated in its settings dialog.

also other users can access this project. 6-3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 107 Fig. — — — — By default. If Radioplan is deployed in a computer network (LAN). the project access is restricted to the given owner. 6. — Description Owner Take Ownership Grant Access for all Users Arbitrary description of the project Owner of the project. If the checkbox is not selected. the user in charge of that sub-project could take ownership by pressing this button.actix. the associated master project is given below the project title. However. Read more on the handling of subprojects in section 5. the Take Ownership button can be used. A button to take ownership of this project by assigning the user ID to it. it makes things easier to choose unambiguous titles for different projects. an exemplary view of the area polygons used in a project is given in Fig. www. If this checkbox is selected.3 Area Management Radioplan provides functions for managing area polygons to be used as simulation or analysis area. All available areas are listed below the Areas node in the hierarchical configuration data tree. The Grant Access for all Users option can be used to make the project available to all users. Especially in conjunction with sub-projects. This is especially important if no owner is specified in the field above. If on creation of sub-project no initial owner is assigned. 6-2 Project settings dialog Table 6-1 Project settings Parameter Description Unit Project Title An arbitrary project title that need not immediately be unique among all project titles in the Radioplan database. This is a login name of the user who has single access rights for this project. special care should be taken with the user rights management.com . the current user login is taken as the owner of a new project. so the project ownership cannot be changed any more. The meaning of the area symbols is described in Table 6-2.11. After that the button will be grayed out. In case of a sub-project.

the following rules apply: • • A region covered by a single polygon (more general: by an odd number of polygons) is included in the area.2 and 6.com . and each polygon must have at least three vertices. However. Naturally. however. 6-4). There are certain rules how the polygons can be combined to form an area which can either be a simulation or an analysis area. The currently assigned analysis area. Fig. make sure that no border line is intersecting with another one – such a simulation area is not allowed (right part of Fig.actix. 6-3 Simulation/analysis area and alternative area polygons in the configuration data tree The particular purposes of the simulation and analysis areas are described in the following sections 6. permissible forbidden Fig. 6. An alternative spare polygon for simulation/analysis area.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 108 Table 6-2 Available area polygon symbols Area Polygon Description The currently assigned simulation area.3. border lines must not be intersecting. Or certain areas www. 6-4 An area (sub-) polygon may be concave. Note: A single area polygon may have an arbitrary shape. 6-4.1 Rules for the Shape of Areas A valid area can consist of an arbitrary number of subpolygons. the area can be combined of several independent “islands”. A region covered by two polygons (more general: by an even number of polygons) is excluded from the area. This means that overlapping polygons are combined by an XOR function to form the resulting area. there must be at least one polygon for an area. All subpolygons of an area are equitably considered. It may even be concave as shown in the left part of Fig. The above rules can be used to construct an area in a very flexible way. all polygons of the area are allowed to overlap each other.3. Generally. In particular.3. Depending on the number of overlapping polygons in a certain region. this region either belongs to or is excluded from the area. For example.3. there is no weighting order among the subpolygons of an area.

It could either be drawn graphically with the mouse pointer or its vertices could be edited in the area settings dialog. the simulation area determines the region that certain actions are confined to. In a surface plot. Depending on the particular Radioplan Module used. Then the area symbol is changed into and the viewing area is www. 6-5. When a new project is created. 1000m). In the results selection dialog. 6. See section 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 109 inside a larger area can be excluded from it by inserting proper subpolygons to e. the analysis of measurement parameters can be confined to the simulation area.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Simulation Area An existing area polygon in the area management can be set as simulation area by choosing Set as Simulation Area from the respective area item’s context menu in the ocnfiguration data tree. the analysis of simulation result parameters can be confined to the simulation area.4 for more details.com . it can have different meanings that are summarized in Table 6-3.3. polygon inside polygon: exclusion extra polygon island: inclusion two overlapping polygons: exclusion Fig. the (1000m.3. the simulation area is presented by auburn lines.g. [see Measurement Module or Network Simulator] Network Simulator The creation and movement of UEs during a network simulation is confined to the simulation area. The considered area where the objective function of the optimization is calculated and evaluated is identical with the simulation area.2. Outside this area the display is shaded slightly gray. Table 6-3 Impact of the simulation area Module During Execution of Module During Result Analysis Measurement Module — In the results selection dialog.3. ACP and other Optimization Modules In a project there must always be a simulation area. Some of these examples are demonstrated in Fig. 0m) There are two ways to edit the simulation area.2 Simulation Area The simulation area defines a region that represents the main geographic filter in a project. avoid optimizing an area around a hospital with sensitive ICNIRP requirements. 6-5 Possible constellations for exclusion and inclusion regions of an area 6.actix. Generally. default simulation area is a square area with the extensions (0m.

4. In a surface plot. Generally.4 Working with Area Polygons Areas can be edited and modified in various ways.3. it can have different meanings that are summarized in Table 6-4. symbolized by . Then the area symbol is changed into showing the new analysis area. Once other areas are available in the area management. Depending on the particular Radioplan Module used. the analysis of measurement parameters can be confined to the analysis area. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 110 updated showing the new simulation area. A file open dialog is shown where the polygon can be selected. Refer to appendix 13. The previous simulation area polygon is converted into a spare area symbolized by .4. In case there is no analysis area defined.3. [see Measurement Module or Network Simulator] Similar to the simulation area. the analysis area determines the region that certain (analysis) actions are confined to.com . This section describes all available functions of the area management.1 Importing an Area An area polygon can be imported into the area management by using the Import… function in the context menu of the Areas node in the configuration data tree. it is now converted into a spare area symbolized by . also the polygons of the analysis area can be edited either graphically with the mouse in the viewing area or by editing the coordinates in the area settings dialog.3. 6. For more details.3 Analysis Area The analysis area is an optional region that can be used for additional geographic filtering for various purposes. Network Simulator — ACP and other Optimization Modules The selection of reconfigurable and considered cells is determined in relation to the analysis area. the analysis of simulation result parameters can be confined to the analysis area. www. If previously there was a different analysis area. 6.actix. Outside the valid analysis area the display is shaded slightly gray.3. Then the analysis area is converted into a spare area again. 6. In the results selection dialog. During simulation results import.6 for a short documentation of the supported vector data formats.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Analysis Area An existing area polygon in the area management can be set as analysis area by choosing Set as Analysis Area from the respective area item’s context menu in the ocnfiguration and the viewing area is updated data tree. the analysis area can also be unset by choosing the Set as Analysis Area context menu entry when the tick sign is set. Since it is not immediately necessary to have defined an analysis area in a project. functions requiring an analysis area would work on the simulation area instead. the analysis area is presented by yellow lines. this entry can also be accessed in the context menu of any area polygon. the imported data can be confined to the analysis area. please refer to section 6.3.3. Table 6-4 Impact of the analysis area Module During Execution of Module During Result Analysis Measurement Module — In the results selection dialog.

to change the name.3 Duplicating an Area An area can be duplicated in the area management by using the Duplicate function from that area’s context menu in the configuration data tree. 6-6. or to modify their shape as explained in the following subsections.3.com . In this table. the following actions are possible: • • A new vertex can be simply added in the last (empty) row of the table. 6.4. After confirming with the OK button. preceded by “Copy of“.3. 6-6 Area settings dialog The dialog can be used to change the name of the area in the title field. Once a new area has been imported. refer to appendix 13. This function is invoked by choosing the Export… entry from the context menu of the respective area. Then automatically a new row is appended for another addition of a vertex.3. symbolized by the icon.4 Inspecting Area Polygon Settings The settings of an area can be inspected in the area settings dialog. the distinct vertices that are listed in the table can be modified. The table is fully editable. For example.4. below the Areas node in the configuration data tree.4. It is opened by either double-clicking an area item in the configuration data tree or by selecting Settings… from the area item’s context menu. The icon. A file save dialog is shown where a filename for the export can be determined.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 111 Initially. starting from 0. Fig. www. 6.6. it is ready to be used as simulation/analysis area. The copy of the area is added as a new spare area with a name derived from the original area. Furthermore.2 Exporting an Area Any of the areas can be exported into commonly used vector format files. This dialog is shown in Fig.actix. the new polygon is added as a spare area. the area including all its subpolygons is saved into the file. The area name is derived from the filename. A vertex can be moved by editing its coordinates accordingly. it can be saved as a vector file in Shape or MapInfo format. each subpolygon is denoted by an index in the Subpolygon column. new area is symbolized by the 6.

6. The polygon is then automatically closed to the first vertex.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 112 • For deleting a vertex. A redo is possible by typing <Ctrl-Y>. 6-7 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw the new simulation/analysis area.5. As soon as this special drawing mode is activated.and y-direction) can be specified.3.actix. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. or whether it shall replace the existing area. A polygon of the simulation/analysis area is drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. One has to enter the corresponding drawing mode by selecting either of the or icons (tooltip: Modify Simulation/Analysis Area) from the paint toolbar or by using the menu entries View Paint Modify Simulation/Analysis Area. www. 6-7. Then the newly added polygon is immediately shown in the surface plot. When the polygon is closed and it is not the first subpolygon of an area. Section 3. At least 3 points must be added.4. It should also be noted that for each subpolygon. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. it is easy to surround the area in the map with the mouse that shall be considered for investigation.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. respectively. make sure that currently a surface plot is shown.4. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. So if the background image is a map. the according row in the coordinates table must be selected by clicking the field left of the coordinates and then pressing the <Delete> key. See section 3. It is possible to undo all drawing actions of an area polygon by typing <Ctrl-Z>.5 Drawing an Area (Sub-) Polygon In order to define the simulation/analysis areas graphically in the viewing area.com . Fig. Alternatively. The last vertex is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. see Fig. Also multiple undo and redo commands can be performed. the first vertex is repeated at the end of the vertex list. a dialog appears that asks the user whether this new polygons shall just be added as a subpolygon. the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair and a drawing grid is shown in the viewing area (if a surface plot is chosen).

After removal.4. www. or delete a vertex graphically with the mouse. 6-8. vertices and subpolygons can be removed graphically with the mouse. Then the right mouse button can be pressed to show the context menu of that vertex/subpolygon. new vertices can be added and each vertex can be freely moved or even be deleted. move.3. subpolygons or the entire area can be removed. Then the dashed line disappears. A left mouse click determines the new vertex. and the simulation area is redrawn with the new vertex position.6 Editing an Area (Sub-) Polygon The vertices of the simulation/analysis area can be edited in either of the respective drawing mode.actix. Extract Subpolygon: In order to extract a subpolygon out of a multi-polygon area. the respective polygon will be removed from the area. Moving a vertex is initiated by placing the mouse pointer above the vertex to be moved until it is highlighted by a purple circle around it. the two adjacent vertices will be directly connected by a straight line. 6-8 Editing a vertex/subpolygon of an area The following functions can be called from this context menu: • • • Remove Vertex: The highlighted vertex is removed from the (sub-)polygon. A right mouse click on the edge will highlight it. A dashed auxiliary line appears between the adjacent vertices. This action is presented in Fig. Choose Insert Vertex from that menu. the respective vertex is highlighted by a purple circle around it. In order to determine the new vertex position.com . Fig. this function can be called. Also. Then the left mouse button must be clicked in order to start the moving action. In addition. a dashed auxiliary line is drawn from the old vertex position to the current one.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 113 6. To add a vertex on an existing edge of a polygon. It is also possible to add. When approaching a certain vertex with the mouse pointer in the according area drawing mode. In particular. Remove Subpolygon: When called for a subpolygon. the mouse pointer should be placed above the respective edge. the left mouse button needs to be clicked another time. When then moving the mouse pointer. spanning the path via the current mouse pointer position. Now the mouse pointer can be moved to the desired new vertex position. and a context menu appears.

It is also possible to delete a single subpolygon in a combined area graphically. or the user can define his own clutter matrix.actix. each local region in the simulation area is ruled by different propagation and reception properties.7 Controlling the Visibility of Areas Each area can be individually displayed.6. In addition to that.3. Such a matrix can be imported from an external file or from an RNP tool. icon 6. Typical examples for such clutter classes are terms like rural.3. 6. and streets (for dynamic simulation movement models). These items are explained in more detail in the subsequent sections. So the spare areas can be displayed occasionally by setting their checkbox in order to envision their position. 6-3 above. or urban environments. 6.8 Deleting an Area (Sub-) Polygon An area polygon that is currently not in use (symbolized by the icon in the configuration data tree) can be deleted from the area management.4 Configuration of the Environment The environment comprises all items that do not directly belong to the mobile network. importing a clutter matrix in Radioplan format automatically loads the corresponding clutter classes www. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the polygon. they have an impact on the behavior of the network. The visibility status of an area does not impact its validity as simulation/analysis area.4. DEM matrix. However. the following items define the network environment: • • • clutter matrix. In order to avoid undesired erasure. The visibility of an area is controlled by the checkbox left of its item in the tree as shown in Fig.3. suburban. In particular. the areas can be displayed with a shading of the regions outside the respective area. These distinct regions are categorized in clutter classes.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 114 An extracted subpolygon can either form a new area or it can be added to an existing area as another subpolygon. This is described in subsection 6. The user can choose between these options in the pulldown list of the extract subpolygon dialog: 6. A clutter matrix defines a certain clutter class for each position that is covered by the matrix. Consequently.1 Clutter Depending on different environmental conditions.com . This is accomplished by choosing the Delete entry from the respective area polygon’s context menu. A clutter matrix is always linked with a clutter classes definition.5. the visibility of all areas together can be toggled by using the (tooltip Draw Areas) from the components toolbar to the left. This is a general display setting which can be configured in the according dialog as described in section 3.4.3. Optionally. The clutter is represented in form of a matrix.4.4.

. 6-10 Configuring the clutter in the configuration data tree Then the clutter classes settings dialog is opened.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig. 6-9.1. and a presentation color. 6. North R1C1 R2C1 . The covered area of a clutter matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.. a description.e. alternatively... The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight.1. double-click the Clutter Classes item in the configuration data tree or. The clutter data in the configuration data tree are shown in Fig. it is required to define the clutter classes separately. An example of a typical set of clutter classes is shown in Fig. i. 6-10 (clutter classes highlighted).4.actix. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. Each pixel contains a single value representing a clutter class. the fading profile (one of the four available profiles given in Table 6-6). a clutter class is characterized by • • • an index. several additional properties needed for network simulation (see [R-Sim]): ▫ ▫ the standard deviation of the shadowing.4.2 Defining Clutter Classes To inspect and modify the clutter classes settings.1 Clutter Matrix Format The clutter matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig.. R1C2 R2C2 R 1C 3 R 2C 3 . 6-9 Clutter matrix format in Radioplan 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 115 definition. The alignment of a clutter matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. select Settings… from its context menu. 6-11.com . www. As apparent from this figure. .. a pathloss offset and an interference ratio offset for plot generation and optimization (see [R-ACP]). the Northwestern corner. When loading another format or creating a new clutter matrix. Fig. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North .

An arbitrary color to represent this clutter class in surface plots. and three different DL intracell inter-scrambling code orthogonality factors subdivided according to the user speed. An optional clutter specific offset which is only considered in the network optimization in relation to the interference ratio target (can be Ec/I0 or C/I depending on system technology). The standard deviation of the shadowing distribution for this particular clutter class. The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v > 15m/s for this clutter class.actix.com . The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v = 2…15m/s for this clutter class. An arbitrary string that describes the respective clutter class. 6-11 Clutter classes configuration dialog Table 6-5 Clutter class parameters (gray part only for simulation) Parameter Description Unit Class Description Color Pathloss Offset (Optimization) Ec/I0 or C/I Offset (Optimization) StdDev. Fig. Fading Profile OF alpha IntraCell v < 2m/s OF alpha IntraCell v = 2…15m/s OF alpha IntraCell v > 15m/s This is an integer that uniquely represents a clutter class. The corresponding parameters are summarized in Table 6-5. An optional clutter specific offset which is only considered in the network optimization in relation to the pilot RSCP target.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 116 ▫ ▫ three different DL intracell code orthogonality factors subdivided according to the user speed. The fading profile of this clutter class. Usually this is a running number. — — — dB dB dB see Table 6-6 — — — www. The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v < 2m/s for this clutter class.

For open areas. snow. The default clutter class color is black. typical values for built area (urban. the shadowing standard deviation is considerably lower. the standard deviation of the shadowing is the higher. only a coarse mapping to general environment categorizations can be recommended. empirical pathloss models. It is only necessary to consider shadowing if the pathloss matrices used are very coarse and represent a mean pathloss as can be determined by e.5. Its usage is similar as for modifying the legend colors which is explained in section 3. the more obstacles there are in the corresponding region.5. If. All clutter classes that have black color would be presented in a surface plot with a color that is derived from the standard color palette. environments it could be 10dB to 12dB. The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v = 2…15m/s for this clutter class. Table 6-7 gives a recommendation for the intracell orthogonality factor αc split up for three speed ranges. water. densely built areas hilly areas (if applicable) The intracell OVSF code orthogonality factor αc in DL generally depends on the local propagation conditions and the user speed. The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v > 15m/s for this clutter class. ray launching).g. non-densely built areas (partially) suburban and urban areas urban areas. www. For the fading profile. Then the Radioplan color chooser appears where the user can select the desired color. however. directly associated with the fading profiles.com . open areas. Table 6-6 Recommendation for the deployment of fading profiles (for simulation only) Fading Profile Title Applicable Environment RA TU BU HT Rural Area Typical Urban Bad Urban Hilly Terrain rural. Thus. They are given in Table 6-6.actix. like water or snow.g. a more accurate pathloss model is used that takes the shadowing caused by buildings and other obstacles into account (e. in extreme. — — — The color can be easily edited by clicking with the left mouse button on the respective color field in the table. Usually.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 117 Parameter Description Unit OF alpha InterScramblingCode v < 2m/s OF alpha InterScramblingCode v = 2…15m/s OF alpha InterScramblingCode v > 15m/s The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v < 2m/s for this clutter class. the standard deviation of the shadowing can be chosen much smaller or can even vanish. suburban) lie between 6dB and 8dB. Thus there should be a close relationship to the fading profiles. heavily obstructed.

7 and 0.25 0. An existing clutter class definition can be modified. Parameter values can easily be copied. In a project.4 0. www. Generally. Otherwise. Make sure that you do not delete a clutter class that is used in the matrix. a second code tree with another scrambling code might be used.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 118 Table 6-7 Recommendation for intracell OVSF code orthogonality factors (for simulation only) Fading Profile v < 2 m/s Orthogonality Factor α 2 m/s ≤ v < 15 m/s v ≥ 15 m/s RA TU BU HT 0.9.1 0. only a single clutter matrix is supported. when a new matrix is imported. the overall default values from the simulator settings (see [RSim]) are used. The deletion of a clutter class does not change the current clutter matrix.4. The usage of the table is similar to applications as MS Access or MS Query.1 0.1 0. if no values are given for any of the orthogonality factors in the clutter classes settings. A clutter class definition can be deleted. If even class 0 is not defined. the parameters of clutter class 0 (presumed default class) is used. If a class definition is missing. Rows in the table can be filtered with respect to arbitrarily chosen field values.3 Importing a Clutter Matrix There are two possibilities to import a clutter matrix. or a georeferenced raster file (see appendix 13.com . Columns in the table can be moved. an additional orthogonality factor αsc has been introduced. The clutter class definitions in the settings dialog can be edited in various ways.1. Columns in the table can be easily sorted by double-clicking the header field.25 0. there could occur confusion about which matrix data to use. their default values can be specified in the simulator settings. especially if there would be several clutter classes definitions.actix.4 Some system vendors offer more than one scrambling code per cell. a possibly existing one is replaced. • • • • • • • • A new clutter class definition can be added. they are automatically filled with the preconfigured default values. slightly depending on the environment and the user speed.06 0.4 0. Since the orthogonality factors only have an impact on the network simulator. Also in Compressed Mode.5 for supported file formats). Its values are typically between 0. In order to account for a reasonable interference portion between different scrambling codes in the same cell. refer to [R-Sim]. Hence. Arbitrary.1 0.1 0. contiguous fields in the table can be selected and copied to the clipboard. 6. One can import • • either a predefined Radioplan clutter matrix.25 0.

a clutter classes definition from a previously loaded matrix is retained. choosing Settings… from its context menu. Thus on loading the clutter matrix. If a TIFF file is being imported. In both cases.. the existing classes definition is adopted. To import a matrix. the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area. select Import Clutter Data… from the context menu of the Clutter Classes tree item. 6. The range of admissible clutter class indices is generally restricted to [0. the clutter matrix is imported.4. too. This configuration dialog is shown in Fig. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a clutter configuration file. Indices outside this range are ignored by Radioplan and are mapped to the (presumed) default class 0.com . 6-12. the matrix settings parameters are explained in Table 6-8. the associated clutter classes are loaded. 1.4 Exporting a Clutter Matrix A clutter matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export Clutter Matrix to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the clutter matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window. Since there is no separate clutter classes definition for the TIFF file. In the latter case.4. the attribution of color values to clutter classes is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette. etc. Defining clutter classes for an imported raster data file There are two possibilities to accomplish this. www. a tiled matrix can be imported. the second color is assigned clutter class 1. Alternatively. ..1. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active. Generally. The alternative choice is to first import another clutter matrix from the library with a clutter classes definition that shall also be used for the raster data file.1. the configuration data tree is simultaneously updated such that the new matrix appears beneath the Clutter Classes item. 254]. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog. One choice is to manually define the clutter classes in the clutter classes settings dialog as it is described in subsection 6.5 Viewing a Clutter Matrix To inspect the clutter matrix settings the user can open the clutter matrix configuration dialog by double-clicking the matrix item in the tree or.2. an arbitrary georeferenced raster data file can be imported as clutter matrix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 119 A clutter matrix stored in the library or a project is inseparably combined with its clutter classes definition. When the raster data file is loaded afterwards. After the import. 6.. alternatively.1.actix. This is done by selecting Import Clutter Matrix from Raster Image… or Import Clutter Matrix from Planet Raster Image… from the context menu of the Clutter Classes tree item.4. the mapping is simply accomplished such that the first color entry in the palette is assigned clutter class 0. the clutter class indexing must start at 0.

Clutter classes with the (default) black color are shown in a color derived from the standard color palette. 6-12 Clutter matrix configuration dialog Table 6-8 Clutter matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the clutter matrix. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the clutter matrix. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.actix. The newly created clutter layer is entry View shown then in the viewing area by using the colors assigned to each clutter class. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. The expansion of a clutter matrix pixel in South-North direction. the color palette.5. The same result can be obtained by icon (tooltip: Plot Clutter Data) from the views toolbar or by using the menu clicking the Configuration Data Plots Clutter Data. 6-13. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. The expansion of a clutter matrix pixel in West-East direction. www. m m m m # # A surface plot layer can be created from the clutter matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the clutter matrix item. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.com . Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling. An example is given in Fig. The number of rows in the clutter matrix.4 how to adjust these settings.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 120 Fig. The number of columns in the clutter matrix. See section 3. and the alpha blending factor appropriately.

they could also be created in Radioplan. The new matrix is immediately added to the configuration data tree below the corresponding Clutter Classes item.e. if there was one. In order to modify the initially empty matrix.4.com . For this purpose. To do so.1. 6-13 Sample clutter matrix with custom colors 6. The configured pixel resolution is used for both the pixel width and height. 6-14). In the beginning.e. The user can then choose a pixel resolution in the grid settings dialog (see Fig. A valid clutter classes definition is the precondition to specify the clutter matrix. The toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state. polygons) in the new clutter matrix with a certain clutter class with the mouse. It is rectangular and spans the total simulation area. Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i. 6-14 The grid settings dialog is shown prior to creating a matrix to determine the pixel resolution. Otherwise. Fig.1.4. The reason for this is that every clutter region that is drawn must be associated with a clutter class. i.4. You can define own class definitions as described in subsection 6. add a new empty clutter matrix by choosing Add new Matrix from the context menu of the Clutter Classes item in the configuration data tree. the new clutter matrix is totally empty.actix.1. the classes definition is empty. the matrix covers the encompassing rectangle.2.5. In case of an arbitrary polygonal simulation area.6 Defining a New Clutter Matrix If no clutter data are available. The clutter classes definition for the new matrix is retained from the previous matrix. it is filled with zeros only (presumed default clutter class).Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 121 Fig. The resulting matrix settings can be inspected in the matrix configuration dialog as described in subsection 6. www. one has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint context menu of the clutter matrix item.

1. 6-15 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw clutter regions. the new clutter region is shown in the surface plot. (by clicking on The matrix editing mode can be left by disabling the matrix editing icon it).4. simply click the icon again.7 Creating a Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers In cases when the clutter is given in terms of vector layer(s) instead of a raster matrix.and y-direction) can be specified.com . Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify a clutter class that is assigned to the region just drawn.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 122 The matrix editing mode can be temporarily left to use the zoom and pan functions to navigate to the area where the matrix shall be modified.actix. it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. Section 3. and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. It is depicted in Fig. 6-15. As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated. Thus clutter regions can be drawn very quickly.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. see Fig. the chosen clutter matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid. See section 3.5. Also the distance measure mode is available. First the www. the matrix editing mode can also be left by selecting any other drawing icon from the paint toolbar. Fig. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions. Fig.4. 6-16 Clutter class selection dialog After choosing the appropriate clutter class. it is possible to automatically convert those vector layers into a clutter matrix. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. So if the background image is a map. mode or by clicking the 6. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x. In order to switch then back to the actual matrix editing mode. Alternatively. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. 6-16. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. Alternatively. The clutter regions are drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse.

All pixels of the resulting clutter matrix that are not covered by any polygon from the vector layers are filled with clutter class 0 which is assumed being the default class. the conversion can be started by pressing the OK button. The user can select each vector layer individually for inclusion in the clutter matrix creation by checking the according flag. 6-17.4. This function can be invoked from the context menu of the items below the Clutter node in the Configuration tab of the tree window by choosing the entry Create Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers…. 6-18. The dialog with some exemplary settings is shown in Fig.com . 6.actix. 6-18 Clutter matrix creation dialog After having chosen a proper pixel resolution for the clutter matrix. Fig.1. Further. A dialog is opened where all loaded vector layers are shown. In order to avoid undesired erasure. vector file loaded into the Radioplan project) can only define the areas (closed polygons) of a single clutter class.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 123 available vector layers that define the areas of each clutter class must be loaded.e. however. clutter class).e. Further.8 Deleting a Clutter Matrix A clutter matrix can be deleted from the configuration by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. When the conversion is completed. its clutter class definition is retained. When the clutter matrix is deleted. Please note that each vector layer (i. This means that as many vector data files must be loaded as there shall be clutter classes. An example of the Layers tab with 5 loaded vector layers is given in Fig. the size of the created matrix is confined to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area. Then all selected vector layers are processed which is documented by a progress bar on the bottom of the application window. each vector layer can be assigned a clutter index (i. the new clutter matrix is added in the Configuration tab of the tree window. 6-17 Clutter vector layers loaded into the project Then the areas defined by the vector layers can be converted into a clutter matrix. www. Fig. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the clutter matrix.

2. . The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. In a project. the Northwestern corner.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig. The DEM is actually a matrix that contains height values of the ground surface for each matrix pixel. site placement. Alternatively.g. 6-19. One can import • • either a predefined Radioplan DEM matrix.4. North R 1C1 R 2C1 . To import a Radioplan DEM matrix. a tiled matrix can be imported.2 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) The terrain shape of the environment is represented by a digital elevation model (DEM) in Radioplan. The DEM matrix is used to better represent the investigated environment and to provide additional height information for e.. www. it is possible to have several non-overlapping DEM matrices.4. the DEM matrix is imported. Each pixel contains a single value representing a terrain elevation (height).2 Importing a DEM Matrix There are two possibilities to import a DEM matrix.1 DEM Matrix Format The DEM matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. or a georeferenced raster file (see appendix 13. These matrices can be saved to a single larger matrix that then could be reimported..5 for supported file formats).. 6-19 DEM matrix format in Radioplan 6. The covered area of a DEM matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 124 6. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North .actix. The alignment of a DEM matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. an arbitrary raster data file can be imported as DEM matrix. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a DEM configuration file.4. In the latter case. i.. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight..2. 6. R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 . This is done by selecting Import DEM from Raster Image… or Import DEM from Planet Raster Image… from the context menu of the DEM tree item or an existing DEM matrix item.e. select Import DEM Data… from the context menu of the DEM tree item or an existing DEM matrix item.. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog.com .

The number of rows in the DEM matrix. 6. The expansion of a DEM matrix pixel in South-North direction.4. This configuration dialog is shown in Fig. alternatively.actix. there is also the possibility to store them together in a larger raster data file. This coordinate has a West-East alignment. the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area. 6. The usage of the appearing file save dialog is identical to the above description of the single matrix case. the configuration data tree is simultaneously updated such that the new matrix appears beneath the DEM node. 6-20. This function can be invoked by using the Export all DEM to Single Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the DEM node (above the actual DEM matrix items). If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active. The number of columns in the DEM matrix. m m m m # # www.com . the matrix settings parameters are explained in Table 6-9. If several DEM matrices reside in the DEM node of the hierarchical configuration tree that are tiled to form a larger matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected.4 Viewing a DEM Matrix To inspect the DEM matrix settings the user can open the DEM matrix configuration dialog by double-clicking the matrix item in the tree or. The expansion of a DEM matrix pixel in West-East direction.2. Fig. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the DEM matrix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 125 After the import.3 Exporting a DEM Matrix A DEM matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export DEM to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the DEM matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window.2. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.4. choosing Settings… from its context menu. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. 6-20 DEM matrix configuration dialog Table 6-9 DEM matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the DEM matrix.

So it is possible to distinguish e. Parameter values can easily be copied. users are exclusively created on the streets if the according movement model is chosen. 6-21 shows the streets configuration dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking the streets item in the configuration data tree or by selecting Settings… from its context menu.5. The same result can be obtained by clicking the icon (tooltip: Plot DEM Terrain Data) from the views toolbar or by using the menu entry Configuration Data Plots DEM Terrain Data. The newly created DEM layer is View shown then in the viewing area. This scaling factor is multiplied with the elevation values in the DEM matrix. In order to avoid undesired erasure. That is. In the snapshot network simulator. Together they form a street map.actix. the entire DEM matrix can be vertically shifted.4. Streets are organized in street categories. Upon start of a network simulation. the color palette. the streets define corridors where users can move.6.2. the DEM layer. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the DEM matrix. i. Rows in the table could be filtered with respect to arbitrarily chosen field values.4. the height of all streets is z = 0m. 6. If no DEM layer is defined. One can edit the street categories in various ways: • • • • • A new street category can be added.g. A street category can be deleted. The configuration dialog contains a table with all available street categories. An existing street category can be modified. i.3 Streets (for Simulation Only) Generally. Usually there are several streets belonging to a certain category. 6. provided that the street movement model is applied. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-10. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling.4 how to adjust these settings.com . and the alpha blending factor appropriately. Refer to section 6. the streets are situated in the horizontal x-y-plane.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 126 Parameter Description Unit Height Offset Scaling Factor With the help of this offset. the height of the streets follows the terrain profile. different street widths.3.4. www. m — A surface plot layer can be created from the DEM matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the DEM matrix.5 Deleting a DEM Matrix A DEM matrix can be deleted from the configuration by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. the streets of each category are checked for hidden crossings that are not contained in the street map yet.e. A street consists of one or several straight street segments that are combined to a polyline without any forks.e. Generally. the real street map used in a simulation is constructed then with all forks that it might have. See section 3. streets represent geographic data belonging to the network environment. Regarding dynamic network simulations. 6.3 for more details on the available movement models.1 Inspecting Street Data Fig.

A file open dialog appears that lets the user choose the vector data file. one has to enter the streets drawing mode by selecting the icon (tooltip: Add Streets) from the paint toolbar to the left.4.3 Drawing Streets Radioplan offers the possibility to simply edit a street map by drawing streets (i. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog.3. It is filled with the street category by default. — Description Width — m 6. Importing a Radioplan street category is accomplished by selecting Import Streets… from the streets item’s context menu.2 Importing Streets There are two possibilities to import street data. the streets are imported and added to those streets that already exist in the current project.3.com . Alternatively.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 127 Fig.6 for supported file formats). This is a string that is unique in the environment configuration such that it can be distinguished from other street categories. As soon as the www. One can import • • either a Radioplan street category from the library or another project. 6-21 Streets configuration dialog Table 6-10 Street category parameters Parameter Description Unit Category The identifier of the street category. a vector data file containing polylines can be imported as a new streets category by selecting Import Streets from Vector Data… from the streets item’s context menu. White spaces are not allowed. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog. An arbitrary string that describes the street category. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a street configuration file. or a georeferenced vector data file containing street data (see appendix 13. To do so.actix. 6.4. polylines) with the mouse. the vector data are imported and added as new street category to those streets that already exist in the current project. The street width of that street category.e.

it is easy to follow the streets in the map while drawing with the mouse. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x.and y-direction) can be specified. the new street is shown in the surface plot with the predefined width.3. An example of a surface plot with a newly drawn street is shown in Fig. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify a street category that is assigned to the street just drawn.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. 6-22 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw streets. As mentioned before. 6-23. Fig. the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair and a drawing grid is shown in the viewing area (if a surface plot is chosen). Temporarily. if there are no street categories defined previously.com . So it is useful having defined appropriate street categories in the street settings dialog prior to drawing new streets (refer to subsection 6. See section 3. The streets are drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. 6-23 Street category selection dialog After choosing the appropriate street category. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. Thus an accurate street map can be drawn very quickly. one of the available categories can instantly be assigned to it.1). see Fig. it is even possible to draw streets without having defined any street category before. 6-24. a default category ‘Category1’ with a street width of 10m is created automatically which can be chosen for the recently drawn polyline. Fig.2 how to adjust the default grid size in the display settings dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 128 streets drawing mode is activated.4.4. If the street is drawn then. The last vertex of a street is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. Section 3. Then a default category is created automatically. However.actix. www. The default grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. It is depicted in Fig.5. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. 6-22. So if the background image is a map. New streets are always assigned a certain street category.

6-25. Depending on the system technology it can be called RNC or BSC or similar.3. This implies that all streets that belong to the particular street category are removed. The RAN configuration comprises the following items in a topdown order: • Network Controller: In every network configuration.1 Overview The radio access network (RAN) configuration data consist of the hierarchically arranged network architecture data. the whole selected polyline is removed.5 Configuration of the RAN 6. 6-25 Deleting a street (polyline) It is also possible to delete a complete street category in the streets configuration dialog. hit it with the right mouse button. 6. it can comprise some system technology specific hardware parameters. All sites of an investigation scenario belong to the network controller. In order to remove a polyline from the street map. This action is shown in Fig.3.4. Site: A site has a position such that it can be displayed in a surface plot. Cells. After confirming the deletion in the following dialog. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 129 Fig. Refer to subsection 6. a cell has one or more antennas.actix. Furthermore.1 above for details about how to delete a complete street category. there is a single network controller item. 6-24 Street (here: red polyline) drawn in a map. Choose Remove Street from the appearing context menu to delete it. www.4. The network controller can have relevant Radio Resource Management parameters.com • • . repeaters.4 Deleting Streets Streets can be graphically deleted with the mouse pointer when the streets drawing mode is active.5. and additional antennas of different technologies can be placed at a site. Additionally. The color and the alpha blending factor of the streets can be modified in the display settings dialog. 6. Cell: A cell embraces many system technology specific RAN and RRM parameters.

All these configuration data items are explained in more detail in the following sections. Furthermore. Alternatively. 6. Furthermore.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 130 • • Repeater: A repeater has some system technology specific parameters. Creating the network controller from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Network Controller from the context menu of the Network Elements node of the configuration data tree. Note that.5. If there are other subordinate elements in the network configuration like sites and cells. By default the available library items are presented. it can only be created once. or the network controller can be imported from the library. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the network controller. the network controller cannot be deleted. Antennas of the same type with different tilt angles are arranged in antenna families. www. if a completely new network setup is constructed from scratch. There are two opportunities to create the network controller.5. A file open dialog is opened where the desired network controller configuration file can be chosen.3 Exporting the Network Controller The network controller can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Network Controller… from its context menu.2. it can have technology specific parameters. 6.2 Network Controller Settings The technology specific parameters of the network controller configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11. there is exactly one network controller object.5.5. a cell has one or more antennas.2.2. All sites and cells must be deleted first before the network controller can be deleted.actix. the existing one has first to be deleted. If one would like to use another network controller. 6. It is always associated with a donor cell. the creation of a new network controller is only necessary. or to retain it permanently in the library. the network controller object could also be called RNC or BSC or similar. Either a default network controller can be added.com .5.4 Deleting the Network Controller The network controller can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Network Controller from the network controller’s context menu. This is done by selecting Import Network Controller… from the context menu of the Network Elements node of the configuration data tree. Depending on the system technology.2 Network Controller In every Radioplan project. It just serves as the superordinate item of all sites and cells of the network(s). Antenna: There is a pool of antenna templates that can be deployed at the cells. If there is already a network controller in the project then the network controller add/import functions are disabled. according to the hierarchical network architecture. Then the network controller is imported and added to the tree directly beneath the Network Elements. it is possible to import a network controller configuration from the library.1 Creating the Network Controller In general. 6. Since only a single network controller is allowed per network configuration. This function can be used to make the network controller available for other projects. the network controller embodies the topmost level and exists exactly once in a network configuration.2. The new network controller is added then to the tree directly beneath the Network Elements. 6. In order to avoid undesired erasure.

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 131

6.5.3 Site
The site basically defines the site location and some technology specific hardware parameters. Each site can have an arbitrary number of cells or repeaters that each can have a freely configurable positioning offset against the site location. Also, the cells and repeaters can belong to different sytem technologies.

6.5.3.1

Creating a Site

In general, there are two possibilities to create a new site in a network configuration. Either a default site can be added, or a site can be imported from the library. Note that, according to the hierarchical network architecture, all the sites of a network configuration reside below the network controller. Hence it is a precondition that the network controller has already been created. Creating a site from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Site from the superordinate network controller’s context menu. The new site is added then to the tree beneath the network controller. Alternatively, to import a site, select Import Site… from the superordinate network controller’s context menu. If there are already other sites in the network configuration, then the same entry is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired site configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the site is imported and added to the tree beneath the network controller. A further possibility is to graphically place a complete pre-configured site including one or three cells at a given position in a surface plot. To use this function, the Site and Cell Add icon (tooltip Add Sites and Cells) in the paint Mode must be entered by clicking the toolbar to the left. A snapping grid is shown the grid size of which can be adjusted in the icon from the paint toolbar. Then to set the site, click the known manner by clicking the right mouse button at a position in a surface plot where a site with cells shall be added. A context menu will pop up. Choose Add Site + 1 Cell or Add Site + 3 Cells from this context menu to insert a new site with the respective number of cells at the closest grid vertex. Both the site and the cell(s) are initialized with default values. The site is visualized as a small black circle that the cells are attached to (if the cells are not offset from the site position). Note that no antenna template has been referenced in the cell(s) yet, hence the cells are shown as orange arrows, see Fig. 6-26.

Fig. 6-26 A new site with three cells (without antennas) added in the Site and Cell Add Mode

6.5.3.2

Exporting a Site

A site can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Site… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the site available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.5.3.3

Duplicating a Site

Usually, a network configuration in an investigation scenario contains a larger number of sites. These sites typically differ in only very few parameters (as, e.g., the IDs and positions). For this reason the opportunity is provided to duplicate an existing site. Then the parameter changes are quickly made. So it is not necessary to import all the sites of the network configuration from the library.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 132

To duplicate a site, choose Duplicate Site from an existing site’s context menu. A new site with the same name, amended by “(Copy)” is added then to the hierarchical network configuration tree on the same level as the existing one. By opening the configuration dialog of the new site its parameters can be modified as appropriate. This is explained in section 6.5.3.5.

6.5.3.4

Moving a Site

In the Site and Cell Add Mode ( icon in the paint toolbar), the position of a site can easily be changed with the mouse in a surface plot. To initiate this function, select Move Site… from the site’s context menu in a surface plot. Then the mouse pointer is turned into a symbol. Click the left mouse button at the desired site position. After an affirmation dialog the site is placed at the new position with respect to the current snapping grid. All pathloss matrices that are linked to that site (either at the site directly or at its cells) must be moved manually, if appropriate.
Caution! Possibly existing pathloss matrices associated with the moved site should only be moved, if their pathloss data is independent of the surroundings. In realistic environments with many irregular obstacles in the propagation channel this is usually not the case. Thus the move function for sites should be used with care. In general, associated pathloss matrices must be recalculated in a radio propagation prediction tool.

6.5.3.5

Access to Site Settings

The configuration data of a site can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective site’s context menu (by rightclicking the site item) or double-click the site item in the tree, alternatively. Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a site symbol in the viewing area to display the site configuration dialog by choosing Site Settings… from a site’s context menu. Then the site configuration dialog is opened. The technology specific parameters of the site configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11. Here only the general parameters are discussed.

6.5.3.6

General Site Settings

The General tab of the site configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-27. Refer to Table 6-11 for a description of the general site parameters.
Table 6-11 General site parameters

Parameter

Description

Unit

ID

The identifier of the site. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other sites. An arbitrary string that describes the site.

Description
Position

X Y Longitude Latitude

The x-coordinate of the site. This coordinate has a WestEast alignment. The y-coordinate of the site. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. The longitude of the site position. This is only displayed if a display coordinated system is chosen. The latitude of the site position. This is only displayed if a display coordinated system is chosen.

m m °’” °’”

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 133

Parameter

Description

Unit

Altitude

The absolute altitude of the ground at the site position. This value should be set to the height of the DEM matrix at the site position.

m

Optimization

Is Reconfigurable

If this flag is set, the cells at this site are reconfigurable by optimization.
Network Optimization Module only

Is Removable during Site Selection Lock Angle between Cells during Azimuth Optimization Rollout Status

If this flag is set, this site is removable by Site Selection.
Network Optimization Module only

If this flag is set, the azimuth of all cells at this site would be changed by the same offset. This means that a three-sectored site would be treated like a fixed “star” and twisted as a whole during azimuth optimization.
Network Optimization Module only

The rollout status of the site. Different pre-defined values can be selected from the list field. These values can be used for prioritization during Site Selection
Network Optimization Module only

Site Candidate Group

For group site selection [R-ACP], the site can be assigned to one of 10 candidate groups. All sites assigned to the same candidate group are regarded as candidates for one site position.
Network Optimization Module only

Fig. 6-27 General tab of the site configuration dialog

Almost each tab of the site configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all its parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when a site is created with the context menu entry Add Site at the network controller item in the configuration data tree.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 134

6.5.3.7

Additional Site Status Info

A site can be assigned additional information in a separate tab of the site configuration dialog. Fig. 6-28 shows the Status Info tab of the site configuration dialog. These 10 additional database fields can be freely used, e.g. for status information.

Fig. 6-28 Status Info tab of the site configuration dialog

6.5.3.8

Site Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all sites together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Current Project Site Settings, refer to Fig. 6-29. Alternatively, one can select Settings Overview… from an arbitrary site’s context menu to open this dialog. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the site settings.

Fig. 6-29 Site settings overview

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 135

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the site configurations. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:

• • • • •

A parameter can simply be displayed in a cell visual by using the context menu item Visualize. Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the upper left part Individual parameter values can be changed. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of sites in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function).

Export to or Update from File

As for all overview settings tables in Radioplan, the contents of the entire Site Settings Overview table including the column headers can be exported to a tab-delimited text file by selecting Export to File… from the context menu on the table grid, refer to Fig. 6-29.

Fig. 6-30 Export to File… in the context menu of the Site settings overview

Likewise, the -visible- table contents can also be updated – completely or partially – by imported data. By selecting Update from File… from the context menu on the table grid, those values are overwritten by the loaded data, for which the table key (here: “ID”) and the column header is found in the loaded tab-delimited text file. The text file may contain the columns and the rows of the Settings Overview table in an arbitrary order and it may also contain only a subset of them. Only the column with the table key (here: “ID”) is mandatory.
How to selectively modify a network configuration

This example shall explain how to exploit the filter functions and the copy/fill functions in table grids to change a configuration parameter in a well determined subset of sites using the settings overview dialog. The same basic mechanisms can also be applied in the other settings overview dialogs, of course. It shall be demonstrated how to change the DL capacity credit in all those sites that have an altitude different from 113m. First, display the site settings overview dialog as described above. Scroll down until you find a site with an altitude (terrain level) equal to 113m. Click into this field with the right mouse button to show the table grid context menu and choose the entry Set Filter. Then all those sites are excluded from the settings overview that have an altitude different from 113m.
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 136

To get a presentation of the sites that have an altitude different from 113m, the table grid filter must be inverted by selecting Invert Filter from the context menu. Then all the desired sites are shown in the settings overview dialog. Now let us set the DL capacity credit to 1280. Choose “Hardware” from the Quick Jump menu in the upper left corner. Then select the topmost field in the Capacity Credit DL column and type ‘1280’. Then select the complete column by clicking on the corresponding headline field and press <Ctrl-D> to copy the first value in the selection to the other selected fields of the column. Alternatively, you could choose Fill Down from the table grid context menu after the column was selected. Then the new setting ‘1280’ will be copied to all other sites that match the above stated condition.

Select column

<Ctrl-D>

If the table grid filter is removed then by selecting Remove Filter from the context menu, all sites are shown in the settings overview dialog again. You will notice that the DL capacity credit of the sites with 113m altitude has not been changed as was demanded. The Site and Cell Configuration Mode offers yet another possibility to display a selection of icon (tooltip Configure sites in a settings overview dialog. Enter the mode by clicking the Sites or Cells) in the paint toolbar. The mouse pointer automatically turns into a cross-hair. To graphically select sites for editing their parameters, just draw a polygon around those sites, vertex by vertex. The final vertex is set with a double click. Then all sites enclosed in the polygon are shown in a settings overview dialog similar to Fig. 6-29. See also section 6.5.4.6 for more information in using the Site and Cell Configuration Mode to open overview dialogs of cell settings.

6.5.3.9

Finding a Site

In larger projects, there is usually a considerable number of sites, and it is not easy to quickly associate a site item in the configuration data tree with its graphical representation in a surface plot. Thus there is a function to easily localize the position of a site in a surface plot from its item in the configuration data tree by using the context menu entry Find in Map. Then the surface plot is shifted such that the associated site is exactly in the center of the current view. Furthermore, it is highlighted by cell grippers for identification. See Fig. 6-31 for an example of a highlighted site in a map.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 137

Fig. 6-31 A highlighted site in a map

6.5.3.10 Controlling Sites’ Visibility
In huge network scenarios with thousands of sites it might be useful to filter the visible sites in the tree window to those located inside the simulation area. Then the access to the relevant sites is more structured. This filter option can be switched on by using the entry Filter Sites located inside Simulation Area from a site’s or the Network Elements node’s icon at the context menu. The status of limited site visibility is indicated by a special Network Elements node in the hierarchical configuration data tree of the Configuration tab. In order to show the complete site data in the tree window again, just click the same entry in the site’s or the Network Elements node’s context menu anew. Note that this option has no influence on the visibility of the sites in a surface plot – they are always completely shown. In multi-technology networks, there is another option to control the visibility of the various network layers. By using the icon (tooltip Show only Active Layers) from the views toolbar, only those sites having cells that belong to the currently active network layer(s) are set visible; all other sites disappear. The site visibility pertains both the sites shown in the tree window to the left as well as in the viewing area. If the network layer filter flag is icon at the Network Elements node in the set, this status is also indicated by the special tree window.

6.5.3.11 Deleting a Site
A site can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Site from that particular site’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the site. If there are other subordinate elements in the network configuration such as cells, repeaters, and pathloss matrices, they are also deleted together with their site.

6.5.4 Cell
In Radioplan, a cell is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a site. All cells (and repeaters) at one site can belong to different sytem technologies. The association of a cell with a technology is determined by the network layer that the cell is assigned to. The network layer is mainly defined by the system technology, a carrier frequency, and an HCS identifier. In hierarchical multi-frequency network structures, cells belonging to different hierarchical network layers can operate on different frequencies. See section 5.2.1 on the definition of network layers. A cell must have at least one antenna. In case of additional antennas at a cell, those antennas can have individual position offsets. Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix. See section 6.5.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells, repeaters, and additional antennas.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 138

6.5.4.1

Creating a Cell

It is possible to either create a new cell with default settings or to import a cell configuration from the library or another project. According to the hierarchical network architecture, a cell is always subordinate to a site in the network configuration. Hence, it can only be created if there is at least one site in the network. A new cell will automatically be assigned to the currently active network layer. So before a new cell is created, the desired network layer must be activated in the combo box of the views toolbar. In case of multiple network layers, the new cell would be assigned to the first network layer in the network layer management dialog.
Remember! Make sure to activate the right network layer before a new cell is created.

Creating a cell from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Cell from the superordinate site’s context menu. The new cell is added then to the tree directly beneath the according site. Alternatively, to import a cell from the library, select Import Cell… from the superordinate site’s context menu. If there are already other cells in the network configuration, then the same entry is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired cell configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the cell is imported and added to the tree directly beneath the according site. A possibility to add a complete site with several cells in one step is described in section icon in the paint toolbar) must 6.5.3.1. To use this function, the Site and Cell Add Mode ( be entered. Usually, a newly created cell has not yet been assigned an antenna. Initially, such a cell is symbolized by an orange arrow pointing towards the direction of the cell sector. As soon as an antenna is referenced in the cell, the arrow is replaced by a black arrow, refer to Fig. 6-32. Please, also consider the site symbol visualization as configured in the display settings dialog, refer to section 3.5.2.

Fig. 6-32 Cell symbol without any antenna (left) and with an assigned antenna (right)

6.5.4.2

Exporting a Cell

A cell can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Cell… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the cell available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.5.4.3

Access to Cell Settings

The configuration data of a cell can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective cell’s context menu (by rightclicking the cell item) or double-click the cell item in the tree, alternatively. There is yet another way to conveniently access the cell settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area. By double-clicking a cell symbol (arrow or antenna pattern), the respective cell symbol in the viewing area and the according cell item in the tree window are highlighted, and its cell configuration dialog is opened. This action is visualized in Fig. 6-33.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 139

Fig. 6-33 Opening the cell configuration dialog directly from a cell symbol

Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a cell symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the cell configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the cell’s context menu. The technology specific parameters of the cell configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.

6.5.4.4

General Cell Settings

The General tab of the cell configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-34. Refer to Table 6-12 for a description of the general parameters.

Fig. 6-34 General tab of the cell configuration dialog Table 6-12 General cell parameters

Parameter

Description

Unit

ID

The identifier of the cell. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other cells. An arbitrary string that describes the cell. The network layer that this cell belongs to. The user can choose among all defined network layers from a combo box.

Description Network Layer

— —

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 140

Parameter Antenna

Description

Unit

Pattern

The antenna assigned to this cell. In this list field, one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this cell. A mouse click on the button to the right leads directly to the antenna configuration dialog of the selected pattern. The horizontal orientation of this cell’s antenna (azimuth). The vertical orientation of this cell’s antenna (mechanical downtilt). The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used. The additional electrical tilt of this cell’s antenna. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt, and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available.

Azimuth Mechanical Tilt

° °

Additional Electrical Tilt

°

Position

Height over Ground Offset from Site (X) Offset from Site (Y)

The height of the cell antenna over ground. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site. The position offset of the cell’s antenna in x-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location. The position offset of the cell’s antenna in y-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m

m m

Hardware Properties

Cable Loss DL

A compound Tx loss characterizing the link between the amplifier and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain. A compound Rx loss characterizing the link between the amplifier and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain. The noise figure of the receiver at this cell.

dB

Cable Loss UL

dB

Noise Figure
Color

dB

Color for cell area plots

The color to be used for presentations of this cell in best cell area plots. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette.

Transmitter

Activated

A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this cell are transmitting or not. For GSM and iDEN cells the transmitters flags are in a separated tab Transmitters (see sections 9.3.2 and 10.3.2).

Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when a cell is created with the context menu entry Add Cell at the according site item in the configuration data tree.

www.actix.com

They can be added by editing the fields as well as by pasting a 2-column table via clipboard into the table grid.6. 6-35. Fig. custom parameters can be removed by deleting them from the table in the Custom Parameters tab.5 Cell Custom Parameters The Custom Parameters tab of the cell configuration dialog is shown in Fig. Only the settings of those cells are shown that belong to the same system technology as the cell where the function was invoked.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 141 6. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the cell settings.4. 6-36. It lists parameters. For removing a custom parameter for many or all cells together.5. refer to Fig.5.6 Cell Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all cells together. Alternatively. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from a certain cell’s context menu. which have been defined for a cell in addition to the standard Radioplan parameters for the technology of this cell. 6. Likewise.4. 6-35 Example for the Custom Parameters tab of the cell configuration dialog Typically.actix. www.4.5. see on the Cell Settings Overview dialog in section 6. a new custom parameter can also be defined by the user by adding parameter name and value pairs to the table grid in Radioplan. custom parameters may be imported by customer-specific plugins for the import of radio network planning tool data or measurement data.

Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the upper left part Individual parameter values can be changed. Remember: Hold down the <Shift> key in the Site and Cell Configuration Mode to open a technology independent overview dialog of the cell settings. Enter the mode by clicking the Sites or Cells) in the paint toolbar to the left. The final vertex is set with a double click.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 142 Fig. 6-36. 6-36 Cell settings overview Besides the practical overview. vertex by vertex. This function Current Project Cell Settings. This general overview also contains the settings of repeaters and additional antennas.actix. The Site and Cell Configuration Mode offers yet another possibility to display a selection of icon (tooltip Configure cells in a settings overview dialog. The mouse pointer automatically turns into a cross-hair. www. this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the cell configurations. just hold down the <Shift> key and draw a polygon around the corresponding sites with the desired cells. one can select the entry Cell Settings Overview… from the context menu of an arbitrary site. can be invoked by choosing the menu entry File Alternatively. but it only contains technology independent parameters such as the antenna position and orientation. Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function). Then all cells enclosed by the polygon are shown in a settings overview dialog similar to Fig. It is also possible to create a technology independent cell settings overview. In particular. Then a similar overview dialog as shown in Fig. To select certain cells for parameter configuration. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of cells in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). 6-36 is opened. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of some context menu functions. the following actions can be performed in the table: • • • • • A parameter can simply be displayed in a cell visual by using the context menu item Visualize.

Then a dialog in the shape of Fig. 6-37. are listed in additional columns at the right end of the table. In order to completely remove a custom parameter from all cells listed in the Overview dialog. This transmitter settings overview dialog is available by selecting Transmitter Overview… from a cell’s context menu. Export to or Update from File As for all overview settings tables in Radioplan. 6-29 in section 6. 6. Consequently. for which the table key (here: “ID”) and the column header is found in the loaded tab-delimited text file.5.3.actix.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 143 All custom parameters that are defined at least for one cell in the Overview dialog. the -visible. The text file may contain the columns and the rows of the Settings Overview table in an arbitrary order and it may also contain only a subset of them.7 Transmitter Settings Overview For GSM and iDEN there is another overview table that shows the transmitter settings of all cells.table contents can also be updated – completely or partially – by imported data. select New Parameter… from the context menu on the table grid and specify the parameter key to be used as column header. a new column is added to the table. select Delete Parameter… from the context menu on the table grid of the column to be removed.8). Fig. those values are overwritten by the loaded data. By selecting Update from File… from the context menu on the table grid. highlighted in orange. the contents of the entire Cell Settings Overview table including the column headers can be exported to a tab-delimited text file by selecting Export to File… from the context menu on the table grid (see Fig. refer to Fig. 6-38 is opened. Likewise. 6-37 Cell settings overview detail with custom parameters In order to add a new parameter. Fig. Only the column with the table key (here: “ID”) is mandatory.4. 6-38 Transmitter settings overview www.com .

These two different active flags are configured as follows: The cell active flag is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan.8 Finding a Cell In larger projects.4. 6-39. www. To this end.6 above. 6-40. 6. Furthermore. its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area.5. it does not exist in the network plan any more. the name of the cell just needs to be entered in the cell search toolbar on the upper right of the application window. A cell can further be localized in the surface plot from its item in the configuration data tree by using the context menu entry Find in Map. If a cell is switched off. the cell is already displayed as transmitter disabled.4. Also the usual edit and filter functions are available in this table as described in section 6. Furthermore. it is highlighted by cell grippers for identification. Fig. see Fig.actix. An exemplary site with one disabled transmitter is shown in Fig.5. Nevertheless.5.4.4. there is usually a considerable number of sites and cells. In order to quickly find a cell in the network plan and/or associate it with its item in the configuration data tree. refer to Fig. 6. Fig. Once the symbol in the viewing area is highlighted by grippers and the respective cell item in the data tree is selected.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 144 The data in this overview table contains the same items as the Transmitter tab of every GSM or iDEN cell. a cell has at least one transmitter that can be active or not. the transmitter flags of all TRXs are toggled. one can also use the cell lookup function of this toolbar by pulling down the icon is pressed. 6-39 Quick Search toolbar for cell names Alternatively. both the cell list field and selecting the corresponding cell. the user can quickly search for a cell by name. By the Transmitter Active context menu entry of such a cell. it can be configured by the according parameter in the cell configuration dialog as apparent from section 6. if at least the BCCH transmitter is disabled. For GSM and iDEN cells each TRX has a transmitter flag.4. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the cell. Then the surface plot is shifted such that the associated site is exactly in the center of the current view.5. depending on whether it is on air or not. Alternatively. 6-40 Checkbox to toggle the existence of a cell in the network plan In contrast to that.com . a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. 6-41.9 Active Flag of Cells and Transmitters Each cell has an active flag that determines whether the cell exists in the network plan or not.

it is possible to drag the cell with the mouse to the destination site with a simple drag&drop action. Then drag the cell item to the destination site and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination site’s item appears selected. Then the parameter changes are quickly made. It is always connected to a donor cell. In order to realize this. In order to avoid undesired erasure. thus. These cells typically differ in only very few parameters (as.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 145 Fig. 6-42. The connection to its donor cell is symbolized by a dashed line between the repeater and the donor cell in the viewing area as shown in Fig. Fig. 6.5. www.10 Duplicating and Dragging a Cell Usually.4. dashed arrow) at a cell 6.5. a network configuration that is to be investigated contains a larger amount of cells that are distributed over the sites. e.4.actix. A new cell is added then to the hierarchical network configuration data tree on the same level as the existing one. So it is not necessary to import all the cells of the network configuration from the library. the superordinate site is not allowed to have a pathloss matrix. To duplicate a cell. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the cell. See section 6.g. A repeater must have exactly one antenna. at the same site. Alternatively.5..com . The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved cell is now shown at the destination site.5. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. choose Duplicate Cell from an existing cell’s context menu. and additional antennas. If this is the case. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. For this reason the opportunity is provided to duplicate an existing cell. repeaters.e. parameters from already configured cells could easily be copied to the new cell as explained in the previous subsection. i. 6-42 A repeater (left) associated with its donor cell Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix.5 Repeater In Radioplan.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells. or duplicated) available at another site. By opening the settings dialog of the new cell its parameters can be modified as appropriate.11 Deleting a Cell A cell can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Cell from that particular cell’s context menu. 6-41 A disabled transmitter (red crossed. Often it is desired to have a newly created cell (be it created with default settings. a repeater is a system technology specific element. imported from the library. Just left-click on the cell icon in the configuration data tree to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. the IDs and antenna directions). 6. It can have an individual position offset from the parent site position.

Fig.5. 6-44 Opening the repeater configuration dialog directly from a repeater symbol Also. the respective repeater symbol in the viewing area and the according repeater item in the tree window are highlighted. see Fig. There is yet another way to conveniently access the repeater settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area. the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a repeater symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the repeater configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the repeater’s context menu. This action is visualized in Fig. The description of the general parameters is repeated here for convenience.actix.5. i. alternatively. and its repeater configuration dialog is opened. 6-45.5.6. 6.1 Adding a Repeater It is possible to add a new repeater and associate it with its designated donor cell. By double-clicking a repeater symbol (arrow or antenna pattern). refer to Table 6-13. a repeater is always attached to a site. This site need not necessarily be the same as the site where the associated donor cell is attached. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective repeater’s context menu (by right-clicking the repeater item) or double-click the repeater item in the tree. 6-43. 6-44.5. the donor “cell” of a repeater can be another repeater. The item of the new repeater is shown below the site item in the tree window where it was created.com .2 Access to Repeater Settings The configuration data of a repeater can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. The new repeater will inherit the network layer and most parameters from its donor cell. www. it can only be created if there is at least one cell in the network. Creating a repeater from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Repeater from the designated donor cell’s context menu. It is similar to the general cell settings.5. According to the hierarchical network architecture.5.3 General Repeater Settings The General tab of the repeater configuration dialog is shown in Fig. Fig. 6-43 A repeater attached to a site in the hierarchical configuration data tree structure Also cascaded repeaters are supported. Since a repeater is always associated with a donor cell.5.5. The technology specific parameters of the repeater configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.e. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 146 6. It is also possible to move the repeater to another site by a drag and drop action as described in subsection 6. The new repeater is added then to the tree directly at the site of the donor cell.

The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used. It could only be changed in the donor cell itself. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site. The network layer that this repeater’s donor cell belongs to. The vertical orientation of this repeater’s antenna (mechanical downtilt). In this list field. m Offset from Site (X) m www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 147 Fig.com . The additional electrical tilt of this repeater’s antenna.actix. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other repeaters. The position offset of the repeater’s antenna in xdirection in relation to the superordinate site’s location. The horizontal orientation of this repeater’s antenna (azimuth). An arbitrary string that describes the repeater. one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this repeater. — Description Network Layer Antenna — — Pattern The antenna assigned to this repeater. — Azimuth Mechanical Tilt ° ° Additional Electrical Tilt ° Position Height over Ground The height of the repeater antenna over ground. 6-45 General tab of the repeater configuration dialog Table 6-13 General repeater parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the repeater. and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt.

Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette. The same pre-defined settings are used when a repeater is created with the context menu entry Add Repeater at the according cell item in the configuration data tree. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the repeater settings. 6. It looks and works similar to the cell settings overview dialog.5. Furthermore. Positive value stand for a real loss. — — Each tab of the repeater configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.5.4.5.com . — Donor Cell Connection Type The donor cell can be selected from the pulldown list that contains all cells of the respective network layer.5 Switching Repeaters On/Off Each repeater has an active flag that determines whether the repeater exists in the network plan or not.actix.6. These two different active flags are configured as follows: The repeater active flag is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan. m Hardware Properties Cable Loss DL A compound loss characterizing the link between the repeater and the antenna. 6-36 in section 6. 6. Possible values are ‘radio’. etc.5. see Fig. negative values would mean a gain. including cable loss. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary repeater’s context menu. www. and ‘microwave’.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 148 Parameter Description Unit Offset from Site (Y) The position offset of the repeater’s antenna in ydirection in relation to the superordinate site’s location. dB Color Color for cell area plots The color to be used for presentations of this repeater in best cell area plots.4 Repeater Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all repeaters together. its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area. If a repeater is switched off. it does not exist in the network plan any more. antenna coupling loss. — Transmitter Activated Donor Cell A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this repeater are transmitting or not. 6-46. depending on whether it is on air or not. see Fig. ‘fiber’. a repeater has at least one transmitter that can be active or not.5. The type of connection between the donor cell and the repeater.

3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 149 Fig. all other antennas are modeled by additional antennas.5.5.5. It can have an individual position offset from the parent site position. an additional antenna is a system technology specific element. An additional antenna always inherits the same network layer and.5. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved repeater is now shown at the new site. template) which is described in section 6. The donor cell can be modified in the repeater settings dialog as described in section 6. In this case.actix.com . Just left-click on the repeater icon in the configuration data tree to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down.5. thus. and additional antennas. it can be configured by the according parameter in the repeater configuration dialog as apparent from section 6.5. An additional antenna must have exactly one antenna.9.6 Additional Antenna In Radioplan. If this is the case.5. Dragging a repeater to another site does not change the association to its donor cell. there is one antenna pattern directly assigned to the cell.5. See section 6. Hence. it can only be created if there is at least one cell in the www. the superordinate site is not allowed to have a pathloss matrix.5.6. An additional antenna should not be mixed up with a normal antenna pattern (i. repeaters. an additional antenna is always subordinate to its cell in the network configuration. the same sytem technology as the donor cell.5. 6-46 Checkbox to toggle the existence of a repeater in the network plan In contrast to that. a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the repeater.6 Dragging a Repeater Often it is desired to have a newly created repeater be located at another site. 6.3. It is always connected to a cell that in turn must have a (main) antenna.1 Adding an Additional Antenna at a Cell It is possible to add a new additional antenna at its designated donor cell. 6.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells. 6. Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the repeater.5. 6.7 Deleting a Repeater A repeater can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete from that particular repeater’s context menu. In order to realize this. In order to avoid undesired erasure. According to the hierarchical network architecture.5. Alternatively. An additional antenna is used in Radioplan to model the case that a cell has several antenna patterns. Then drag the repeater item to the destination site and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination site’s item appears selected.e. it is possible to drag the repeater with the mouse to the destination site with a simple drag and drop action.

alternatively. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective additional antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) or double-click the additional antenna item in the tree.5.6. The item of the new additional antenna is shown below the cell item in the tree window. 6-47. This action is visualized in Fig.5. There is yet another way to conveniently access the additional antenna settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area. The description of the general parameters is repeated here for convenience. www. and its additional antenna configuration dialog is opened.actix. Fig. 6-48 Opening the additional antenna configuration dialog directly from an additional antenna symbol Also. 6-48. see Fig. refer to Table 6-14.2 Access to Additional Antenna Settings The configuration data of an additional antenna can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. the right mouse button can be clicked directly above an additional antenna symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the additional antenna configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the additional antenna’s context menu. 6. The technology specific parameters of the additional antenna configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11. The new additional antenna will inherit the network layer and most parameters from its cell. Fig. It is similar to the general cell settings.com . 6. 6-47 An additional antenna with its cell in the hierarchical configuration data tree structure Creating an additional antenna from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Additional Antenna from the designated cell’s context menu. By double-clicking an additional antenna symbol (arrow or antenna pattern). The new additional antenna is added then to the tree directly beneath the according cell. 6-49. the respective additional antenna symbol in the viewing area and the according additional antenna item in the tree window are highlighted.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 150 network.3 General Settings of an Additional Antenna The General tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog is shown in Fig.6.

The network layer that this additional antenna’s donor cell belongs to. — Azimuth Mechanical Tilt ° ° Additional Electrical Tilt ° Position Height over Ground The height of the additional antenna over ground. m Offset from Site (X) m www. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site. The additional electrical tilt of this additional antenna.com . The vertical orientation of this additional antenna (mechanical downtilt). This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other additional antennas. The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 151 Fig.actix. It could only be changed in the donor cell itself. 6-49 General tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog Table 6-14 General additional antenna parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the additional antenna. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt. — Description Network Layer — — Antenna Pattern The antenna (pattern) assigned to this additional antenna. An arbitrary string that describes the additional antenna. and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available. In this list field. The position offset of the additional antenna in x-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location. one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this additional antenna. The horizontal orientation of this additional antenna (azimuth).

6-36 in section 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 152 Parameter Description Unit Offset from Site (Y) The position offset of the additional antenna in y-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.actix. 6. — Transmitter Activated A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this additional antenna are transmitting or not.5.6.6. It looks and works similar to the cell settings overview dialog. dB Color Color for cell area plots The color to be used for presentations of this additional antenna in best cell area plots.4 Additional Antenna Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all additional antennas together. 6.5. 6-50 Checkbox to toggle the existence of an additional antenna in the network plan In contrast to that. These two different active flags are configured as follows: The active flag of the additional antenna is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan. see Fig.4. a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. If an additional antenna is switched off. it can be configured by the according parameter in the additional antenna configuration dialog as apparent from section 6.6. The same pre-defined settings are used when an additional antenna is created with the context menu entry Add Additional Antenna at the according cell item in the configuration data tree. www. etc.5. m Hardware Properties Cable Loss DL A compound loss characterizing the link between the donor cell and the antenna. its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area.6. — Each tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.5. an additional antenna has at least one transmitter that can be active or not. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the additional antenna settings. Fig. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary additional antenna’s context menu. Furthermore. it does not exist in the network plan any more. depending on whether it is on air or not. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the additional antenna. 6-50. including cable loss. Positive value stand for a real loss. see Fig. antenna coupling loss.com . Alternatively.5 Switching Additional Antennas On/Off Each additional antenna has an active flag that determines whether the additional antenna exists in the network plan or not.3. negative values would mean a gain.

6.e. be exchanged against another cell) by editing the according parameter in the list.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 153 6. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the additional antenna. An exemplary view of this dialog is shown in Fig.actix. and then pressing the <Delete> key. Then for each cell a separate graphics layer is created that would be reused when the neighbor list display of a cell is updated. Then the other fields of the line (Priority. 6. 6-52. These neighbor lists are configured in a separate dialog that can be opened by using the entry Neighbor Lists… from a cell’s context menu. 6-51.7 Neighbor Lists Each cell can have a list of neighbor cells for intra-frequency.com . Network Layer) have to be added.5. In order to avoid undesired erasure.g. An example of the graphical presentation of the neighbor lists of a cell is given in Fig. An existing neighbor cell can be modified (i. Exclusive Relation flag. The usual filter function in the table grid can be applied to e. and intersystem handover – depending on the network layer of the related cell. inter-frequency. www. • • • Neighbor cell relations can be displayed graphically for each cell by using the function Show Neighbor List from that cell’s context menu. All generated graphics layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window. restrict the visibility of neighbor relations to those of a particular network layer. 6-51 Neighbor list configuration dialog The lists can be easily configured in the following ways: • A new neighbor cell can be appended at the end of the list by clicking into the last (empty) field and selecting a cell out of the appearing dropdown list.6 Deleting an Additional Antenna An additional antenna can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete from that particular additional antenna’s context menu.5. Fig. A neighbor cell can be deleted from the list by clicking the field left of the cell to be deleted.

This is done by selecting Import Pathloss Matrix from Raster Image… from the context menu of a cell. www. Usually a pathloss matrix is assigned to a cell. only a single pathloss matrix per cell. the attribution of color values to pathloss values is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette. in order to work with the network model. a repeater. or additional antenna is allowed. a pathloss matrix contains the pure pathloss from the radiation point to each pixel. Alternatively. It contains pathloss values. 6. or an additional antenna item. from the respective radiation point (i.e.e. a repeater. position of an antenna) to each pixel in the matrix. the influence of the particular antenna pattern at the respective cell is overlaid to obtain the resulting coverage. or an additional antenna.1 Importing a Pathloss Matrix A pathloss matrix can be imported from the library by clicking Import Pathloss Matrix… from a cell’s. a pathloss matrix stored in a georeferenced raster data file can be imported. The Neighbor Lists Automatic function can be called by choosing the menu entry Tools Update…. A detailed description of this feature can be found in [R-ANP]. to perform any kind of network simulation or analysis. 6-52 Graphical presentation of the neighbor list of a cell A method to automatically allocate or amend cell neighbor lists is included in Radioplan. isotropic antennas are assumed. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding network element. i. In case of a TIFF file. It is based both on planning data (pathloss predictions) and drive test measurements. arranged in regular pixels.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 154 Fig. A file open dialog appears where the user can specify the desired pathloss matrix. Afterwards. However. Such pathloss matrices can be imported into Radioplan and are handled in the same way as in the planning tool. 6.8.5. It is even possible to import more than one pathloss matrix that can be held temporarily at a cell.actix. Some prediction models in radio network planning tools calculate the radio propagation in the short range area around a site with a comparatively higher accuracy and finer resolution than in the surrounding long range area. Radioplan supports multi-resolution pathloss matrices. a repeater’s or an additional antenna’s context menu.5. In Radioplan.8 Pathloss Matrix A pathloss matrix represents the radio propagation conditions with respect to a specific cell/antenna location. repeater.com .

. Fig. Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a pathloss value in dB.5. dimension. the Northwestern corner..8.com . North R1C1 R2C1 . The width and height of the pixels of both matrices are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. 6-54 Pathloss matrix configuration dialog www. These parameters are summarized in the pathloss matrix configuration dialog. In the area of the HiRes part. R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 . and grid size for both matrix parts. This dialog is shown in Fig. 6-53. The alignment of the pathloss matrices is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. 6-54.5.. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) (optional) HiRes Part PixelHeight LowRes LowRes Part RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth LowRes South = North .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 155 6.e. the pixels of the LowRes part are exchanged.. . It consists of two rectangular grids made up of pixels positioned in the horizontal x-y-plane. 6-53 Pathloss matrix format 6.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-15. The smaller of the matrices with the short range part (HiRes part) has typically a finer resolution than the larger long range part (LowRes part).2 Pathloss Matrix Format The pathloss matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig.8. i.3 Inspecting the Settings of a Pathloss Matrix The configuration parameters of a pathloss matrix are basically its positioning.actix.. It can be viewed by choosing Settings… from the matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking on the pathloss matrix item in the configuration tree.. The covered area of a pathloss matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns for the long range part.

6-55 Pathloss matrix settings overview In addition to the settings of a single pathloss matrix. Besides the practical overview. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. refer to Fig. 6-55. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the pathloss settings. In particular.8.actix. m m m m # # Whether a pathloss matrix is tuned. This coordinate has a West-East alignment. the following actions can be performed in the table: • • Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the lower left part Mark table fields and copy their content to other tables and applications via the clipboard www. Fig. can be identified in the Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. the HighRes part of the pathloss matrices are tuned or not. it is Current Project possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Pathloss Settings. this dialog offers the possibility to quickly work with the pathloss configurations. The expansion of a pathloss matrix pixel in South-North direction. Alternatively.4 Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of all pathloss matrices used in the project together. The number of rows in the pathloss matrix. The number of columns in the pathloss matrix. 6. if available. the user can select Settings Overview… from a certain pathloss matrix’s context menu. this overview dialog also indicates whether the LowRes part and. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the pathloss matrix. The expansion of a pathloss matrix pixel in West-East direction.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 156 Table 6-15 Pathloss matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit Resolution Low/High West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the pathloss matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.com .

actix. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 157 • • • Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of some context menu functions. best serving cell areas . Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i. best . Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling. 6-56 shows a typical plot of the pathloss for a single cell.g. Moreover. and the alpha blending factor appropriately.com . one www. For example. 6.4 how to adjust these settings. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the pathloss matrices. the color palette. In order to modify a pathloss matrix. this way a certain area could be excluded from any consideration by assigning it a very high pathloss (e. More plots are interference ratio available from the View Configuration Data Plots submenu. The matrices are deleted when the overview dialog is closed by pressing the OK button. Antenna Diagrams from the cell’s context menu (by right-clicking on the cell item). 255dB). In order to avoid undesired erasure. 6-56 Sample plot of the pathloss including antenna for a single cell Besides viewing a single pathloss matrix.5. Highlight a site/cell in the viewing area that belongs to the currently selected line in the table by clicking the Find selected Site button Delete several pathloss matrices in one step by selecting the according checkboxes in the Mark for Delete column.5.5.8. 6. This option is chosen by selecting the entry Show Pathloss incl. it is also possible to create composite layers for the entire network based on the pathloss matrices. Inactive sites / cells are not considered during the creation of these layers. Layers of the same type can be retained if the <Shift> key is held down when clicking one of the toolbar icons or menu entries.8. polygons) in the matrix with a certain pathloss value with the mouse. Fig.5 Viewing Pathloss Plots A surface plot layer can be created from a single pathloss matrix by choosing Show this Matrix from this matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking on the matrix item).e.6 Editing a Pathloss Matrix Under certain circumstances it can be useful to modify a pathloss matrix graphically. such as the best pilot received power . the antenna applied in a cell can be incorporated to produce another layer. and cell overlap . This enables to display a certain group of pathloss matrices in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). The newly created pathloss layer is displayed then in the viewing area. See section 3. To do so. Most of these plots can be easily accessed from the icons in the views toolbar.

The matrix editing mode can be temporarily left to use the zoom and pan functions to navigate to the area where the matrix shall be modified. the new pathloss region is shown in the surface plot. smooth decay towards all directions) it www.7 Duplicating and Dragging Pathloss Matrices Especially when pathloss matrices generated by empirical pathloss models without any obstacles are used that have a regular shape (e. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. Fig. Fig. 6-57.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 158 has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the context menu of the pathloss matrix item. In order to switch then back to the actual matrix editing mode. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions.g.8. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. see Fig.5. Alternatively. The edit pathloss matrix dialog is depicted in Fig.4. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify the pathloss that is assigned to the region just drawn. it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair.com . Alternatively. As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. the matrix editing mode can also be left by selecting any other drawing icon from the paint toolbar. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. See section 3. 6-58. The icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state. So if the background image is a map.actix. Also the distance measure mode is available. 6-58 Edit pathloss matrix dialog After having edited the appropriate pathloss value. simply click the icon again. (by clicking on The matrix editing mode can be left by disabling the matrix editing icon it). Thus pathloss regions can be drawn very quickly. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. Section 3.and y-direction) can be specified. The pathloss regions are drawn by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. 6-57 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw pathloss regions.5. mode or by clicking the 6. the chosen pathloss matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid.

the previously tuned pathloss matrices can be retrieved from their storage place and be imported into the project. When confirming this dialog. the menu function File Export Export Tuned Predictions….actix. Likewise. In order to save the tuned matrices from a project. it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination network element with a simple drag&drop action. drag&drop Fig. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the pathloss matrix.5. Several pathloss matrices are only allowed to be placed temporarily at a single network element. left-click on the pathloss matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. This way the matrices do not need to be tuned every time when the user works with a certain project.8. a complete chunk of tuned pathloss matrices can be imported into a project in Import Import Tuned Predictions….9 Working with Tuned Pathloss Matrices The Measurement Module allows to tune pathloss matrices with measurements.8. One option to realize the alignment is to use the “Synchronize Position with Site/Cell” button from the pathloss matrix configuration dialog which is only visible if the <Shift> key was held down when opening the dialog.g. The newly created pathloss matrix is added at the same network element as the original one. In either case. Alternatively. To accomplish this.8 Deleting a Pathloss Matrix A pathloss matrix can be deleted from its associated network element by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. Then a dialog appears where the user can select the directory to store the tuned matrices in. Fig. 6. several pathloss matrices can be deleted in one step using the pathloss matrix settings overview dialog as described in section 6. Once pathloss matrices have been tuned they can be stored at a dedicated location for further use. Then drag the matrix item to the destination network element and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination network element’s item appears selected.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 159 seems to be useful to have a possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported once. only a single pathloss matrix at each network element can be used. refer to [RMeas].5.4. When used for normal operation as.8. a dragged pathloss matrix is not aligned with its new network element. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from the pathloss matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item). all tuned pathloss matrices from the project are saved into the selected directory. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved pathloss matrix is now shown at the destination network element. In order to have the new pathloss matrix available at another network element (cell or repeater or additional antenna). A dialog one step using the menu function File www.5.. network simulation or analysis. 6. 6-59 Dragging a pathloss matrix to another cell Generally. e. Instead. 6-59 shows an example of such a drag&drop action.

its three-dimensional presentation from two different perspectives is given in Fig. 6. Each distinct antenna represents a template that can be referenced arbitrary times from the cells. 6-60. an antenna item describes an antenna pattern that is defined by a vertical and a horizontal diagram. A gain value can be specified for the antenna. the minimal attenuation is at ϑ ≠ 0° .com . Thus it is possible to use antenna patterns with an incorporated downtilt. When confirming this dialog. ϑ Fig. In order to assign an antenna to a certain antenna family. The horizontal pattern must be normalized such that the attenuation has its minimum at ϕ = 0° with Cϕ (ϕ = 0°) = 1 . An example pattern comprising a horizontal and a vertical diagram is shown in Fig. location and resolution. In this process.actix. a matrix must fit the non-tuned matrix in extensions. any non-tuned pathloss matrices at those network elements are overridden. Note that in order to be imported.e.9 Antenna In Radioplan. The three-dimensional antenna pattern is interpolated from the given horizontal and vertical diagrams. − 90° < ϑ ≤ 90° . 6-60 Antennas of the same type with just different electrical tilt angles are grouped in an antenna family. The antenna diagram is specified by a horizontal ( ϕ -plane). this antenna www. all tuned pathloss matrices from the chosen directory are imported into the project and are automatically associated with the right network elements. and a vertical ( ϑ -plane) antenna diagram. Refer to [R-TecRef] for a detailed description of the antenna pattern interpolation. i. 6-61. 6-61 Three-dimensional presentation of the antenna pattern from Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 160 appears where the user can specify the directory to retrieve the previously tuned matrices from.5. 6-60 Example antenna pattern described by a horizontal and a vertical cut Fig. For the vertical pattern it is only demanded that min Cϑ (ϑ ) = 1. These two cuts are used to interpolate a three-dimensional antenna pattern.

this antenna family would consequently belong to all of the referenced alternative antenna groups. Especially for network optimization purposes. 6-62. If antennas of one antenna family have different alternative antenna group names. It must be referenced by a cell in order to be used. cells. it might be necessary to group different antenna families (e. the available library items are presented by default. with different beam widths) that shall be used for antenna type optimization. Then the antenna is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other antennas. An antenna family can have a range of allowed electrical tilts.5. Fig.g. www. If importing a Radioplan antenna. The import of an antenna does not immediately mean that it is used in the network configuration. Antennas that are not associated with an antenna family belong to the group No Family. 6.com .. the user can freely assign an antenna group name (also called alternative antenna group) to each antenna. do. an isotropic antenna. refer to Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 161 must be given the respective antenna family name.1 Importing an Antenna Despite very simple and rather theoretical antenna patterns as. a three-dimensional antenna pattern is quite a complex unit. To import an antenna in Radioplan format. Thus it is not intended to create an antenna configuration from the scratch. Instead. an antenna can be imported in the Planet format by using the context menu entry Import PLANET™ Antenna…. To this end. Alternatively. repeaters etc. The hierarchical structure of antenna families and antennas belonging to these families is reflected in the configuration tree structure. sites. All antenna families having the same group name are assumed to belong to one antenna group.actix. then the same entry is also available at them. If there are already other antennas in the network configuration. e. select Import Antenna… from the context menu of the Antennas node of the configuration data tree. 6-62 Hierarchical structure of antenna families In Radioplan a specific antenna model is called antenna family. For each tilt angle there could be a separate antenna belonging to the same antenna family. A file open dialog is opened where the desired antenna configuration file can be chosen. They reside in a separate section of the configuration data tree called Antennas. This is especially true for measured antenna patterns.g. Antennas do not directly belong to the network hierarchy as network controller.9. it is possible to import an antenna configuration from the library.

The configuration dialog of the antenna is shown in Fig. This is explained in the following section. the included electrical tilt of an antenna pattern is appended to the antenna ID. A description of the configuration parameters is found in Table 6-16 whereas the pattern format of the horizontal cut (lower left table) and the vertical cut (lower right table) is explained in Table 6-17. Fig. Then the copy could be modified as appropriate. this family name is just the ID without the tilt info. An arbitrary string that describes the antenna. The electrical tilt that is incorporated in the vertical antenna diagram. 6. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) or double-click the antenna item in the tree.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 162 6. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other antennas.5. The name of the antenna family. To duplicate an antenna. 6-63. The antenna gain. As normally.3 Duplicating an Antenna It is possible to duplicate an antenna as soon as it has been imported once.com .9. 6-63 Antenna configuration dialog Table 6-16 Antenna parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the antenna.5. A new antenna is added then to the Antennas node in the configuration data tree. This function can be used to make the antenna available for other projects.9. alternatively.actix.4 Inspecting the Antenna Configuration Data The configuration data of an antenna can be inspected in the according configuration dialog.2 Exporting an Antenna An antenna can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Antenna… from its context menu. By opening the configuration dialog of the new antenna its parameters can be modified as appropriate.9.5. — Antenna Family Description Gain Electrical Tilt — — dBi ° www. 6. or to preserve it permanently in the library. choose Duplicate Antenna from an existing antenna’s context menu.

° — The attenuation values of the antenna pattern are positive for a real attenuation and negative for an amplification. The resulting power offset induced by the antenna pattern for a certain angle is then calculated as antenna power offset (angle) [dB] = antenna gain [dB] – antenna attenuation (angle) [dB]. www. angle). it also show the number of occurrences for each antenna in the project. Alternatively. The attenuation of the antenna diagram in a certain direction (i.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 163 Parameter Description Unit Beamwidth Alternative Antenna Group The 3dB beamwidth of the horizontal antenna diagram. given in the right most column. — ° [0 … 359] dB If the antenna diagrams do not define an attenuation value for each integer angle.com . Positive values mean a real attenuation.e. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the antenna settings. 6-64. the antenna pattern is scaled such that the attenuation is 0 dB for the main lobe of the pattern both in the horizontal and the vertical diagrams. The angle in the horizontal/vertical antenna diagram of the associated pattern value. Furthermore. A string identifier that combines different antenna families in groups for antenna type optimization. In order to get a better overview of the settings of all antennas of the project together. it is Current Project possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Antenna Settings. In addition to the antenna parameters. Table 6-17 Antenna pattern format Parameter Description Unit Show Diagram Azimuth/Downtilt Attenuation A button to show the respective antenna pattern cut (horizontal/vertical) in a separate window. negative values mean an amplification. refer to Fig.actix. the user can select Settings Overview… from an arbitrary antenna item’s or the Antennas node’s context menu. the missing values are padded with the last value given for an angle smaller than the missing one.

6-64 Antenna settings overview In the upper part. 6-65. the dialog has two buttons to automatically fill the antenna family name fields (derived from the antenna IDs. the entries Show Horizontal Diagram and Show Vertical Diagram. In particular. A sample view is shown in Fig. button Update Antenna Families) and to set the electrical tilt values from the antennas IDs (button Update Electrical Tilt from Antenna ID).5 Viewing the Antenna Diagram Both the horizontal and the vertical diagrams of an antenna can be shown in the viewing area in polar diagrams.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 164 Fig. This enables a selective modification of a all antennas of a certain type in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). the following actions can be performed in the table: • • • Individual parameter values can be changed.9. this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the antenna configurations. These views can be directly accessed from the two Show Diagram buttons in the antenna configuration dialog.5.com . from the corresponding antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) allow to display the diagrams. Besides the practical overview. respectively. Furthermore. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function). 6. www.actix.

the network configuration is incomplete and. The amount of traffic that is generated of a given UE profile is specified within the service parameters of that UE profile. and the service parameters of a user. During a dynamic network simulation. While for optimization only a subset of general user related parameters is used across all system technologies. The service of a user is associated with a certain traffic load that has a determined distribution throughout the simulation area. or additional antennas that used the deleted antenna are removed. www. Because of this. These properties can be subgrouped concerning the equipment. not a certain UE instance itself. The user behavior modeling is generally necessary for considering traffic in network optimization and simulation. a UE profile represents a certain type of UE. 6. In order to avoid undesired erasure. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the antenna. Without assigning another antenna to those network elements. repeaters. The UE profile summarizes the compound properties of a user’s behavior. too.actix. Thus the following explanations in this section refer to some properties of the WiNeS dynamic/snapshot UTRAN simulators that might not be available or necessary in other Radioplan Modules. All references in those cells. A UE profile defines the frame parameters for a certain category of users. thus.5. the configuration of the user behavior contains some specific UMTS parameters that are only necessary for network simulation. Yet the user behavior is described in this general configuration chapter due to its general relevance for project setup and optimization independent of the system technology.com .9. 6-65 Sample view of a vertical antenna diagram 6.6 Deleting an Antenna An antenna can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Antenna from that particular antenna’s context menu. That is. the mobility.6 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior configuration is mainly relevant for network simulations only. network simulation requires a much more detailed modeling. a network optimization or simulation could not run. This traffic distribution is given by a traffic matrix. real UE instances are created that are assigned those frame parameters.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 165 Fig.

a UE profile comprises three different profiles that describe different aspects of the user behavior. the user behavior is located in a separated branch called User.actix. In the case where several UE profiles utilize the same service profile. 6-66 A UE profile references equipment. i. This is accomplished by a weighting factor called Service Portion that has a value between 0 and 1.e. By default the available library items are presented. 6-66 further explains the relationship between the three template profiles. www.1. mobility.6.4). They represent templates that are referenced from a UE profile. To import a UE profile. UEs during a dynamic network simulation are created based on a UE profile. and service parameters. select Import UE Profile… from the context menu of the UE Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item).6. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 166 In the configuration data tree. Each of these profiles is located in a separate tree node below the User node.com . each UE profile is built of pre-defined sets of these three profiles. then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. and actually created UE instances during a dynamic network simulation. Fig.6. Either a pre-defined UE profile can be imported from the library or a new empty UE profile can be added. See subsection 6. If there are already other UE profiles in the user configuration.1.1 Assembling a UE Profile As mentioned above. Templates Equipment Equipment Profile Equipment Profile Equipment Profile Equipment Profile Profile Mobility Mobility Profile Mobility Profile Mobility Profile Mobility Profile Profile Service Service Profile Service Profile Service Profile Service Profile Profile UE Profile Equipment Profile Mobility Profile Service Profile «created from» «created from» «created from» Fig. mobility. It has to be assured by the user that the sum of all Service Portions of UE profiles that use the same service is equal to 1. and service profile. it has to be determined to which portion each of these UE profiles is used for the activation of UEs. Otherwise the offered traffic load during a network simulation is proportionally higher or lower than the configured traffic (see subsection 6. and service profiles. This branch contains the UE profiles and the three sub profiles for equipment.6. The latter possibility is explained in the following subsection. there are two possibilities to create a new UE profile. A file open dialog appears where the desired UE profile configuration file can be chosen. mobility profile. These profiles are: • • • equipment profile.3 for the configuration of the UE profile parameters. Then the UE profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other UE profiles. 6.1 Importing a UE Profile In general.6. a UE profile.

1. Table 6-18 UE profile parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the UE profile.com . the three referenced subprofiles for equipment. mobility. and service properties. If ‘ALL’ is selected.3 Inspecting the UE Profile Configuration Data The configuration data of a UE profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. The new UE profile is immediately added to the user configuration. Fig. An arbitrary string that describes the UE profile. mobility. and service profiles) are list fields where the user can choose between all defined template sub profiles of the respective kind. If there are already other UE profiles in the user configuration. mobility.actix. the traffic is equally divided over all network layers available in the project. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective UE profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the UE Profile item) or double-click the UE Profile item in the tree. — Description — www. The three entries for the subordinate profiles (equipment. 6-67. Note that it does not yet reference any of its sub profiles for equipment. The configuration dialog of the UE profile is shown in Fig. 6. and the import would fail. alternatively. and service behavior of the user must already exist in the database. 6.1. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other UE profiles.6. the associated network layer for the UE profile can be chosen. 6-67 UE profile configuration dialog In addition. The parameters of the UE profile are described in Table 6-18. then the same entry (called Add Profile here) is also available at them.2 Adding a New UE Profile The second and preferred possibility to create a new UE profile in a project is to add a completely new empty UE profile to the User tree node.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 167 On importing a UE profile. This is accomplished by choosing Add UE Profile from the context menu of the UE Profiles node of the configuration data tree. Otherwise the subprofiles could not be correctly dereferenced. The parameters of the new UE profile can be modified as described in the following subsection. If there are no sub profiles available in at least one of these categories. one has first to create/import the according template sub profiles in order to be able to complete the UE profile definition.

this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the UE profile configurations. 6-68.com .actix. Fig. In this list field the user can choose one of the predefined equipment profiles. The delay counted from the beginning of the simulation when the single UE instance with this UE profile is created. refer to Fig. If the setting ‘ALL’ is chosen. the following actions can be performed in the table: • Individual parameter values can be changed. www. In this list field.6.1. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary UE profile’s context menu. In this list field the user can choose one of the predefined service profiles. A checkbox to denote this UE profile for a single UE instance in a dynamic network simulation only. 6-68 UE profile settings overview Besides the practical overview. the user can choose one of the predefined mobility profiles. The network layer that the traffic created by this UE profile is associated with.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 168 Parameter Description Unit Service Portion A weighting factor between 0 and 1.4 UE Profile Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all UE profiles together. the traffic is equally divided across all network layers available in the project. It can also be used to scale the traffic given by the traffic matrix of the associated service profile. The service portion (see above) must be greater than 0 in order that the single UE is created. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the UE profile settings. In particular. It determines the portion of traffic of the associated service profile that is utilized for the UE activation. — Equipment Profile Mobility Profile Service Profile Network Layer — — — — Single User Mode — Activation Delay s 6.

an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the UE profile.com . In particular. By default the available library items are presented.5 Duplicating a UE Profile In order to simplify the definition of further UE profiles from a given one. select Import Equipment Profile… from the context menu of the Equipment Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item).6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 169 • • Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu.2.1 Importing an Equipment Profile To import an equipment profile. A file open dialog appears where the desired equipment profile configuration file can be chosen. Outer Loop Power Control: A default outer loop Power Control algorithm according to [Samp97] (also cited in [Holm04.2. These parameters are thus not given in the equipment profile but rather in the service profile (see section 6. Handover. 6.6.1. the following RRM algorithms are configured in the equipment profile: • • Measurement Processing: Measurements of different parameters are permanently taken and further processed in order to feed algorithms like e. www. too. 6. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original UE profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the UE Profile item). mobility. The controlled target C/I starts at the initial target C/I that is specified in the service profile in terms of the initial target Eb/N0. In order to avoid undesired erasure. please refer to [R-TecRef].6. Acknowledged Mode RLC: The response delay of the UE side RLC can be set. the TPC commands are processed on a slot basis.g.2. The parameters of the new UE profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections. if fast fading is applied. HSDPA: The supported HSDPA category can be set. 6. 6.6 Deleting a UE Profile A UE profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular UE profile’s context menu.2 Equipment Profile The equipment profile of a UE summarizes the hardware properties and most of the used RRM algorithms of the terminal. there is the opportunity to duplicate a UE profile.4). then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them.6. That is.actix. the subprofile definitions can also exist in the user configuration without actually being used in a UE profile. and service profiles) are deleted. • • • • For further information on these algorithms.6. The deletion of a UE profile does not mean that the referenced template subprofiles (equipment. Inner Loop Power Control: Generally. however. The adjustment step size and the limits of the outer loop Power Control range can be configured. If there are already other equipment profiles in the user configuration. §9. Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function).3]) is implemented. HSUPA: The supported HSUPA category can be set. the inner loop Power Control is modeled on a frame basis. However.1. A copy of the UE profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of UE profiles in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). service specific. Some equipment related parameters are.

1]. dBm dBm dB dB Outer Loop Power Control Target SIR Step Size The incremental value of the outer loop power control if an error occurred. §5. 6-69. This is explained in the subsections 6. The HSDPA category of the equipment according to [25.2. Possible values are 1 .2 Exporting an Equipment Profile An equipment profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu.3 General Equipment Profile Settings The configuration data of an equipment profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog.2. The new equipment profile can now be inspected and modified in the equipment profile configuration dialog. dB Target SIR Limits Around Initial Value +/. or to retain it permanently in the library..3 ff.306. Output Power Noise Figure Additional Attenuation The maximal output power of the UE. A button to open the mapping table between pilot SIR and CQI. Output Power Min. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective equipment profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Equipment Profile item) or double-click the Equipment Profile item in the configuration data tree.com . etc.4). 6. The two-side limits of the target SIR for the outer loop power control around the configured initial target SIR (see section 6.. The according general equipment profile parameters are described in Table 6-19.6. 6. An additional attenuation of the Tx/Rx signal at the UE. The according decrement when no error is detected is the incremental value multiplied by the configured target BLER (see section 6. — Description Transceiver — Max. dB Pilot Measurement Filtering Ec/Io Filter Activated Window Size HSDPA A checkbox to enable the filtering of the received pilot Ec/I0. The noise figure of the receiver in the UE. The filter length.6. The minimal output power of the UE.2. This function can be used to make the equipment profile available for other projects. — # UMTS frames Equipment Supports HSDPA HSDPA Category PCPICH SIR – CQI Mapping… A checkbox to enable this equipment to support the HSDPA. comprising effects like body loss.6..6. Table 6-19 General equipment profile parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the equipment profile.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 170 Then the equipment profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other equipment profiles. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other equipment profiles.actix.6. — — — www. alternatively. 12.4). The General tab of the equipment profile configuration dialog is shown in Fig. An arbitrary string that describes the equipment profile.

6. 6.. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the equipment profile. 10ms.2. The parameters of the new equipment profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections. i. In order to avoid undesired erasure. It can be set in steps of 1 UMTS frame. §5.306.com .2.6. there is the opportunity to duplicate an equipment profile.4 Duplicating an Equipment Profile In order to simplify the definition of further equipment profiles from a given one. 6-69 General tab of the equipment profile configuration dialog To filter the received pilot Ec/I0 values has the effect that the number of cells in the Active Set does not change abruptly due to Active Set Control. The Ec/I0 values are averaged over the given filter length (window size) if the according pilot Ec/I0 filter option is activated. 6. Possible values are 1 . The HSUPA category of the equipment according to [25. — — Acknowledged Mode RLC Response Delay The ARQ response delay on the uplink for the Acknowledged Mode RLC. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original equipment profile’s context menu (by rightclicking the Equipment Profile item). www. ms Fig.1].6.actix.5 Deleting an Equipment Profile An equipment profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular equipment profile’s context menu.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 171 Parameter HSUPA Description Unit Equipment Supports HSUPA HSUPA Category A checkbox to enable this equipment to support the HSUPA. A copy of the equipment profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree.e.

The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. Optionally. Optionally. The UEs are activated on the streets of the chosen category according to the underlying traffic matrix. a network optimization or simulation would not run. where at every corner they can choose an arbitrary new direction among the branching possibilities. On its way to this target.3 Mobility Profile The mobility profile of a UE characterizes the mobility behavior of a user. it is reflected and moves back into the simulation area again.6. Straight Movement: Upon activation. the speed can be updated after each change of direction. The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. and different speed parameters can be given. Then they follow the streets. the speed can be updated after each change of direction.e. the service duration). a UE chooses a final target in a region with high traffic. Without assigning another equipment profile to those UE profiles. Due to this mechanism the UE moves preferably through regions with higher traffic volume.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 172 All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted equipment profile are removed. The UE does not move at all during its lifetime (i. The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. a UE chooses an arbitrary direction in the x-yplane and starts moving with an initial speed. As soon as it arrives at the simulation area border. the speed can be updated after each change of direction.com . For the www. The movement models to choose from are the following ones: • • No Movement: The simplest movement model. it follows a path consisting of segments of given length (parameter Segment Length).actix. the frequency of position updates can be decreased by the parameter Position Update Interval. • Targeted Movement: Upon activation. 6. The end vertices of these segments are chosen in a way that they are located with high probability in a region with high traffic. thus. In order to reduce the computational effort of a dynamic network simulation. too. Optionally. Different movement models can be chosen. • Street Movement: To use this movement model it is required that at least one street is defined in the simulation area. the network configuration is incomplete and.

This is explained in subsection 6. select Import Mobility Profile… from the context menu of the Mobility Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). Usual values should range between 10m and 100m. An arbitrary string that describes the mobility profile.1 Importing a Mobility Profile To import a mobility profile. or to retain it permanently in the library.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 173 default setting of 0s.2 Exporting a Mobility Profile A mobility profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu. 6. For normal simulation areas with dimensions of several kilometers to several tens of kilometers.3. This parameter is only used for the Street Movement model. and ‘Targeted Movement’.6. This results in values for the position update interval of Position Update Interval [s] = (1 … 10) / (average speed [m/s]). The configuration dialog of the mobility profile is shown in Fig. — Description Movement — Movement Model This is a list field where the movement model for the UE can be chosen. 6-70.6.3. The new mobility profile can now be inspected and modified in the mobility profile configuration dialog. 6. This function can be used to make the mobility profile available for other projects. alternatively. By default the available library items are presented. ‘Straight Movement’.3. — www. ‘Street Movement’. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective mobility profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Mobility Profile item) or double-click the Mobility Profile item in the configuration data tree. This parameter is only used for the Targeted Movement model. the movement position of a UE is updated in every frame.3 Inspecting the Mobility Profile Configuration Data The configuration data of a mobility profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. A value of 0s means that the UE is moved in every frame. 6. The length of a straight movement segment until the direction is changed. The time span after which the movement position of a UE is updated by the movement model. A file open dialog appears where the desired mobility profile configuration file can be chosen.3. Possible values are ‘Uniform’ and ‘Normal’.6. If there are already other mobility profiles in the user configuration. Then the mobility profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other mobility profiles.6. A value of ‘any’ indicates that the UE can move on any street category. a movement step size of 1m … 10m seems to be appropriate. The parameters of the mobility profile are described in Table 6-20. Table 6-20 Mobility profile parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the mobility profile. Possible values are ‘No Movement’. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other mobility profiles.com . then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. The street category that a UE moves on. — Street Category — Position Update Interval Segment Length s m Speed Distribution This is a list field where the speed distribution of the UE can be chosen.actix.3.

6. The average speed in case of a normal speed distribution. The speed variance in case of a normal speed distribution. 6-70 Mobility profile configuration dialog 6. A checkbox to enable a variable user speed.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 174 Parameter Description Unit Lowest Speed Highest Speed Mean Variance Enable Speed Variation The minimal speed in case of a uniform speed distribution. m/s m/s m/s (m/s)2 — Fig. The service arrival process and the traffic model together form a two level model that is described in more detail in [R-TecRef]. Without assigning another mobility profile to those UE profiles. A copy of the mobility profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted mobility profile are removed.4 Duplicating a Mobility Profile In order to simplify the definition of further mobility profiles from a given one. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original mobility profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Mobility Profile item). In order to avoid undesired erasure.6. there is the opportunity to duplicate a mobility profile. It contains information about the service arrival process. too. The parameters of the new mobility profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsection.3. the network configuration is incomplete and. thus. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the mobility profile. If this option is activated.3. the traffic model. a network optimization or simulation would not run.6.6.5 Deleting a Mobility Profile A mobility profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular mobility profile’s context menu. The maximal speed in case of a uniform speed distribution.4 Service Profile All service specific parameters are summarized in the service profile. www. and physical layer parameters. 6.com . the UE will choose a new speed according to the given distribution on each change of direction.

The service profile combines several models and entities that together realize the service specific behavior of the corresponding UE. These aspects are shown to the left in Fig. Radioplan allows to model a great variety of services. 6-71 Assembling a service profile In the following.4. Note that it is possible to choose between several data rates for UL and DL (especially for Streaming. Atoll CS File. Streaming Interactive.1 Modeling Services A service is determined by its service profile.actix. Atoll CS Streaming (VBR).com . or Background data services). Interactive. Power Control Fig. Background circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched packet switched packet switched Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Acknowledged Acknowledged www. Atoll CS Streaming (CBR). 6-71. Atoll PS Conversational Conversational Conversational Conversational. Streaming (VBR). Table 6-21 Recommended service modeling Service Type Traffic Model UMTS Traffic Class Switching Mode RLC Mode Speech Video Telephony Fax Transp. Atoll CS Streaming (CBR). Table 6-21 gives recommendations for valid combinations of typical radio bearers and traffic models for certain service types along with their UMTS traffic classes. Depending on the Radio Bearer definition used. Atoll CS Streaming (VBR). The components of a service profile and their influence on the user/network behavior are depicted in Fig. Atoll CS Speech / Video. 6-71. the different aspects that have an impact on the service profile settings are surveyed.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 175 6. Background Interactive. Modem Audio Streaming Video Streaming File Download Web Browsing Speech / Video. Service Profile Bearer Service Attributes Radio Bearer Selection UMTS Traffic Class Service Type Radio Bearer Configuration Traffic Matrix Service Arrival Process UE Activation Traffic Model Data Traffic PHY Properties Data Detection. Streaming Conversational Conversational.6. Atoll PS WWW.

These traffic models can be distinguished according to their different statistical properties in UL and DL. An interactive traffic model for file downloads. Background packet switched packet switched Acknowledged Acknowledged In order to model the data source behavior of different services. §B. the length of the silent phase may be reduced to 0. It is restricted to either UL or DL transmission. It delivers an independent data stream in each UL and DL. File Transfer Web Browsing - - Messaging A non-interactive traffic model for messaging services such as SMS. The data streams consist of “packets” (active phase) with intermediate silent phases. This is the waiting time of the web server at the network controller to answer on a request. The data streams consist of active and silent phases.com . Table 6-22 gives an overview of the available traffic models. Radioplan provides several traffic models.2. §B. Streaming (VBR). The model corresponds to the real time service model described in [30. A file request message in UL is followed by a single file download in DL. Atoll PS Background Interactive.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 176 Service Type Traffic Model UMTS Traffic Class Switching Mode RLC Mode SMS. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services.03]. The amount of data to be transferred is configurable. The mean lengths of both phases as well as the mean service duration are configurable. It widely corresponds to the packet service session model described in [30. File. VoIP A non-interactive traffic model for Conversational packet-switched services.03]. Table 6-22 Available traffic models Traffic Model Description Speech/Video A non-interactive traffic model for Conversational or Streaming services. Streaming (Constant Bit Rate) www.actix. MMS E-Mail Messaging Messaging. This model has been refined in the following aspects: For each packet call within the packet service session. but geometrically distributed. the codec.2. a request is sent in uplink. Furthermore. If the configured mean datagram size differs from 3840 bits (= 480 bytes) as specified in [30. An additional configurable (constant) server response time was introduced.1.2. A non-interactive traffic model for typically streaming services with constant datarate and equal packet size. An interactive traffic model for a web browsing session. header compression and QoS criteria can be defined.03].2. The request size is negative exponentially distributed with a configurable mean size plus a constant offset of 320 bits (= 40 bytes).1. It delivers an independent data stream in each UL and DL. This traffic model is also available in a semi-dynamic version. and their interactivity capability. The lengths of both the file request and the file download are configurable. For circuit switched data services. the datagram size is not Pareto. The mean lengths of both phases as well as the mean service duration are configurable. It enables the high speed mode of the dynamic network simulator.

4.4. then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. If there are already other service profiles in the user configuration. Gauss) Circuit Switched (ATOLL compatible) Packet Switched (ATOLL compatible) A non-interactive traffic model for typically compressed encoded streaming services with variable datarate and equal packet size. This function can be used to make the service profile available for other projects. By default the available library items are presented. www. See [ATL-TR] for details. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services. A simple traffic model for packet switched services with independent efficiency factors for UL and DL. This model is suited for snapshot simulations only. 6-72. 6.4. The new service profile can now be inspected and modified in the service profile configuration dialog. The general parameters of the service profile are described in Table 6-23. 6. select Import Service Profile… from the context menu of the Service Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item).Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 177 Traffic Model Description Streaming (Variable Bit Rate. The General tab of the service profile configuration dialog is shown in Fig. This model is suited for snapshot simulations only.2 Importing a Service Profile To import a service profile. 6.actix.4. This is explained in subsection 6. On/Off) Streaming (Variable Bit Rate.6. Gaussian distributed packet size.3 Exporting a Service Profile A service profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu. Then the service profile is imported and added to the configuration data tree together with possibly other service profiles. alternatively.6.com . A simple traffic model for circuit switched services with independent activity factors for UL and DL.4 General Service Profile Settings The configuration data of a service profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog.6.6. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective service profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Service Profile item) or double-click the Service Profile item in the tree. or to retain it permanently in the library. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services.4. A non-interactive traffic model for typically compressed encoded streaming services with variable datarate and variable. A file open dialog appears where the desired service profile configuration file can be chosen. See [ATL-TR] for details.

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 178

Fig. 6-72 General tab of the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-23 General service profile parameters

Parameter Traffic Model Type

Description

Unit

Speech / Video Speech / Video (Semi-Dynamic) VoIP (dynamic only) File Transfer Web Browsing Messaging Streaming (Constant Bit Rate) Streaming (VBR/OnOff) Streaming (VBR/Gauss) Circuit Switched Service (ATOLL Compatible) Packet Switched Service (ATOLL Compatible)

The radio button to choose the speech/video traffic model. The radio button to choose the semi-dynamic speech/video traffic model for high speed mode simulations. The radio button to choose the Voice over IP model.
For dynamic simulation only.

— —

— — — — — —

The radio button to choose the file traffic model. The radio button to choose the Web Browsing traffic model. The radio button to choose the messaging traffic model. The radio button to choose the CBR traffic model. The radio button to choose the VBR traffic model with on/off switching. The radio button to choose the VBR traffic model with Gaussian packet lengths. The radio button to choose the ATOLL compatible circuitswitched traffic model.
For snapshot simulation only.

The radio button to choose the ATOLL compatible packetswitched traffic model.
For snapshot simulation only.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 179

Parameter

Description

Unit

Bearer Service Attributes

Switching Mode Traffic Class

A specifier to discriminate between ‘Circuit Switched’ and ’Packet Switched’ services. Depending on the selection of traffic model, the user can specify a UMTS traffic class in this field from the alternatives ‘Conversational’, ‘Streaming’, ‘Interactive’, or ‘Background’. The maximal data rates of this service for uplink or downlink. It must be ensured by the user that the available radio bearers are able to support the specified data rate. The guaranteed data rates of this service for uplink or downlink. It must be ensured by the user that the available radio bearers are able to support the specified data rate. The maximal high speed data rates of this service for uplink and downlink in conjunction with the QoS Profiling feature on HSPA.

— —

Maximum Bitrate UL/DL

bit/s

Guaranteed Bitrate UL/DL

bit/s

Maximum HS Bitrate UL/DL
Prioritization

bit/s

Service Priority

The service priority that determines the order how services are processed by the Congestion Control and the Inter-Frequency Handover Control. This is a value between 1 and 15 where 1 gives the highest priority. The default service priority is 3. The traffic handling priority that determines the order how certain user classes are processed by the Congestion Control and the Inter-Frequency Handover Control. This is a value between 1 and 15 where 1 gives the highest priority. The default priority is 3.

Traffic Handling Priority

Service Arrival Process

Interarrival Time Stretch Factor

The service interarrival process is stretched by this factor. Internally, the service interarrical times are multiplied by this factor.

For the Speech/Video traffic model there is a special semi-dynamic modeling available. Network configurations with semi-dynamic UEs can be investigated by dynamic network simulation in high speed mode without losing much of the accuracy compared to fully dynamic simulations. Read more on the high speed simulation mode in [R-Sim].

6.6.4.5

Physical Layer Parameters

The service specific physical layer parameters can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Fig. 6-73 shows the Physical Layer tab of the service profile configuration dialog. The physical layer parameters of the service profile are described in Table 6-24.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 180

Fig. 6-73 Physical Layer tab of the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-24 Service specific physical layer parameters

Parameter Eb/No

Description

Unit

Decoding Limit UL/DL

The Eb/N0 threshold for correct (i.e. error-free) detection of signaling messages in UL and DL for the respective service. This value should be lower than the initial target Eb/N0. The initial target Eb/N0 in UL and DL for the service. This value could be modified by outer loop Power Control.

dB

Initial Target UL/DL

dB

Target Block Error Rate

Target BLER UL/DL

The target BLER for the outer loop Power Control in UL and DL. The value ranges between 0 and 1.

The UL/DL initial target values for the inner loop Power Control are specified in terms of a target Eb/N0. This value can easily be converted into a corresponding target SIR according to the following relationship: SIR [dB] = Eb/N0 [dB] - 10 * log10(3840 / (spreading factor * user data rate [kb/s])). Refer to [R-TecRef] for details on the definition of Eb/N0 and SIR. Especially if outer loop Power Control is applied, the choice of the decoding limits for UL and DL is crucial because they model the Transport Block (TB) detection thresholds of the modem. If a received TB’s Eb/N0 is above the configured decoding limit, then it is correctly received. Otherwise the TB could not be detected. In order to guarantee a reasonable behavior of the modem, the decoding limit offsets should be chosen slightly smaller than 0dB (-0.5dB … -1dB) such that decoding limits in turn are below the respective target Eb/N0 values.

6.6.4.6

Packet Data Settings

Some settings for packet switched services can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Fig. 6-74 shows the Packet Data tab of the service

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 181

profile configuration dialog. The packet data configuration of the service profile is described in Table 6-25.

Fig. 6-74 Packet Data tab of the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-25 Packet data configuration of the service profile

Parameter TCP

Description

Unit

Enable TCP Model Max. Segment Size Initial Window UL/DL Loss Window UL/DL Restart Window UL/DL Fast Recovery Congestion Window Setting UL/DL

A flag to enable or disable the TCP model. The maximal segment size used by TCP. The initial transmission window for UL and DL. The TCP loss window for UL and DL. The TCP restart window for UL and DL. A number specifying the fast recovery congestion window setting. Possible values are 1 or 2.

— byte Max. Segment Size Max. Segment Size Max. Segment Size —

Acknowledged Mode RLC

Enable Maximum Transmissions

A flag to enable the Acknowledged Mode RLC. The maximal number of transmissions of a single RLC PDU in Acknowledged Mode. If the PDU could not successfully be received, it is lost. Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on the last PDU in the transmission buffer. Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on the last PDU in the retransmission buffer. Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on every Poll_PDU.

— #

Poll on last PDU in Transmission Buffer Poll on last PDU in Retransmission Buffer Poll every Poll_PDU

— — —

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 182

Parameter

Description

Unit

Use Window Based Polling Window Size UL/DL Poll_PDU UL/DL Poll_Window UL/DL Timer_Poll_Prohibit Timer_Status_Prohibit

Flags for UL and DL to enable window based polling. The transmission window size of the ARQ algorithm according to [25.322, §9.4]. This value gives the number of PDUs to be transmitted before the next polling is done. The required fill level of the transmission window to initiate polling. See [25.322, §9.5(b)] See [25.322, §9.5(f)]

— — # PDUs % ms ms

The Default button can be used to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.

6.6.4.7

Traffic Model Configuration

The parameters of the distinct traffic models can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Depending on the choice of traffic model, the model parameters may differ. In the sequel, the configuration tabs of the various traffic models are described.
Speech/Video Traffic Model

The speech/video traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-75 shows the Speech / Video tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-26.

Fig. 6-75 Speech / Video tab in the service profile configuration dialog

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 183

Table 6-26 Speech/video traffic model parameters

Parameter Activity

Description

Unit

Mean Active Time

This is the mean active time of a speech transmission. The resulting voice activity factor is calculated as (Mean Active Time) / ((Mean Active Time) + (Mean Silent Time)). This is the mean silent time of a speech transmission. The resulting voice activity factor is calculated as (Mean Active Time) / ((Mean Active Time) + (Mean Silent Time)). The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration).

s

Mean Silence Time

s

Mean Holding Time
Data Rate

s

Bitrate UL/DL

The data rate of the speech/video service in UL and DL. These values are only given for information here; they are copied from the Bearer Service Attributes section in the General tab.

bit/s

Voice over IP Traffic Model

The Voice over IP traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-76 shows the Voice over IP tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-27.

Fig. 6-76 Voice over IP tab in the service profile configuration dialog

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 184

Table 6-27 Voice over IP traffic model parameters

Parameter Activity

Description

Unit

Mean Active Time Mean Silence Time Mean Holding Time
Codec

This is the mean active time of a speech transmission. This is the mean silent time of a speech transmission. The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration).

s s s

Codec Configure

Selects the type of speech codec. This button is only enabled if the Codec is set to ‘Manual’. Then the speech codec parameters can be set as described below this table.

— —

QoS

Max. Tolerable Delay

The maximally tolerable packet delay of VoIP packets in order to not get discarded.

ms

Robust Header Compression

Enable RoHC Compressor Decompressor

If this checkbox is activated, robust header compression is enabled during VoIP transmission. The configuration parameters of the header compression. The configuration parameters of the header decompression.

— — —

In case the user has selected ‘Manual’ for the speech codec type, the Configure button is enabled. When pressing it, another dialog is opened that contains the custom VoIP dodec configuration settings. This dialog is shown in Fig. 6-77; Table 6-28 below describes the codec setup.

Fig. 6-77 Custom Voice over IP codec settings dialog Table 6-28 Voice over IP codec configuration

Parameter Payload

Description

Unit

Mean Payload Size Payload Std. Deviation

The mean payload size per VoIP packet. The standard deviation of the VoIP payload size.

bytes bytes

www.actix.com

Deviation IAT Distribution Access Order The mean interarrival time of voice packets. Fig. The constant server response time that models a waiting time between a file request in uplink and the corresponding download.com . Choice between determinate of random IAT distribution access order. This size is usually relatively short (FTP request message). ms ms — File Transfer Traffic Model The file transfer traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-29. 6-78 File Transfer tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-29 File transfer traffic model parameters Parameter File Transfer Description Unit Mean File Size UL Mean File Size DL The mean file size in uplink for a file transfer. The mean file size in downlink for a file transfer. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 185 Parameter Interarrival Time Description Unit Mean IAT IAT Std.actix. bits bits Server Response Time s www. 6-78 shows the File Transfer tab in the service profile configuration dialog. This size is usually much larger than the uplink value (actual file transfer). The standard deviation of the interarrival time of voice packets.

# # bits bytes Mean Datagram IAT Mean Reading Time Server Response Time s s s www. Fig. The mean reading time between two packet calls. A datagram corresponds to an IP packet. A packet call corresponds to an answer to an HTTP request. The mean interarrival time between two consecutive datagrams. The mean size of a datagram.com . 6-79 WWW tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-30 Web Browsing traffic model parameters Parameter Web Browsing Description Unit Mean Packet Call Count Mean Datagram Count Mean DL Datagram Size Mean UL Datagram Body Size The mean number of packet calls per Web Browsing session. The mean size of the variable part of the UL packet request. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 186 Web Browsing Traffic Model The Web Browsing traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. 6-79 shows the WWW tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The mean number of datagrams per packet call.actix. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-30. The actial UL packet request size is calculated as the sum of a negative exponentially distributed part with given mean plus a constant offset of 40 bytes. The constant server response time that models a waiting time between a HTTP request in uplink and the corresponding download.

Fig. 6-80 shows the Messaging tab in the service profile configuration dialog. SF = 256 is used. If. 6-80 Messaging tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-31 Messaging traffic model parameters Parameter Description Unit Messaging (SMS/MMS) Max. The size of a single data packet in UL and DL. the maximal length is only 300 bits. Amount of Data The maximal amount of data bits to carry an SMS. The maximal considered SMS length is restricted to 2400 bits at a SF of 32 on the RACH. s bits www.actix. Fig.com . Table 6-32 CBR streaming traffic model parameters Parameter Data Quantity Description Unit Mean Holding Time Packet Size UL/DL The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration). The direction of data transfer for this unidirectional traffic model. Fig. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-32.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 187 Messaging Traffic Model The Messaging traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. 6-81 shows the Streaming tab for CBR services in the service profile configuration dialog.. e. The user can choose between ‘Uplink’ and ‘Downlink’. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-31.g. bits Direction — Streaming (Constant Bit Rate) Traffic Model The streaming (CBR) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab.

On/Off) Traffic Model The VBR streaming (On/Off) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. 6-82 Streaming tab for VBR (On/Off) services in the service profile configuration dialog www. Fig. Fig. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-33. 6-82 shows the Streaming tab for VBR (On/Off) services in the service profile configuration dialog.actix. bit/s Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 188 Parameter Data Rates [bits/s] Description Unit Data Rate UL/DL The constant data rate in UL and DL. 6-81 Streaming tab for CBR services in the service profile configuration dialog Streaming (Variable Bit Rate.com .

The average data rate of the packet stream in UL and DL. Gauss) Traffic Model The VBR streaming (Gauss) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 189 Table 6-33 VBR streaming (On/Off) traffic model parameters Parameter Data Quantity Description Unit Mean Holding Time Packet Size UL/DL Data Rates [bits/s] The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration). s www. Possible values are ‘Exponential’ and ‘Pareto’. s bits Peak Data Rate UL/DL Average Data Rate UL/DL Distribution of On/Off Durations The peak data rate of the packet stream in UL and DL. The size of a single data packet in UL and DL. 6-83 Streaming tab for VBR (Gauss) services in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-34 VBR streaming (Gaussian packet size) traffic model parameters Parameter Data Quantity Description Unit Mean Holding Time The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration).com . bit/s bit/s — Streaming (Variable Bit Rate. The distribution of the on/off durations of the data streams in UL and DL. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-34. Fig. Fig. 6-83 shows the Streaming tab for VBR (Gaussian packet size) services in the service profile configuration dialog.

either the upper left hand side (circuit switched traffic model) or the right hand side (packet switched traffic model) is enabled. 6-84 Atoll Service tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-35 ATOLL compatible traffic model parameters Parameter Circuit Switched Description Unit Mean Number of Calls / Hour Mean Call Duration The mean number of calls per hour. s ATOLL Compatible Traffic Models The ATOLL compatible traffic models can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if they were selected in the Traffic Model tab. The standard deviation of the data packet size in UL and DL. The parameters of these traffic models are described in Table 6-35. Fig.com . Depending on the type of model. bit/s bits s Buffer Dimension The reception buffer dimension in terms of storage time.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 190 Parameter Data Rates Description Unit Average Data Rate UL/DL Data Rate Std. Deviation UL/DL Autocorrelation Constant UL/DL Flow Control The average data rate in UL and DL. Please refer to [ATL-TR] for a detailed description of these traffic models. # s www.actix. The autocorrelation constant characterizing the correlation of the packet size between consecutive data packets for UL and DL. Fig. The mean call duration. 6-84 shows the Atoll Service tab in the service profile configuration dialog.

9 Deleting a Service Profile A service profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular service profile’s context menu.6. This is a value between 0 and 1. — — Mean Number of Sessions / Hour Mean Reading Time UL Efficiency Factor DL Efficiency Factor UL Volume / Session DL Volume / Session The mean number of sessions per hour. Without assigning another service profile to those UE profiles. A copy of the service profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. The mean transmitted data volume of a session in uplink. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original service profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Service Profile item). — — Optimization Performance Prediction Coding Factor UL/DL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio Packet Switched The coding factor in UL and DL. All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted service profile are removed.8 Duplicating a Service Profile In order to simplify the definition of further service profiles from a given one. # s — — KByte Kbyte 6. thus.6. 6. The parameters of the new service profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections. they are also deleted from the project. The mean reading time of a session. Furthermore.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 191 Parameter Description Unit UL Voice Activity Factor DL Voice Activity Factor The uplink voice activity factor. the network configuration is incomplete and. a network optimization or simulation would not run. The efficiency factor of the packet transmission in the downlink.4. The mean transmitted data volume of a session in downlink. www. if there was a traffic matrix and/or a revenue matrix assigned to that service profile. The efficiency factor of the packet transmission in the uplink.actix.com . too. This is a value between 0 and 1. In order to avoid undesired erasure. This is a value between 0 and 1. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the service profile. This value is only used for determining the probability of CTS to the FACH. The average power ratio between DPCCH and DPCH in UL and DL. The downlink voice activity factor. This is a value between 0 and 1. there is the opportunity to duplicate a service profile.4.

6-85 Add Generic User Profiles After selecting this option. Interarrival time of the service arrival process: The mean interarrival time of UE activations for a certain service is calculated from the given mean holding time of the service and the total traffic density (given through the traffic matrix).com . UE activation: New UEs are activated during a network simulation according to the spatial distribution of the relative traffic values in the traffic matrices. generic profiles for equipment. That is. UEs are created with higher probability at positions with higher traffic values. for traffic matrix generation. So the network can be optimized for carrying a defined network load.5 Creating Generic User Profiles It is also possible to create a set of generic user profiles with one action. movement. The relative traffic values in the traffic matrices are used for this directly. This generic set of profiles can be used. 6-85). This is accomplished by right-clicking on the User folder in the Configuration tab and selecting Add Generic User Profiles (see Fig. Together with it. Zero traffic masking: Areas with no traffic can be excluded from network optimization in order to focus on traffic relevant areas. a traffic matrix can be used to create load distributed throughout the network.6. The traffic density is given in Erlang/km2.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 192 6.6 Traffic Matrix Each service profile is associated with a traffic matrix. www. and service are generated and referenced by the new UE profile. Fig. The traffic values in the traffic matrices are used for several purposes: • • • • • Traffic and load distribution: For network optimization. see section 12. 6. Targeted movement: Users in a dynamic network simulation move preferably along paths with higher traffic.10. a new generic UE profile is created below the UE Profiles node. for example. A traffic matrix is location based data of traffic density values.actix.6. A traffic matrix is located subordinate to the respective service profile in the configuration data tree.

The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. 6. To import a matrix from the library or a stored project.6. the Northwestern corner. The alignment of a traffic matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. However.6. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding service profile. In case of a TIFF file. or a georeferenced raster file (see appendix 13. the traffic of different services cannot be compared because.6. in general. 6-86 Traffic matrix format Since a traffic matrix is always associated with a single service profile. each service profile immediately needs a traffic matrix because otherwise no UE at all would be created during a network simulation. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. The indices in the color palette are directly interpreted as traffic values. it is possible to temporarily have more than one traffic matrix at a certain service profile. North R1C1 R2C1 . This is done by selecting Import Traffic Matrix from Raster Image… from the superior service profile’s context menu. only a single traffic matrix is supported. One can import • • either a predefined traffic matrix from the library or another project. one UE uses the corresponding service at the same time. the attribution of color values to traffic values is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette..Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 193 6. For each service profile.. In order to allow for duplicate&move actions with traffic matrices in the configuration data tree between several service profiles.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig.com . The covered area of a traffic matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns. on average. R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 .2 Traffic Matrix Format The traffic matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. Alternatively. it is justified to represent the traffic of one service in terms of Erlangs...1 Importing a Traffic Matrix There are two possibilities to import a traffic matrix..actix. 6-86. select Import Traffic Matrix… from the superior service profile’s context menu.6. A mean traffic of 1 Erlang means that.5 for supported file formats). Please also refer to the notion of “equivalent traffic” as used for optimization in [R-ACP]. . if this service profile is referenced in UE profile(s). www. Vice versa. these services have different (and even varying) data rates and different service activity statistics. an arbitrary georeferenced raster data file can be imported as traffic matrix.. i. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a traffic configuration file.e. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North . Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a relative traffic density value in Erlang/km2.

m m m m # # 6. and grid size. the color palette. www. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the traffic matrix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 194 6. The number of columns in the traffic matrix. The newly created traffic layer is shown then in the viewing area.com . See section 3.6. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected.6. the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area. The expansion of a traffic matrix pixel in West-East direction.3 Exporting a Traffic Matrix A traffic matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export Traffic Matrix to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the traffic matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window.6.4 Inspecting the Settings of a Traffic Matrix The configuration parameters of a traffic matrix are its positioning. Fig.5.6. 6-88 shows a sample traffic matrix where the traffic is concentrated on the streets. For each service. a separate layer is created. The expansion of a traffic matrix pixel in South-North direction. 6-87. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.6.6. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. 6-87 Traffic matrix configuration dialog Table 6-36 Traffic matrix parameters Parameter Matrix Settings Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the traffic matrix.actix. and the alpha blending factor appropriately. These parameters are summarized in the traffic matrix configuration dialog. dimension. This dialog can be accessed by selecting Settings… from the traffic matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking its item in the configuration data tree. Fig. It is shown in Fig. The number of rows in the traffic matrix.4 how to adjust these settings in the layer settings dialog. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling. This coordinate has a West-East alignment. 6.5 Viewing a Traffic Matrix A surface plot layer can be created from a traffic matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix (by right-clicking on the matrix item). The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-36.

In order to modify the initially empty matrix. The configured pixel resolution is used for both the pixel width and height. It is rectangular and spans the total simulation area. Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 195 Fig. 6-89). The user can then choose a pixel resolution in the grid settings dialog (see Fig. one has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix item. they can also be created in Radioplan.e.e. The new matrix is immediately added to the configuration data tree below the corresponding service profile. it is filled with zeros only. the matrix covers the encompassing rectangle.6.actix. If there are already other traffic matrices then the same entry is also available from their context menus.com .6. add a new empty traffic matrix to a service profile by choosing Add new Matrix from that service profile’s context menu. i. The resulting matrix settings can be inspected in the matrix configuration dialog as described in subsection 6. In case of an arbitrary polygonal simulation area. polygons) in the new traffic matrix with a certain relative/absolute traffic value with the mouse. The icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state.6. For this purpose.4. 6-89 The matrix resolution settings dialog is shown prior to creating a matrix to determine the pixel size.6. 6-88 A traffic matrix which basically concentrates the traffic to the streets (in yellow) 6. To do so.6 Defining a New Traffic Matrix If no traffic data are available for the simulation area. www. It is still empty in the beginning. Fig.

The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set.and y-direction) can be specified. The traffic dialog is depicted in Fig. 6-90 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw traffic regions. the chosen traffic matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid. Thus traffic regions can be drawn very quickly. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x. (by clicking on The matrix editing mode can be left by disabling the matrix editing icon it). the very recent modification would by applied to the traffic matrix of that service profile instead. So if the background image is a map. it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. Also the distance measure mode is available. Alternatively.4. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify the traffic density that is assigned to the region just drawn. The associated service profile of the displayed traffic matrix is currently selected. Fig. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. www. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. the matrix editing mode can also be left by selecting any other drawing icon from the paint toolbar. 6-91.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. 6-90.actix. The user could choose another service profile from the list field. and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. simply click the icon again.com . In this case. see Fig. section 3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 196 The matrix editing mode can be temporarily left to use the zoom and pan functions to navigate to the area where the matrix shall be modified. mode or by clicking the 6. Alternatively.6.6. 6-91 Traffic dialog After having edited the appropriate (relative) traffic density. the new traffic region is shown in the surface plot. Fig.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. In order to switch then back to the actual matrix editing mode.5. As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated. The traffic regions are drawn by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. See section 3.7 Creating a Traffic Matrix from a Surface Plot Layer Any existing surface plot layer can be used to create a traffic matrix from it under consideration of freely definable clutter weights.

The cell areas (i. refer to subsection 6. however. if necessary. The traffic matrix is then determined as follows: For each pixel i of the resulting traffic matrix. i denotes the set of all pixels that belong to the cell that contains the pixel i . the according traffic value t i is calculated as ti = f ⋅ k∈Cell . they are all assumed to be 1 in order to obtain a useful result. Fig.e. For an automatic generation of a traffic matrix based on cell counters. the sets of pixels that each are associated with a certain cell) are determined according to the best server criterion. Then the service profile must be determined where the new traffic matrix shall be added. These weighting factors can be modified in the table. www.10.6. mi is the value from the original layer at pixel i . This can be accomplished using the various layer manipulation functions of Radioplan as detailed in section 12. in order to be used for the traffic matrix generation. If the weighting factor of a certain clutter class is not defined in the table then a factor of 1 is assumed for that class as it exists in the clutter matrix. Cell . a table with the clutter classes is shown. In the unlikely case that all weighting factors are 0. In the lower part of the dialog. Be aware that this is a relative traffic matrix. By using the Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… entry from the context menu of that service profile item in the Configuration tab of the tree window the traffic matrix generation dialog is opened which is shown in Fig.actix. Lastly. All available layers are given in the topmost list field where the desired one can be selected. Each clutter class is assigned a weighting factor that is set to 1 initially.i ∑m k ⋅ k∈Cell . It is up to the user to scale the traffic values of the matrix properly to end up with a reasonable traffic load. 6-92 Create Traffic Matrix from Layer dialog In this dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 197 In order to use the function. The result is a new traffic matrix that is added below the selected service profile in the configuration data tree.6. the user can determine the underlying layer that the traffic matrix shall be created from. and w(ci ) is the the weighting factor of the clutter class at pixel i .4. the layer with the assumed traffic values must be created before.5. 6-92.com . the general scaling factor which is given in the middle of the dialog might be adjusted. This can be accomplished by adjusting the scaling factor in the traffic matrix configuration dialog accordingly.i w(ci ) ⋅ mi ∑ w(ck ) ⋅ mk where f is the general scaling factor. see on Traffic Matrix Generation in section 12.

How to generate a Radioplan traffic matrix from cell-specific traffic values? Assume there are cell-specific traffic values given for a particular service. In order to import this table into Radioplan. the embedded clipboard must be Embedded Clipboard (Table). this kind of traffic description is a mapping of traffic values to cell IDs which can be represented in a table. Moreover. 6-94 Create Surface Plot from Table dialog After confirming these settings. the flag Weight Values by Covered Cell Area must be selected in order to weight the cell-specific traffic values with the according cell areas. An example is given in the figure below. Choose Graph Selection Mapped Surface Plot from the appearing context menu as shown below.com . a new surface plot layer is created representing the weighted traffic plot per cell. 6-93 Using the Graph Selection menu on the cell-based data in the Embedded Clipboard A dialog is shown where the correct column with the cell IDs must be selected in the Cell Name field.actix. Fig. Basically. Fig. Then the traffic opened first by using the menu entry Edit table can be copied into the embedded clipboard with a normal copy&paste action. This is done by selecting the column with the traffic values in the embedded clipboard and then hitting the right mouse button somewhere in the selected column.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 198 An alternative way to create a traffic matrix from cell-based data is described below. www. The next step is to create a surface plot layer with the weighted traffic values per cell.

In this example we take a service profile ‘Generic Service’ for simplicity. the traffic matrix generation dialog is opened. Furthermore.actix. choose the Show this Matrix entry from the matrix’s context menu. Fig. www. the clutter weights can be adjusted in the lower table if such values are available. the new traffic matrix is created.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 199 Fig. the second phase of the procedure can be tackled. Here the weighted traffic plot that was just created should be selected. Its item is immediately added in the configuration data tree below the selected service profile.com . 6-95 Example mapped surface plot resulting from Embedded Clipboard data After having created the original layer for the generation of the new traffic matrix. 6-96 Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer dialog After confirming the settings in the traffic matrix generation dialog. By choosing the function Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… from this service profile’s context menu. In order to view the new traffic matrix. First a service profile from the configuration data tree must be determined where the new traffic matrix shall be added.

the traffic matrix is automatically duplicated.8 Duplicating and Dragging a Traffic Matrix Since traffic matrices for different services usually cover the same area with likely similar traffic loads.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 200 Fig.actix. Fig.6. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved/copied traffic matrix is now shown at the destination service profile.6. In order to have the new traffic matrix available for another service profile. If the <Ctrl> key is held down during the drag&drop action. www. there is the possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported once (or created from the scratch). In order to avoid undesired erasure. 6-98 Example traffic matrix resulting further from the creation with clutter weighting 6.com .9 Deleting a Traffic Matrix A traffic matrix can be deleted from its superordinate service profile by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. Then drag the matrix item to the destination service profile and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination service profile’s item appears selected.6. To accomplish this. 6. left-click on the traffic matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination service profile with a simple drag&drop action. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from the traffic matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item). The newly created traffic matrix is added at the same service profile as the original one.6. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the traffic matrix. 6-97 Show this Matrix function in the Traffic Matrix context menu The resulting traffic matrix in the example is shown below.

As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown with the icon in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding service profile. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. 6-100.e. 6.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig.g.actix. it is possible to temporarily have more than one revenue matrix at a certain service profile. These parameters are summarized in the revenue matrix configuration dialog. i. and grid size. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight. dimension. e. The revenue density is given in [currency]/km2.1 Importing a Revenue Matrix A revenue matrix can be imported in Radioplan format. only a single revenue matrix is supported. coming from another project.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 201 6. 6-99 Revenue matrix format 6... The revenue values in the revenue matrices can be used for Capital Planning and ROI oriented network optimization. The alignment of a revenue matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North . A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a revenue configuration file. . R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 . North R1C1 R2C1 . This dialog can be accessed by selecting Settings… from the revenue matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking its item in the configuration data tree. A revenue matrix is location based data of revenue density values generated in the network.3 Inspecting the Settings of a Revenue Matrix The configuration parameters of a revenue matrix are its positioning. A revenue matrix is located subordinate to the respective service profile in the configuration data tree.2 Revenue Matrix Format The revenue matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig.6.6. In order to allow for duplicate&move actions with revenue matrices in the configuration data tree between several service profiles.7.com .7 Revenue Matrix Each service profile can be associated with a revenue matrix..6. Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a relative revenue density value in [currency]/km2. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-37. 6-99. the Northwestern corner. www.. To import a matrix..7. The covered area of a revenue matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.6..7. It is shown in Fig. 6. For each service profile. select Import Revenue Matrix… from the superior service profile’s context menu.

To invoke this function.4 how to adjust these settings in the layer settings dialog.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 202 Fig. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. After confirming the settings by pressing the OK button.6 Duplicating and Dragging a Revenue Matrix Since revenue matrices for different service profiles usually cover the same area for a certain network cluster. The number of columns in the revenue matrix. the new revenue matrix will be created. 6.7.actix. The number of rows in the revenue matrix. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the revenue matrix. See section 3. and the alpha blending factor appropriately. The newly created revenue layer is shown then in the viewing area.6. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.7. The expansion of a revenue matrix pixel in South-North direction. For each service.6. the revenue generated from a network is related to the geographic traffic pattern. 6. there is a function to derive a revenue matrix from a traffic matrix.4 Viewing a Revenue Matrix A surface plot layer can be created from a revenue matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the revenue matrix (by right-clicking on the matrix item).5. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size.7. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from www. 6-100 Revenue matrix configuration dialog Table 6-37 Revenue matrix parameters Parameter Matrix Settings Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the revenue matrix. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. Then the user is prompted with a configuration dialog where the revenue matrix generation function can be configured. Consequently. there is the possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported or created once. It is immediately attached to the same service profile in the configuration data tree as also the original traffic matrix belongs to. a separate layer is created. choose the Generate Revenue Matrix… entry from the context menu of the respective traffic matrix. The expansion of a revenue matrix pixel in West-East direction.6. the color palette. m m m m # # 6. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling.5 Creating a Revenue Matrix from a Traffic Matrix Typically.

an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the revenue matrix. To accomplish this.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 203 the revenue matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item).7. 6. The newly created revenue matrix is added at the same service profile as the original one. In order to have the new revenue matrix available for another service profile. it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination service profile with a simple drag&drop action. Then drag the matrix item to the destination service profile and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination service profile’s item appears selected.6. www. left-click on the revenue matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved/copied revenue matrix is now shown at the destination service profile.com . the revenue matrix is automatically duplicated. In order to avoid undesired erasure. If the <Ctrl> key is held down during the drag&drop action.7 Deleting a Revenue Matrix A revenue matrix can be deleted from its superordinate service profile by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu.

actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 204 www.com .

The parameterization is cell specific. Congestion Control: By default. Power Balancing (parameterization): The complete Power Balancing algorithm according to [25. (hard) Inter-Frequency Handover. In particular.7.6].5. and dynamic or snapshot network simulation.1 RNC Configuration The UMTS specific network controller is called RNC. The latter handover type is only monitored as outgoing because the GSM network is not modeled in Radioplan for UTRA/FDD.3] which applies the radio link failure criteria specified in [25.433. Note that RLF Detection is applicable to DCH transmission only. §8. the CM is initiated for the requesting UE. • • • • • • www. Only the Power Adjustment Type ‘Common’ is implemented. Compressed Mode Control: Depending on a certain CPICH Ec/I0 threshold. In case a request is admitted by the RNC. §4. Radio Link Failure (RLF) Detection: Radio link monitoring is implemented according to [25. FACH and HSDPA Shared MAC (parameterization): Several scheduling methods for the shared MAC on each cell’s FACH and HSDPA can be configured.331. 7. Soft/Softer Handover. the connection is switched back to DCH again. an UL Congestion Control algorithm realizes a fast (frame-based) UL Congestion Control that ignores Power Control commands for the UL that would result in an exceeded local UL network load.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 205 7 UTRAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of UMTS specific project items in Radioplan. site selection. meaning that all Node Bs have identical Power Balancing parameters. Power Balancing is only applied during Soft/Softer Handover. Possible handover types are Hard Handover. the UE sends a measurement report to the RNC requesting for Compressed Mode (CM). It is assumed that the RNC initially informs all Node Bs by a single DL POWER CONTROL REQUEST message about the Power Balancing parameters.2] is implemented. Projects with UMTS network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization.3.3. The latter parameters are provided by a Radio Bearer Definition file. It comprises most of the Radio Resource Management algorithms that are relevant for dynamic/snapshot network simulation.214. Admission Control: The Admission Control decides whether an access attempt can be served by the network based on the current local network load in UL and/or DL. performed at the RNC. DL and UL use the same algorithm with the same parameter settings. Radio Bearer Control: In inactive periods of a DCH connection. the following Layer 2/3 algorithms are located here: • • • Radio Bearer Translation: The Radio Bearer Translation associates services with certain pre-defined UMTS Radio Bearer and Radio Access Bearer parameters. As soon as the data stream contains sufficiently much data. it can fall back to one of the cell’s FACHs. Addtionally. §8. and (hard) Inter-System Handover to GSM. if admitted. measurement analysis. however.com . a DL Congestion Control algorithm is applied that is based upon the maximal DL Tx power that cannot be exceeded.actix. pathloss tuning. Handover Request Processing: Arriving handover requests from UEs are processed and.

7-1 General tab of the RNC configuration dialog www.2. These procedures are: • • • • • • C/I calculation maximum-ratio/selection combining in Soft/Softer Handover in the modem (in conjunction with Node Bs) detection of Transport Blocks in the modem (in conjunction with Node Bs) Power Control (open-loop. The general parameters of the RNC are described in Table 7-1. alternatively. 7-1 shows the configuration dialog of the RNC with the General parameters tab.com . in particular dynamic simulation. Fig.1 General RNC Settings Once the RNC has been created.1.5. The general RNC parameters can be found in section 6. Their parameters are however mainly connection specific. Fig.and downgrading adaptation of spreading factor and target C/I during Compressed Mode All UMTS parameters of the RNC are only needed for network simulation. slot-based inner-loop) fast data rate up. network optimization does not require any RNC configuration.actix. please refer to [R-TecRef]. outer-loop. To access this dialog select Settings… from the RNC’s context menu or double-click the RNC item in the tree. several Layer 1 procedures are located at the RNC side. For further information on these algorithms. On the contrary. 7.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 206 Additionally. its data can be inspected in the according configuration dialog.

actix. the user can select the RRM algorithms from a certain vendor. some more parameters for those algorithms can appear in the distinct network element configuration dialogs. The network wide parameters of the Radioplan Outer Loop Power Control. In case you purchased Radioplan with certain vendor specific RRM algorithms. ms Depending on the chosen vendor specific RRM algorithms. 7-2 shows shows the Power Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog. this User Guide contains only the standard parameters of the implemented default RRM algorithms. The same pre-defined settings are used when the RNC is created with the context menu entry Add Network Controller at the Network Elements node in the configuration data tree. Power Balancing. — Configure Cell Parameter Templates… Radio Bearer Definitions — — Neighbor List Support Use Configured Neighbor Lists Measurement If this checkbox is activated. The higher the step size the faster the algorithm converges.com . — — Vendor Specific RRM Algorithms Vendor In this list field. Pressing this button opens a dialog where the user can choose a file with templates for cell parameters sets.5 dB ). Fig. Table 7-2 Power Control parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Radioplan Outer Loop Power Control Step Size The target SIR adjustment step size (typically 0.1 . the neighbor lists configured at each cell are considered in network simulations. However. 7. the Power Balancing and Radio Link Failure Detection algorithms are described in Table 7-2. Choosing Use Factory Default Files applies the built-in settings.0. — Measurement Cycle Duration The interval for measurement reports being sent to the network. dB www.2 Power Control Related Configuration The Power Control. please refer to the additional manual(s) for the usage of those algorithms. whereas selecting From Custom Folder and giving a directory in the input field offers the opportunity to enforce a customized Radio Bearer Definition. s Acknowledged Mode RLC Response Delay The ARQ response delay on the downlink for the Acknowledged Mode RLC. and Radio Link Failure Detection parameters of the RNC can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC settings dialog. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 207 Table 7-1 General RNC parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit ID Description The identifier of the RNC. This choice influences the entire network configuration. Each tab of the RNC configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all its parameters to reasonable default settings. It defines the convergence speed of the algorithm.1. An arbitrary string that describes the RNC. Specifies the source of the Radio Bearer Definitions used in the simulator.

§9.47A].4.433.43] and as N_OUTSYNC_IND in [25. — dB The Adjustment Ratio IE as specified in [25. This is an offset to the DPCCH SIR target indicating bad quality.433. RLF Timer Value Checkbox to activate the Radio Link Failure Detection algorithm throughout the entire network. §6. This parameter is defined as N313 in [25.4. §10.2.331.1. The Qin measure as defined in [25. §9.331. a large value (close to 1) results in slower convergence.1.C]. The Qout measure as defined in [25. In Sync Count Max. Out of Sync Count Max. This parameter is defined as N315 in [25.101. Adjustment Step).2. Fig.20]. The Adjustment Period IE as specified in [25.3.1.1.B]. Adjustment Step # UMTS frames # UMTS slots Radio Link Failure Detection Activate RLF Detection DPCCH SIR offset for bad quality DPCCH SIR offset for good quality Quality Window Size Max. — Adjustment Period Max.3.2.56A].101. During this period the Power Balancing algorithm applies a constant power offset per frame. given relative to the PCPICH Tx power of the respective cell.43] and as N_INSYNC_IND in [25. exactly one synchronization status is indicated.3.2.3.2. It mainly determines the convergence rate of the Power Balancing algorithm between different cells.43] and as T_RLFAILURE in [25.47B]. §9.4. The window size for observing the quality to indicate the synchronization status. This parameter is defined as T313 in [25.2. This is an offset to the DPCCH SIR target indicating good quality. Maximal number of out-of-sync indications. §9. §9.433. It is defined as the number of slots where the accumulated power adjustment due to Power Balancing does not exceed 1dB.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 208 Parameter Description Unit Limit The two-side limit of the target SIR around the initial target SIR. The Max Adjustment Step IE as specified in [25. It can be transformed into a maximal adjustment step size per frame as MaxAdjStepSize[dB] = 15dB / (Max.433. The DL Power IE as specified in [25. §10. 6. §6. §9. — dB dB # UMTS frames # # # UMTS frames www.3.331.1.2.1]. §10.1]. Maximal value of the RLF timer. Fig.com .21].actix.433.433. §9.3. 6.2.2.433. A small value (close to 0) results in faster convergence.2. Maximal number of in-sync indications.1. During each window period.4. dB Power Balancing Activate Power Balancing DL Reference Power offset to PCPICH Tx Power Adjustment Ratio Checkbox to activate Power Balancing throughout the network.

com . Fig. 7-3 shows the Radio Bearer Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Fig.1.3 Radio Bearer Control Configuration The Radio Bearer Control settings can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. 7-2 Power Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog 7. The traffic volume monitoring parameters are described in Table 7-3. 7-3 Radio Bearer Control tab of the RNC configuration dialo www.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 209 Fig.actix.

§10. The common channels parameters are described in Table 7-4. This guard would avoid multiple requests if e. The threshold indicating low MAC-d flow buffer level for the Iub capacity allocation algorithm. In the other case. bytes bytes ms 7.com . no DCH resources would be temporarily available. Table 7-4 Common channels configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter HSxPA Description Unit Activate HSDPA Activate STTD Activate Reference Power Adjustment CQI Feedback Cycle MAC-d Flow Buffer Low Threshold This flag globally determines whether the HSDPA shall be used in simulations.331. an interactive (I) or background (B) connection would first start on the FACH and later upgrade to DCH when there is enough data available.40a]. new data is requested. If the buffer level is below this threshold. a switching from FACH to DCH is initiated. If this flag is activated.6. This flag determines whether Space-Time Transmit Diversity is applied for the HSDPA.3. If this traffic volume threshold in DL is exceeded. A flag to decide whether the Reference Power Adjustment is to be taken into account. The time interval for which the switching condition from FACH to DCH at least must hold. ms Use FACH for PS I/B Connection Setup — Traffic Volume Underflow (on DCH) UL Threshold If the traffic volume is below this UL threshold and simultaneously the according DL condition is met (see next parameter) then a switching from DCH to FACH is initiated.actix. If the traffic volume is below this DL threshold and simultaneously the according UL condition is met (see previous parameter) then a switching from DCH to FACH is initiated.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 210 Table 7-3 Radio Bearer Control parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Pending Time After Trigger The minimal guard time between two requests for the same Transport Channel switching. 7-4 shows the Common Channels tab of the RNC configuration dialog.4 Common Channels Configuration The common channels can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. a switching from FACH to DCH is initiated. — — — ms % www. The CQI feedback cycle as defined in [25. Fig. The time interval for which the switching condition from DCH to FACH at least must hold.1.g. an interactive or background connection would immediately start on the DCH. bytes DL Threshold bytes Time To Trigger ms Traffic Volume Overflow (on RACH) UL Threshold DL Threshold Time To Trigger If this traffic volume threshold in UL is exceeded.

7-4 Common Channels tab of the RNC configuration dialog www.3. — — Constant Value This constant value is used by the UE to calculate the initial output power on PRACH according to the open loop Power Control procedure. The power offset between the last transmitted preamble and the control part of the message (added to the preamble power to receive the power of the message control part).actix.331. The required Eb/N0 decoding limit (for error free reception) of the decoder on the RACH.3.6. see [25.5. §10.3.331. the MAC-d flow scheduling is active even for a high buffer level. see [25.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 211 Parameter Description Unit MAC-d Flow Scheduling Despite High Buffer Level Activate HSUPA RACH If this flag is activated. §10.331. dB Power Ramp Step Power Offset p-m dB dB Eb/N0 Decoding Limit dB Fig.com .8]. The power step when no acquisition indicator is received.54].11]. §10. see [25. This checkbox activates the HSUPA in the network.

7-5 shows the Handover tab of the RNC configuration dialog. if supported by the selected RRM algorithms. Inter-Frequency Handover…. and Inter-RAT Handover… respectively. Button to open the inter-RAT Handover settings dialog. and the inter-RAT Handover. 7-5 Handover tab of the RNC configuration dialog Table 7-5 Global Handover configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Handover Support Description Unit Inter-Frequency Handover Inter-RAT Handover Activates inter-frequency handover for the entire RNC region. Activates inter-RAT handover for the entire RNC region. Fig. the Measurement Configuration group contains three subgroups in order to parameterize the intra-frequency.com . Their parameters can be configured in separate dialogs that are opened by using the appropriate buttons IntraFrequency Handover…. — — Measurement Configuration Intra-Frequency Handover… Inter-Frequency Handover… Inter-RAT Handover… Button to open the intra-frequency Handover settings dialog.actix. 7-8. 7-6 – Fig.1. In this tab. — — — www. Fig. Button to open the inter-frequency Handover settings dialog. These dialogs are shown in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 212 7. the inter-frequency. The parameters of the global Handover settings are described in Table 7-5. if supported by the selected RRM algorithms.5 Global Handover Configuration The global Handover settings are summarized in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog.

actix. this parameter directly corresponds to the maximal Active Set size. 7-6 Intra-frequency Handover settings dialog www.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 213 Parameter Common Description Unit Reporting Deactivation Threshold The reporting deactivation threshold determines the number of cells in the Active Set where no measurement reports are sent from the UE to the RNC any more. Basically. # Fig.com .

7-7 Inter-Frequency Handover settings dialog Fig.3. §14.331]. §14. The conditions for these Handover reporting events are globally defined in the RNC for its complete network area.actix.2.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 214 Fig. Table 7-6 Handover reporting events [25.com .3.2. for details refer to [R-TecRef]. 7-8 Inter-RAT Handover settings dialog In order to trigger a Handover.1.1. §14. [25. Only the cell individual offsets can be modified separately for every cell as explained in section 7.331. every UE sends according requests to the RNC if certain events occur.1] (for simulation only) www.4. The measurement quantities of the different Handover types are described in Table 7-7. A summary of the available Handover reporting events is given in Table 7-6.

Weighting Factor Hysteresis. Weighting Factor. Threshold 1B A PCPICH leaves the Reporting Range 1C 1D 1E 1F A non-active PCPICH becomes better than an active PCPICH Change of best cell A PCPICH becomes better than an absolute threshold A PCPICH becomes worse than an absolute threshold Inter-Frequency Reporting Events 2A 2B Change of best frequency The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of a non-used frequency is above a certain threshold The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a certain threshold Hysteresis. Threshold. Weighting Factor Table 7-7 Handover measurement quantities (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Measurement Quantity Measured Quantity (Intra-Frequency Handover) Measured Quantity (Inter-Frequency Handover) The measured quantity used for intra-frequency Handover. Reporting Range Hysteresis. ‘CPICH_RSCP’. 7-9 shows the Compressed Mode tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Weighting Factor.6 Compressed Mode Configuration The global settings for the Compressed Mode are summarized in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger Hysteresis. Reporting Range Hysteresis. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger. Threshold for non-used frequencies. Weighting Factor 2D 2F Inter-RAT Reporting Events 3A The estimated quality of the currently used UTRAN frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of the other system is above a certain threshold Hysteresis. and ‘Pathloss’. Weighting Factors Hysteresis. Fig. Reporting Interval Hysteresis. Reporting Interval. Threshold. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger.actix. Threshold Hysteresis.com . www.1. Weighting Factors Hysteresis.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 215 Reporting Event Description Characterized by Intra-Frequency Reporting Events 1A A PCPICH enters the Reporting Range Hysteresis. — — 7. The measured quantity used for inter-frequency Handover. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger. Threshold for used frequency. Threshold. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’ and ‘CPICH_RSCP’. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger.

an activation template can be defined for the CM measurements and the CM method. These flags indicate whether the code for CM has to be assigned from an alternative code tree (true) or from the ordinary code tree (false). The Calculate button can be used to update the values. respectively. Seperately the UL and the DL can be enabled for CM. The transmission gap lengths 1 and 2 (in terms of slots). and FDD. Table 7-8 Compressed Mode configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Activation Description Unit Measurement Purpose The measurement purpose indicates whether the TGPS (transmission gap pattern sequence) is to be used for FDD inter-frequency measurements or for GSM inter-system measurements. Furthermore. The distance between the starting slots of two consecutive transmission gaps within a TGP. The duration of TGP 2 (in terms of frames). — CM Method Use Alternative SC — — Transmission Gap Pattern TGSN The transmission gap starting slot number. The string ‘by event’ means that a Compressed Mode UE would measure either forever or until one of the events 2F. The number of TGPs within the TGP sequence.actix. The duration of the first and second transmission gap within the TGP. The duration of TGP 1 (in terms of frames). If enabled.com . the use of an alternative code tree can be supported which is recommended to avoid code blocking on the ordinary code tree (see [R-TecRef] for more information). separately for UL. These flags enable the CM method ‘Spreading Factor Reduction by Factor 2 (SF/2)’. These fields inform the user about the resulting measurement period for UEs in Compressed Mode. SF/2 is always applied as CM method. both TGL values are set to 7 slots – thereby supporting the single-frame method..Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 216 In this tab. The Transmission Gap Start Distance (in terms of slots). The parameters of the Compressed Mode in the RNC settings dialog are described in Table 7-8. or 3A occurs. which is applied as the transmission time reduction method in Radioplan. The Transmission Gap Pattern Repetition Count. GSM. According to halving the spreading factor. 0 stands for infinity. — TGL1 TGL2 # UMTS slots TGPL1 The TGP length 1. # UMTS frames # UMTS frames # UMTS slots # ms TGPL2 TGD TGPRC Resulting Measurement Period www. DL. The TGP length 2. The number of the first slot of the first transmission gap in the first TGP of the sequence. 2B.

Here only the UMTS related parameters are decscribed. www.2.com .actix. The OTSR parameters are described in Table 7-9. The general Node B parameters can be found in section 6. 7. Fig.1 OTSR Configuration The OTSR properties of a Node B can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. 7-9 Compressed Mode settings dialog 7. The Node B basically defines hardware parameters and the site location. 7-10 shows the OTSR tab of the Node B configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 217 Fig.3.2 Node B Configuration A site in a pure UMTS network is called Node B in the following.5.

This information is used e.g. — www.actix.com . for neighbor list optimization. see [R-ANP]. 7-10 OTSR tab of the Node B configuration dialog Table 7-9 OTSR parameters of a Node B Parameter Description Unit OTSR Technology Installed A flag to determine whether OTSR technology is installed at this Node B.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 218 Fig.

Fig. The hardware parameters are described in Table 7-10.com .2 Node B Hardware Configuration The hardware that a Node B is equipped with can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. A list with capacity cost values per radio link of a dedicated channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements.2. a single credit value is used for both UL and DL. Fig.actix.e. 7-11 shows the Hardware tab of the Node B configuration dialog. The available capacity credit for DL and UL in terms of number of channel elements. i. the hardware capacity may be used for either UL or DL. — Capacity Credit # CE Capacity Consumption Laws Cost per RLS (Dedicated Channels) Cost per RL (Dedicated Channels) Cost (Common Channels) A list with capacity cost values per radio link set of a dedicated channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 219 7. A list with capacity cost values per radio link of a common channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements. # CE # CE # CE www. 7-11 Hardware tab of the Node B configuration dialog Table 7-10 Node B hardware configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Resources Description Unit Use Global Credit If enabled.

Data Rate for Class A+B+C (Total) The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interface for all Release 99 (DCH) connections of class A.2. Data Rate for Class A+B (R99) Max. 7-12 Connection tab of the Node B configuration dialog Table 7-11 Node B connection parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Iub Interface Description Unit Max. 7-12 shows the Connection tab of the Node B configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 220 7.actix. and C. Mbps Mbps Mbps www. B. Data Rate for Class A (R99) Max. Fig. The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interface for all Release 99 (DCH) connections of classes A and B.3 Node B Connection Configuration The dimension of the Iub interface of a Node B can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. The connection parameters are described in Table 7-11. The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interace for all user data connections in total of casses A.com . Fig.

It is transmitted physically on the DPCCH and the DPDCH where the first one is permanently on whereas the latter one could have silence periods due to DTX. The Synchronization Channel alternates in a time division manner with the PCCPCH. The Broadcast Channel is transmitted on the PCCPCH over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power. See [RTecRef] for a deeper explanation on the RRM algorithms that are specified by some of these cell parameters. The HSDPA can be enabled on a per-cell basis. The Dedicated Channel is available on both UL and DL. The configured transmit power value represents an average power depending on the paging activity.actix. The FACHs are transmitted on the SCCPCH over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power. and retry policies can be configured. BCH SCH FACH AICH PICH DCH RACH HSDPA HSUPA The general cell parameters can be found in section 6. only the Primary one (i. repeated frames due to ARQ) with a power determined by the initial (i. Channel Type Switching with the FACH. scheduling modes. The first FACH is modeled to be always fully loaded. In a cell. It is permanently broadcast over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power. It needs to be transmitted at high power without power control because all terminals in a cell need to receive and decode it. Different scheduling modes and retry policies can be configured. in the case when a dedicated network layer (on a different carrier frequency) is reserved for the HSDPA. Furthermore. outer loop Power Control. The transmit power of PCCPCH and SCH is configured as a common value representing the average power over the entire slot. many different channels can be configured. It is only transmitted for a tenth of a slot.e. PCPICH) is modeled. The DPCH has fast inner loop Power Control. the AICH is modeled to be permanently transmitted with a configurable – but constant – power. e. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. initial (i. A cell can have several FACHs.3 UMTS Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific.e.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 221 7. and Compressed Mode.5. A cell could be used exclusively for the HSDPA.e. open loop) Power Control. The UL Random Access Channel is transmitted on the PRACH for one or two frames (excl. Different power modes. Soft/Softer Handover. Table 7-12 Available channels in a cell Channel CPICH Realization Out of the two Common Pilot Channels (physical channels). www.g. Furthermore. The following list in Table 7-12 gives a coarse overview. all other FACHs are used for Channel Type Switching with the DCH. The HSUPA can be enabled on a per-cell basis.4. open loop) Power Control. As the complementary DL channel for the connection setup procedure on the PRACH. the user can specify a maximum number of supported users.com . the user can specify a maximum number of supported users and the used HARQ settings. The Paging Indicator Channel is used in the paging procedure of the network. The availability of the RACH should be reflected in this Tx power.

Fig. SCCPCH/FACH dB.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 222 7.1 UMTS Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. % www. Furthermore. the number of additional SCCPCHs can be determined. # AICH PICH dB.actix.3. The constant average output power on any additional SCCPCH specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power.com . The constant AICH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor. dBm dBm PCCPCH/SCH First SCCPCH The constant average PCCPCH/SCH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power. The constant output power on the PCPICH. 7-13 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. The constant output power on the first SCCPCH specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor. The constant PICH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor. % Addit. Fig. % dB. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 7-13. 7-13 Resources tab of the UMTS cell configuration dialog Table 7-13 Radio resources settings of a UMTS cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power PCPICH Power Common Channels The maximal output power of the cell. dB dB.

The filter length. SCCPCH. PCCPCH. This string denotes the scrambling code domain that the scrambling code of this cell belongs to. such as DPCH. Max. The remaining cell Tx power can be utilized by other channels. dBm The assembly of the maximally assignable cell output power is depicted in Fig. this string can be empty. and the initial DL Power Control. or HSPDSCH. — # UMTS frames Downlink Load (Optimization) Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only.com .actix. and PICH) ranges between 10% and 20% of the total cell Tx power. This value can be initialized from the total DL power from a network simulation. 7-14. A checkbox to deploy a second code tree at this cell. the UL Admission Control. PRACH. AICH. the AICH activity should be configured accordingly higher in order to take the increased number of PRACH acknowledgment signaling on this channel into consideration. The valid range of the scrambling code number is 0 … 511. On the other hand. the compound Tx power of the common control channels (PCPICH. These channels are modeled with their average effective power as if they all were broadcast permanently. Typically. Output Power Available Cell Output Power available for Transport Channels PCPICH PCCPCH SCCPCH AICH PICH Fig. If the RACH is available. — Scrambling Code Domain Second Code Tree Available — — Tx/Rx Power Filter (for simulation only) Activated Window Size A checkbox to enable the filtering of Tx/Rx powers at this cell. 7-14 Assembly of the cell output power in UMTS The filtering of the Tx powers influences the DL Congestion Control. the Rx power filtering has an impact on the fast UL Congestion Control.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 223 Parameter Scrambling Code Description Unit Code Number The scrambling code number that is assigned to this cell. www. If no scrambling code domain is defined.

Fig. It represents to total power radiated from that cell.3. or ‘TryAdjacentCell’.4. 7-15 HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog Table 7-14 HSDPA parameters of a cell Parameter Description Unit Activate HSDPA Admission A checkbox to enable the HSDPA at this cell. # — www. Number of HSDPA Users Retry Policy The maximum number of HSDPA users allowed in the cell. The distinct HSDPA settings are described in Table 7-14. There is the possibility to initialize the total power parameter of all cells from a dynamic or snapshot simulation.actix.DL. Fig.2 HSDPA Cell Configuration The HSDPA settings of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. A dialog appears where the option Individual Cell Tx Power must be selected. ‘TryDCHSetup’. 7.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 224 The total cell power parameter of a cell is only used for creating Ec/I0 plots.1. This can be done by choosing the context menu function Init Total Cell Tx Power with Parameter at the result parameter ‘PHY. — Max.com . Possible values are ‘Rejection’.Cell » DL_TxPower [dBm]’ in the Results tab of the tree window. 7-15 shows the HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog. the Ec/I0 plot can be generated by choosing the icon (tooltip Plot Interference Ratio) from the views toolbar. After the total powers have been set properly in the cells. customized Ec/I0 plots can be generated. By assigning individual total power values to the cells of a network. The retry policy for service requests on the HSDPA. More details about the generation of Ec/I0 plots can be found in section 3.

e. A checkbox to enable the F-DPCH for this cell instead of a separate A-DPCH for each user. — Algorithm The type of scheduling algorithm in the shared MAC of the HSDPA. specified as PCPICH power offset. or ‘CQI Offset’.actix. i. The minimal HS-SCCH power. The measurement power offset in relation to the PCPICH transmit power. The maximal number of stop-and-wait processes maintained by the cell per UE. The maximal HS-SCCH power. to compensate for CQI mapping offsets to achieve a given initial BLER. The PCPICH Power Offset if the power mode ‘PCPICHOffset’ is chosen. The power mode of the HS-PDSCH. A checkbox to enable CQI adjustment for HSDPA. specified as PCPICH power offset. The user can choose between the options ‘Chase’ (soft combining of all transmitted TBs) and ‘IR’ (incremental redundancy). HS-SCCH Power Enable F-DPCH The number of HS-PDSCH used in the cell. A checkbox to apply the maximum configured HS data rate for the QoS Profiling feature. The power mode of the HS-SCCH. The maximal number of retransmissions per stop-andwait process.com . and ‘Proportional Fair’. The window size for the HARQ. — MAC-d Flow Buffer Size Measurement Power Offset Use CQI Adjustment # TB dB — Use Max. The number of HS-SCCH used in the cell. — Max. Retransmissions Window Size Radio Resources # # # TBS Number of HS-PDSCH Enable 16QAM HS-PDSCH Power Mode PCPICH Power Offset Power Margin Number of HS-SCCH HS-SCCH Power Mode HS-SCCH Power Offset Min. Bit Rate for QoS Profiling HARQ — Redundancy Version The version of the redundancy exploitation used by the HARQ. ‘DPCH Offset’. The power margin that is left up to the maximal cell output power if the power mode ‘Residue’ is chosen.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 225 Parameter Description Unit No User Data on DCH Scheduling A checkbox to use this cell exclusively for HSDPA. Processes per UE Max. # — — dB dB # — dB dB dB — www. A checkbox to determine whether 16QAM is utilized as HSDSCH modulation. Possible values are ‘PCPICH Offset’. i. HS-SCCH Power Max. no user data is transmitted on the DCH. The flow buffer size of the dedicated MAC for HSDPA. Possible values are ‘Round Robin’. ‘Best CQI’.e. The HS-SCCH power offset for either of the power modes. Possible values are ‘PCPICHOffset’ or ‘Residue’.

Table 7-15 HSUPA parameters of a cell (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Activate HSUPA Admission A checkbox to enable the HSDPA at this cell.3 HSUPA Cell Configuration The HSUPA settings of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. there is a different HSDPA tab that contains some settings relevant for network optimization. Fig. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 226 In case the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator Module is not licensed. ‘ResourceRequest-Round Robin’. — Max. ‘MaxTP-Equal’ and ‘MaxTPRoundRobin’. # Algorithm The type of scheduling algorithm in the HSUPA MAC. 7-16 shows the HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog.com . 7-17 shows the HSUPA tab of the cell configuration dialog. Possible values are ‘ResourceRequest-Equal’. Scheduled EDCH # www.3. Possible values are ‘Rejection’ and ‘TryDCHSetup’. Retransmissions Scheduling The maximal number of retransmissions per stop-and-wait process. — Max. The distinct HSUPA settings are described in Table 7-15. 7-16 HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog for optimization 7. The retry policy for service requests on the HSUPA. The maximal number of E-DCHs scheduled on the HSUPA. Fig.actix. # — Max. The distinct parameters can be found in Table 7-14 given above. Number of HSUPA Users Retry Policy HARQ The maximal number of HSUPA users allowed in the cell.

The number of E-RGCH/E-HICH available in the cell. A checkbox to enable the long TTI of 10ms. 7-17 HSUPA tab of the cell configuration dialog www. The power offset of the E-RGCH and E-HICH in relation to the DPCH transmit power.actix. Bit Rate for QoS Profiling Enable Short TTI (2ms) Enable Long TTI (10ms) Radio Resources The maximal number of E-DCHs rescheduled in an HSUPA TTI. # — — — Number of EAGCH Number of ERGCH/E-HICH E-AGCH Power Offset to PCPICH E-RGCH/E-HICH Power Offset to DPCH The number of E-AGCH available in the cell.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 227 Parameter Description Unit Max. # # dB dB Fig. A checkbox to enable the short TTI of 2ms. A checkbox to apply the maximum configured HS data rate for the QoS Profiling feature. The power offset of the E-AGCH in relation to the PCPICH transmit power.com . Rescheduled E-DCH per TTI Use max.

7-18 Handover tab of the cell configuration dialog Table 7-16 Handover and Cell Selection parameters of a cell (for simulation only) Parameter Handover Description Unit Cell Individual Offset The cell individual offset of the reporting range for the Handover reporting events 1A and 1B.com . The boxes are only enabled if cell parameter templates have been loaded in the RNC. dB Inter-RAT handover supported Inter-frequency handover supported Templates — — — Cell Selection/Reselection Measurement Quantity The measured quantity used for cell (re-)selection.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 228 7.3. Fig. refer to section 7. A checkbox to enable handovers to GSM at this cell. 7-18 shows the Handover tab of the cell configuration dialog.1. The distinct parameters are described in Table 7-16. A checkbox to enable inter-frequency handovers from this cell. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’ and ‘CPICH_RSCP’. and inter-RAT handover (IRAT). refer to Table 7-6.4 Handover and Cell Selection Parameter Settings The settings for Handover and Cell Selection with cell specific parameters can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. interfrequency handover (IEF).1. Pulldown boxes for selecting parameter set templates for intra-frequency handover (IAF). Fig.actix. — www.

7-19 Generic Load Control tab of the cell configuration dialog www.5 Load Control Configuration The load control of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. dBm dB dB dB dBm s 7.3. Hysteresis value for cell (re-)selection if the pilot Ec/I0 is the measured quantity. Pilot RSCP (Qrxlevmin) Qhyst value (RSCP meas. Fig. The distinct load control parameters are described in Table 7-17. Fig. Allowed UL Tx Power Cell Reselection Timer The minimal CPICH RSCP level to allow a service admission at this cell. 7-19 shows the Generic Load Control tab of the cell configuration dialog. Hysteresis value for cell (re-)selection if the pilot RSCP is the measured quantity.) Min. The maximally allowed UL Tx power of a UE to successfully (re-)select a cell.com .) Max.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 229 Parameter Description Unit Min. The minimal CPICH Ec/I0 level to allow a service admission at this cell. The “trigger” time for which the cell reselection condition must be fulfilled. Pilot Ec/Io (Qqualmin) Qhyst value (Ec/Io meas.

New services are blocked if the instantaneous cell output power exceeds this threshold. The DL threshold relative to the maximal cell output power for the Congestion Control. The maximally allowed UL load factor for the Congestion Control to control the network load for this cell. Since this maximal power can usually be exceeded only for a short period of time (several UMTS frames). The maximal DL DPCH transmit power for reference spreading factor 128. above this threshold only new SHO links can be admitted. the relative thresholds must be negative dB-values. Reasonably. the value must be negative. Connections with a high Tx power are handled by the Congestion Control if the instantaneous cell output power exceeds this threshold. This value must be greater than or equal to the Admission Control UL load factor. The admission control threshold defines an upper limit for the admission of new service attempts. dBm dBm The threshold values of the DL load control are relative to the maximal cell output power. 7-20. …. Reasonably.actix. 1). they are lower than the maximal cell output power. 1). …. — — Radioplan DL Load Control Admission Control Threshold The DL threshold relative to the maximal cell output power for the admission of new service attempts. i. # Radioplan Power Control Min.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 230 Table 7-17 Load Control parameters of a cell (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Radioplan UL Load Control Maximum UL Load for Admission Control Maximum UL Load for Congestion Control The maximally allowed UL load factor for the Admission Control to control the network load for this cell.e. DL DPCH Power Max. i. the value must be negative. Only new SHO links can be allocated. dB Congestion Control Threshold dB Compressed Mode Max.e. as shown in Fig.com . The permissible range is [0. DL DPCH Power The minimal DL DPCH transmit power for reference spreading factor 128. The permissible range is [0. www. Number of CM Links The maximum number of links in a cell that can be in Compressed Mode.

5. thus. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6. For such purposes.actix. scrambling code lists as *. the new settings are first only shown in the cell settings overview dialog without actually making them effective in the project. For example. In case of importing a scrambling code list.4. it is necessary to reload those old scrambling codes into the project before the measurements are imported.5. The cell settings overview dialog has according functions in its Tools Scrambling Codes pulldown menu. 7. a repeater is a system technology specific element. Output Power Available Cell Output Power Congestion Control Threshold Admission Threshold Fig. www. By choosing either of the entries Import… or Export… a file open or save dialog is shown where the respective file can be selected.com . 7-20 Relative DL Load Control thresholds 7.3.6 Scrambling Code List Handling In some cases it can be useful to change the scrambling code assignment of the cells in a project. Fig.1 UMTS Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 7-18. This way the user can first check the correctness of the scrambling codes before confirming these settings by clicking the OK button of the cell settings overview dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 231 Max. 7. 7-21 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and.csv files (comma separated) can be exported or imported. when drive test measurements shall be imported and the drive test was performed at a time when there were different scrambling codes used in the network than in the current network plan. It is always connected to a donor cell.4 UMTS Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. the same sytem technology as the donor cell.

7-21 Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog Table 7-18 Repeater UMTS resources settings of a cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power PCPICH Power Downlink Load The maximal output power of the repeater. although most parameters are related to UMTS. dBm dBm Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only. a specific user configuration is not necessary. This value can be initialized from the total DL power from a network simulation.6 for more information. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization.actix. The constant output power on the PCPICH. See section 6. However. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection.com . 7. dBm The common control channels at the repeater are controlled proportionally to its PCPICH output power applying the same offsets as in the donor cell.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 232 Fig. www.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies.

measurement analysis.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 8-1.3. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.3.2 CDMA2000 Base Station Configuration A site in a pure CDMA2000 network is called base station (BS) in the following. 8. dBm Code Number — Scrambling Code Domain — www.4. and pathloss tuning. Fig. Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any RNC configuration.5. This string denotes the scrambling code domain that the scrambling code of this cell belongs to.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 233 8 CDMA2000 RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of CDMA2000 specific project items in Radioplan.com . dBm dBm dB Downlink Load Total Power Scrambling Code An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6.2. There are no CDMA2000 specific parameters at the BS. 8. The general RNC parameters can be found in section 6. site selection. The valid range of the scrambling code number is 0 … 511.1 RNC Configuration The CDMA2000 specific network controller is called RNC.5. 8.actix. this string can be empty. Projects with CDMA2000 network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization. The scrambling code number that is assigned to this cell.3 CDMA2000 Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific.5. The constant output power on the FPICH. 8. Table 8-1 Radio resources settings of a CDMA2000 cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power FPICH Power Other CCH Power Offset The maximal output power of the cell. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. 8-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. The compound average output power on the other CCHs specified by an offset to the FPICH output power. If no scrambling code domain is defined. There are no CDMA2000 specific parameters at the RNC.

8-2. FCH.1. After the total powers have been set properly in the cells. www. e. The remaining cell Tx power can be utilized by other channels. Output Power Available Cell Output Power available for Transport Channels FPICH other CCH Fig. It represents to total power radiated from that cell. Typically. Max.g. By assigning individual total power values to the cells of a network.com . 8-2 Assembly of the cell output power in CDMA2000 The total cell power parameter of a cell is only used for creating Ec/I0 plots. the Ec/I0 plot can be generated by choosing the icon (tooltip Plot Interference Ratio) from the views toolbar.actix. 8-1 Resources tab of the CDMA2000 cell configuration dialog The assembly of the maximally assignable cell output power is depicted in Fig. the compound Tx power of the common control channels ranges between 10% and 20% of the total cell Tx power.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 234 Fig.4. These channels are modeled with their average effective power as if they all were broadcast permanently. customized Ec/I0 plots can be generated. More details about the generation of Ec/I0 plots can be found in section 3. A dialog appears where the option Individual Cell Tx Power must be selected.

By choosing either of the entries Import… or Export… a File Open or Save dialog is shown where the respective file can be selected. a repeater is a system technology specific element. the new settings are first only shown in the cell settings overview dialog without actually making them effective in the project. In case of importing a scrambling code list.5.4. 8-3 Resources tab of the CDMA2000 repeater configuration dialog www.3. This way the user can first check the correctness of the scrambling codes before confirming these settings by clicking the OK button of the cell settings overview dialog.csv files (comma separated) can be exported or imported.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. It is always connected to a donor cell. when drive test measurements shall be imported and the drive test was performed at a time when there were different scrambling codes used in the network than in the current network plan. it is necessary to reload those old scrambling codes into the project before the measurements are imported. For example.5. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 8-2. scrambling code lists as *.2 Scrambling Code List Handling In some cases.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 235 8.actix. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. it can be useful to change the scrambling code assignment of the cells in a project. 8-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. Fig.com . 8. For such purposes. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6.4 CDMA2000 Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. Fig. thus. The cell settings overview dialog has according functions in its Tools Scrambling Codes pulldown menu. 8.

actix. a specific user configuration is not necessary.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies. www. although most parameters are related to UMTS. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization.6 for more information. dBm The common control channels at the repeater are controlled proportionally to its FPICH output power applying the same offsets as in the donor cell. dBm dBm Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 236 Table 8-2 Output power settings of a CDMA2000 repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power FPICH Power Downlink Load The maximal output power of the repeater. See section 6. However.com . 8. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection. The constant output power on the FPICH.

3. Fig. There are no GSM specific parameters at the BS. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. There are no GSM specific parameters at the BSC.5. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6. Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any BSC configuration. 9-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog.com . The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 9-1. and pathloss tuning. 9.1 GSM Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog.4. 9. measurement analysis. 9.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 237 9 GSM RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of GSM specific project items in Radioplan.3 GSM Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific.3.actix. Projects with GSM network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization. 9. site selection. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.2 GSM Base Station Configuration A site in a pure GSM network is called base station (BS) in the following.2. Fig.5.1 BSC Configuration The GSM specific network controller is called BSC. 9-1 Resources tab of the GSM cell configuration dialog www.5.

sector 1…4’. — — Hopping Strategy TCH List Defines which hopping strategy is used for this cell. ‘Baseband’.g. Table 9-2 Transmitter table parameters of a GSM cell Parameter Description Unit Tx Active The Tx identifier. site 1…4’. ‘Synth. The active flag of the respective transmitter. If at least the BCCH Active flag is disabled. — — HSN MAIO Hopping Sequence Number Mobile Allocation Index Offset — — www. ‘No hopping’. For other TCH. The Location Area Code for the cell. The list of channel numbers used by the respective Tx. Fig.2 GSM Transmitters Configuration The transmitters of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. A semicolon separated list of the frequency channel numbers. dBm Serving Cell Calculation Min. The distinct table columns for the transmitter settings are described in Table 9-2.com . the cell’s transmitter is considered as inactive. dB CI LAC BSIC The Cell Identity of the cell.3.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 238 Table 9-1 Radio resources settings of a GSM cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The output power of the cell on the BCCH at the antenna connector. and ‘Synth. The Base Station Color Code of the cell. a semicolon separated list of channel numbers can be given (for frequency hopping). for concentric cells). — — NCC BCC The Network Color Code of the cell. DL RxPower (Coverage cutoff) from the Configuration Data Plot dialog is applied (see section 3.1). In case of the BCCH only a single channel number is allowed. If no value is specified the Min.actix.4. The choices are: ‘Default’. This can either be ‘BCCH’ or a sequential number for the TCH. — — 9. RxPower Threshold The minimum DL received power required for being served by this cell (e. 9-2 shows the Transmitters tab of the cell configuration dialog. Parameters — HoMarginPBGT Identification The handover margin power budget. dBm Forbidden Frequencies List of frequencies which are not allowed for this cell.

1 GSM Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog.actix. 9. 9-2 Transmitters tab of the GSM cell configuration dialog 9.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 239 Parameter Description Unit Number of Logical Ch.5.4. Fig. It is always connected to a donor cell. Gives the number of logical channels. one non-BCCH Tx can support up to 8 full-rate speech logical traffc channels. www. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and.com . The distinct output power settings are described in Table 9-3. thus. a repeater is a system technology specific element. — Fig. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. 9-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog.4 GSM Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. For example. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6.5.

dBm CI LAC The Cell Identity of the repeater. See section 6. However.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 240 Fig. The Location Area Code for the repeater. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization. a specific user configuration is not necessary. although most parameters are related to UMTS. — — 9. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection. 9-3 Resources tab of the GSM repeater configuration dialog Table 9-3 Output power settings of a GSM repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power Identification The output power of the repeater on the BCCH at the antenna connector. www.6 for more information.actix.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies.com .

Projects with iDEN network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization.4.Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 241 10 iDEN RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of iDEN specific project items in Radioplan. Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any Network Controller configuration. Table 10-1 Radio resources settings of an iDEN cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The output power of the cell on the BCCH at the antenna connector. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 10-1. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6. A semicolon separated list of the frequency channel numbers.5. 10-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. 10.5. 10. 10. site selection.1). There are no iDEN specific parameters at the BS.3.5. BSIC — Color Code The color code for this cell.3. dBm Serving Cell Calculation Min. for concentric cells). The general BS parameters can be found in section 6. RxPower Threshold The minimum DL received power required for being served by this cell (e. measurement analysis.1 Network Controller Configuration There are no iDEN specific parameters at the Network Controller. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. Fig. 10. dBm Forbidden Frequencies List of frequencies which are not allowed for this cell. If no value is specified the Min.1 iDEN Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. DL RxPower (Coverage cutoff) from the Configuration Data Plot dialog is applied (see section 3.actix.com .g.2.2 iDEN Base Station Configuration A site in a pure iDEN network is called base station (BS) in the following. and pathloss tuning. — www.4. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6.3 iDEN Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific.

Fig. Fig.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 242 Fig. 10-2 shows the Transmitters tab of the cell configuration dialog.actix.3. 10-2 Transmitters tab of the iDEN cell configuration dialog www.2 iDEN Transmitters Configuration The transmitters of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. The distinct table columns for the transmitter settings are described in Table 10-2. 10-1 Resources tab of the iDEN cell configuration dialog 10.

Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 243 Table 10-2 Transmitter table parameters of a iDEN cell Parameter Description Unit Tx Active The Tx identifier.5. If at least the BCCH Active flag is disabled. 10-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog.4.1 iDEN Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. This can either be ‘BCCH’ or a sequential number for the TCH. Gives the number of logical channels. 10. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. the cell’s transmitter is considered as inactive. thus.4 iDEN Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. — — Channel Number of Logical Ch. The active flag of the respective transmitter. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. Fig. a repeater is a system technology specific element. Fig. — — 10. The list of channel numbers used by the respective Tx. 10-3 Resources tab of the iDEN repeater configuration dialog www. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6.com . The distinct output power settings are described in Table 10-3.actix. It is always connected to a donor cell.5.

com .5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies. a specific user configuration is not necessary.6 for more information. www. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization.Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 244 Table 10-3 Output power settings of an iDEN repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The output power of the repeater on the BCCH at the antenna connector. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection.actix. See section 6. although most parameters are related to UMTS. However. dBm 10.

3.1 Network Controller Configuration There are no WiMAX specific parameters at the Network Controller. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6. site selection.4. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6.2 WiMAX Base Station Configuration A site in a pure WiMAX network is called base station (BS) in the following. Table 11-1 Radio resources settings of a WiMAX cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The average output power on the pilot channel at the antenna connector. for concentric cells).1 WiMAX Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog.1). Projects with WiMAX network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization. There are no WiMAX specific parameters at the BS. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 11-1.5. dBm Serving Cell Calculation Min. and pathloss tuning.3 WiMAX Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. — www. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.com . dBm Channels Channel Number The WiMAX channel number of this cell. 11. DL RxPower (Coverage cutoff) from the Configuration Data Plot dialog is applied (see section 3.5. measurement analysis. 11-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. RxPower Threshold The minimum DL received power required for being served by this cell (e.actix. 11. Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any Network Controller configuration.4.Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 245 11 WiMAX RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of WiMAX specific project items in Radioplan. 11.2. 11.3.5.g. If no value is specified the Min. Fig.

It is always connected to a donor cell.1 WiMAX Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. 11.com .actix. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6. Fig. thus.4 WiMAX Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. 11-1 Resources tab of the WiMAX cell configuration dialog 11.5. a repeater is a system technology specific element. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. Table 11-2 Output power settings of a WiMAX repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Pilot Power The average pilot power of the repeater. dBm www. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and.Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 246 Fig. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 11-2. 11-2 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog.5.4.

11-2 Resources tab of the WiMAX repeater configuration dialog 11.6 for more information. although most parameters are related to UMTS. www.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 247 Fig.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization. However. See section 6.com . a specific user configuration is not necessary. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection.

com .actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 248 www.

12-1 Network performance data management The results import module analyzes the recorded network performance data files and filters the parameters according to the conditions mentioned above.actix. specify an analysis area commonly smaller than the simulation area to load the network performance data for a specific region. and binary result data files stored in the file system. For example. Other examples of performance data could be drive test data files. All imported parameters are converted into meta information (parameter name. define a time interval by category to load the data for that specific interval. 12-1 shows the general network performance data management procedure: ActixOne Platform WiNeS Simulator Measurement Data Simulation Results Files PM Counters Files Measurement Files Results Import Module Actix Radioplan Network Performance Management Measurement Device SQL Database Binary Binary Results Binary Data Results Results Data Data Fig. The SQL database manages the binary files completely. The following scheme in Fig. www. type and size of data) that is stored in the database. it is possible to • • • select specific parameters and categories from the results that shall be loaded into Radioplan. In order to grant an efficient network data analysis with reasonable memory requirements. network measurement data can be directly loaded from the ActixOne Platform into Radioplan. The advantage of this solution is a considerably faster data access and virtually no limitation on the amount of network data stored.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 249 12 Network Data Evaluation 12. All those data files can be loaded into Radioplan in order to be analyzed and postprocessed. performance counter data files or result files of the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator.com .1 Network Performance Data Management Network performance data that are to be evaluated can originate from different sources. Only the available disk space on the file system sets a physical restriction for them. Thus the user need not care about the handling of the binary results data.

Parameters can be analyzed over time. Furthermore. 12-2 shows the general result analysis capabilities directly supported by Radioplan. as spatial plot or as a statistical distribution. these categories are defined together with their parameters and default result loading settings in the resultparameters.ini file. These files are installed together with Radioplan and should only be modified with caution. it is possible to load several result sets4 into one project like discussed in section 5. A summary report can be created for each result set that contains most of the key performance indicators essential for a qualified network performance and capacity analysis. 12.actix. The resultparameterstrans.g. Fig. result sets from other projects are accessible for a comparison which is especially useful for the evaluation of e. All result data can also be presented in tables which enables an easy internal analysis due to a variety of built-in statistical analysis functions. Each result parameter is specified by a line together with its category. type. default loading flag. for measurement data from a measurement device the result parameters and categories are defined in the resultparameters_measurements. a simulation series (refer to [R-Sim]). Also an external analysis is possible due to flexible data export functions. If the feature AskForMDBOnStart is switched on that wines. and a short description. Result parameters are grouped by categories.ini file is used by Radioplan to translate result parameter names from previous versions into an updated naming convention scheme. Cell-based parameters can be visualised.9. They area tab-delimited ASCII files.2 Binary File System Configuration and Default Parameter Import Settings The location where binary files are stored can be specified globally in the wines.ini file (see [R-Admin]) by default. the user is prompted for both the database each time Radioplan is started.ini files. For the network simulator. they can be analyzed with respect to different aspects.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 250 In order to allow for a comparison between network performance results from different simulation runs or against measurement data.3 Concept of Result Analysis Once the network performance data have been loaded into Radioplan.ini file. The binary file system is always located below the directory of the Radioplan database file. 12. Please see [R-Admin] and the relevant module specific user guides for more information on these *.com . 4 all parameters loaded into Radioplan in one import process www.ini file.

clutter statistics.actix. chart diagram. or to tune network planning data with real measurement data.com . and table) can easily be transformed from one into another. histogram. or direct pixel values per pixel New Result Set New Result Set New Result Set Histogram histogram out of values Table Store in Project (as Report) cell-based values Cell Visual Fig. or a set of performance counters. The principal data conversion opportunities are presented in Fig. Radioplan offers two opportunities: www.e. for example. surface plot. cell visual. a set of drive test files. 12-3. To enable the direct comparison of results obtained from different simulation runs. Analysis in Cell Visuals Parameter Set Temporal Analysis in X-Y Chart Diagrams Inspecting Individual Plot Data Statistical Analysis in Histogram Charts Summary Report in a formatted table Presentation in a Table Internal/External Analysis Fig. 12-2 Supported types of result analysis The great flexibility of the data evaluation in Radioplan is furthermore evident from the fact that all the different data presentation means (i. Moreover. it is possible to convert arbitrary data given in a table into a new result set.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 251 Spatial Analysis in Surface Plots Manipulating Surface Plots Coinciding Different Surface Plots Statistical Analysis of Surface Plots Identifying Trouble Spots Cell Param. a set of results from one simulation run. Surface Plot cell-mapped or position based values Chart Diagram x and y values histogram. 12-3 Data transformation options supported by Radioplan A result set is the summary of all parameter sets loaded into Radioplan in one import step.

The cell areas are determined from the pathloss data and the pilot powers as given by the Best Serving Cell layer described in section 3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 252 • • Several result sets can be held in a project in parallel. Fig. the parameter names are extended by an appropriate numbered suffix.4. UE-specific parameters can be presented directly at their associated position. results from other projects cannot be modified. www. In order to distinguish the parameters from different result sets. or a parameter).1. In surface plots. Other parameters can be displayed as cell visuals or also mapped on the cell areas according to their associated site or cell. UE-specific parameters additionally have an associated position.e. Moreover. alternatively. The different projects with their result sets. all parameters are monitored in conjunction with a time stamp. This means that a user can only see the results from those projects that he has authorized access to. and parameter sets are displayed in a hierarchical tree structure in the Results tab of the tree window. a result set. This is indicated by the combined symbol . 12-4. a category. in particular they cannot be deleted. This suffix is added automatically and it is unique for all parameters of a result set. A parameter itself is a record that contains all the items given in Table 12-1. 12-4 Sample view of the Results tab of the tree window In general.com . An example of the hierarchical result parameters tree for results from a dynamic network simulation is shown in Fig. result categories. The visibility of other projects’ results is controlled by the user rights management. Result sets from other projects in the database can be made accessible by choosing Show Results of all Projects from the context menu of an arbitrary item in the Result tab of the tree window (i. a project. Parameter names from different result sets are properly amended by suffices as described below.actix. The symbol indicates the time relation of the parameters. The time stamp is given in frames (in case of UMTS/FDD simulation data) or in seconds.

g. The unit is separated by an underscore. Positions are available for UE-specific parameters as well as for measurement data. The time stamp (UMTS frame number or time instant) when the parameter was monitored. the secondary network element is denoted as Assigned NE to characterize this unique relationship. Carrier Frequency (optional) A parameter set is the agglomerate of all monitored values for a specific parameter represented by its name. are distinguished by their instance number. The instance number is unique over all UEs.g. For this purpose. UEs. this parameter contains the snapshot number. Different network elements. A flag for numerical values indicates. an analysis with regard to the carrier frequency can be useful. These parameters can be presented in spatial views. Value Time Stamp Position (X and Y value) [m] (optional) ID Instance Assigned NE (optional) The current position of a UE at the given frame number. measures related to inter-frequency HO can be associated with an indicator for the carrier frequency. In case of snapshot simulation results. if the parameter is related to the ID and to the Assigned NE. An ID of an assigned network element. a power value related to a UE can be distinguished by this parameter for different cells. Read more about the result parameter capabilities in section 12.1). e. please refer to [R-Meas]. the term ‘parameter’ is also used as a synonym for a parameter set. for example a Tx power from a cell to a certain UE instance. Especially in hierarchical network structures. For instance. The value for the parameter. The owner of the parameter (e. Parameters without position information can nevertheless be displayed in a surface plot. If a parameter is associated with two specific network elements. 12. each creating a new result data layer.4. Radioplan presents the unit in brackets []. beginning from 1. Parameters have certain properties: • • • • Parameters are assigned to a specific network element. In the sequel. They are mapped onto the cell coverage areas as predicted by the Best Serving Cell plot (see section 3.1.com . the Parameter DL_SIR_DPDCH_dB stands for DPDCH Downlink SIR and is given in dB. cell.g. An instance number to distinguish between different instances of e. Parameters related to different carrier frequencies or network layers as. In indicator for the carrier frequency or network layer that this parameter belongs to. if the value is a finite value or a NaN (-Infinity and +Infinity values are handled as NaN’s).Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 253 Table 12-1 Items of a parameter Item Description Parameter Name The name of the parameter. [R-TecRef].4. e. For example.actix. a UE. a UE type. It can be used to select result parameters for presentation in different ways and www. The key to the extremely flexible result analysis system of Radioplan is the results selection dialog. each result parameter has a context menu that can be selected with the right mouse button. …).g.. site.4 Analyzing Result Parameters All result parameters in the Results tab of the tree window can be displayed and analyzed in various ways. can be either a numeric or a string value.

The configuration of the results selection dialog is detailed in section 12. and Delete All Results in Project… is used to remove all result sets with their parameters that are loaded into the currently open project from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message). exchange the IDs of two measured cells in a measurement result set. and Show Results of all Projects is used to make the results of all those projects visible that the user is authorized to access according to the user rights management. Then a dialog with a mapping table between old and new values is shown. For a result set created by a performance counter import. see [R-Meas]. Aggregate Result Set… can be used to aggregate the contained data. www.actix. 12-5. The entire result set – only of the currently opened project – has some more functions in its context menu: • • • • • Edit… is used to edit all available IDs. Collapse All is used to collapse the category folders in the tree completely.12. refer to Fig. a certain selection in the results selection dialog represents a filter for the result database of the current Radioplan project. see section 12.4. Assigned NEs. The new values in the right column can be edited. for example: ▫ For a result set created by a drive test measurement import. More functions may be available depending on the type of the result set. the Edit… function from the context menu can be used.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 254 granularity. Delete Result Set… is used to remove the entire results set including all of its parameters from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message).4. Delete this Parameter… is used to remove the corresponding parameter from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message). Create Default Plots… can be used as a shortcut for the display of surface plots for selected parameters. With this function it is possible to e. Expand All is used to expand the category folders in the tree completely. 12. Basically. Rename Result Set… is used to assign this result set a new name. and any other strings in the result set. either by choosing an existing string value from the pulldown list or completely freely by entering a new string.com .g. Direct Surface Plot is used to directly create a surface plot layer from this result parameter applying the current settings in the results selection dialog.1 Analysis Capabilities of Result Parameters Each result parameter has a context menu that offers the following functionalities: • • • • • • Select… leads to the results selection dialog. if their feeders are exchanged. ▫ In order to manipulate the IDs contained in a result set.2.

First all result sets that shall be deleted must be selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse or using keyboard commands (arrow keys in combination with <Shift>. Fig. <Ctrl>. Then all the selected result sets are deleted in one go by either choosing Delete Result Set… from one of its context menus or by pressing <Delete>. Using this dialog.2 Results Selection Dialog The key to analyze the result data in Radioplan is the results selection dialog. www. there are more options for the deletion of multiple result sets in one step. A warning dialog appears in order to avoid unintended deletion.com . 12.actix. 12-6 shows the results selection dialog. 12-5 Edit result set IDs dialog In addition to the context menu entries to delete result sets.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 255 Fig. all relevant settings can be adjusted for the parameter analysis – as described in the following sections.4. and <Space>). It can be accessed directly from the context menu of the desired parameter or by double-clicking the parameter item itself.

The latter two filter conditions can be specified in the Spatial/Temporal Restrictions groups as explained in subsection 12. the currently selected parameter is shown in the combo box and can be changed here as well. or carrier frequencies as well as by selecting an observation time period and/or a geographical region (simulation/analysis area). that the parameters of all the available entries in the respective category (ID. and carrier frequencies. Assigned NEs.4. The operating mode of the result parameter selection as a filter is demonstrated in Fig. Assigned NE. Instances. Instance.g.com . The default entry ‘ALL’ means.1 Result Filter In the left part of the dialog.2. 12-7. Instances. a traced mobile in a very flexible manner.2. www. The user can decide whether he would like to analyze the data of all network element items of a certain parameter set or he can choose the data of a subset or a single network element.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 256 Fig.5. In other words the desired parameter sets can be filtered by selecting one or more IDs. This technique enables the analysis of a parameter from a global point of view down to a specific instance. e. Subset of Cells by Carrier) are considered during the data analysis.4.actix. 12-6 Results selection dialog 12. Note that the underlying data are loaded into the memory for the currently selected parameter set to determine all available IDs. Assigned NEs.

Even non-consecutive Instances can be selected using the <Ctrl> key. whereas all cells in this subset transmit on the same carrier frequency.actix. a subset of cells can be selected. then this parameter is already preselected. histogram. It is derived from the parameter name and the settings in the results selection dialog. Even nonconsecutive IDs can be selected using the <Ctrl> key. diagram. and is also displayed in the created presentation of the parameters (e. Unit Caption ID Instance Assigned NE Subset of Cells by Carrier www. In addition. or table). 12-7 Filtering effect of the results selection dialog A description of the different result parameter identification characteristics are given in Table 12-2. If the result dialog was opened from a certain parameter. It is possible to select a group of IDs while holding down the <Shift> key.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 257 Parameter (Set) ID Instance Assigned NE Carrier Time Period / Snapshots Area DB Filter Parameter with • selected ID(s) • selected Instance(s) • selected Assigned NE(s) • selected Carrier(s) • selected Time Period / Snapshots • selected Area (Simulation/Analysis) Graphical Presentation as: • • • • • Surface Plot Cell Visual Chart Graph Histogram Table Fig. and is also displayed in the created presentation of the parameters (e. surface plot. It is possible to select a group of Instances while holding down the <Shift> key.ini files. or table). In this list field the user can choose among the available network element IDs that match the parameter specified in the field above. In this list field the user can choose among the available Assigned Network Elements that match the parameter specified in the field above. Table 12-2 Result parameter identification Parameter Description Parameter In this list field the parameter name can be chosen. Even nonconsecutive cell subsets can be selected using the <Ctrl> key. In this list field the user can choose one or a subset of the available instance IDs that match the specified parameter and ID in the fields above. It is derived from the settings in the resultsparameters.com . The caption of the parameter.g. histogram. It is possible to select a group of Assigned NEs while holding down the <Shift> key.ini and resultparameters_measurements. diagram. time and area of a parameter can be restricted by the according flags and ranges to the right of the results selection dialog. The unit of the parameter. It is possible to select a group of cell subsets while holding down the <Shift> key. Even non-consecutive Assigned NEs can be selected using the <Ctrl> key. In this list field for results parameters whose ID’s or Assigned NE’s NE type is “cell”. surface plot.g.

12. it is possible to adjust that function. In this case. the corresponding IDs and instances of the parameter sets are stored in the pixel together with the values. that only if the MAX or MIN combination algorithms were selected. MIN: The parameter with the minimum value is stored into the pixel. in charts over time. For raster plots. Note. or in Excel-like tables. given in meters. COUNT: The number of overlapping parameter sets is stored into the pixel. or <=). The resolution of the grid or the average pixel distance in continuous plots can be adjusted by the Pixel Size. the resulting average is logarithmized again. reasons for dropped calls etc. The latter presentation option enables a comfortable post-processing of the data in further applications.actix. or as a histogram. location-base data can be plotted at the exact positions associated with the respective values.2. >=. If two or more parameter values overlap in a raster pixel.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 258 Results can be represented in spatial views (surface plots). all values per pixel are de-logarithmized. it can be chosen.5.2 Surface Plots A surface plot presents the selected parameter sets in a spatial view as grid-based data or continuous plot. the data combination algorithms are ignored except for the COUNT function. The following combination functions are available and can be selected from the Function list field: • • • • • • • • • • MAX: The parameter with the maximum value is stored into the pixel. According to the type of parameter. see section 3.5. all others are not added. If the values of the selected parameter sets are strings (e.).2. LIN AVERAGE: All values are averaged linearly per pixel. Using the option Evaluate in Subperiods it is possible to create several surface plots from a parameter that consecutively cover the entire given time period. The table represents exactly the data shown graphically in a surface plot. LOG AVERAGE: Before averaging. DIFFERENCE: The maximal difference of the values is stored into the pixel. if the data of the non-empty pixels is presented graphically in a surface plot (checkbox Surface Plot (Graphic)) or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Raw Data (Table)). charts). >.10). however. the values are combined. if the data is represented in graphical views (surface plots.4. PROBABILITY: The probability per pixel is computed for the values contained in each pixel compared to a numerical reference value using a comparison operator (out of <. all this information is shown in a tooltip when the mouse pointer is above a certain pixel. <>. www. the results selection dialog chooses a reasonable combination function by default. This option is to be chosen for deriving the standard deviation of values given in dB. LIN STDDEV: The standard deviation of linear values is stored into the pixel. LIN AVERAGE (BEST): All values of the ID with the highest values of the pixel. An overview of the result configuration options for surface plots is given in Table 12-3. =. Finally. only the value is shown in the tooltip. Furthermore. it can be chosen. the grid has an equal resolution in the X and Y directions. Otherwise. The tooltips can be switched on or off in the display settings dialog.com . Only the first parameter is stored in a pixel. LOG STDDEV: The standard deviation of logarithmic values is stored into the pixel.g. This feature can be used later to animate the temporal behavior of that parameter in a layer slide show (refer to section 12. Then. The configuration for these types of presentation are described in more detail below. In the latter case. averaged linearly per pixel. This option is to be chosen for the linear averaging of values that are given in dB.

‘LIN AVERAGE’. a Mapped Surface Plot will be created. Specifies the number of subperiods. the number of separate consecutive surface plots.10. The options to choose from are: ‘MAX’. By choosing this radio button. By choosing this radio button. ‘DIFFERENCE’. a number of subperiods can be specified. This way (almost) entirely covering plots can be created. When enabling the option Most Reliable Values. This list field offers different ways to combine location related values of a parameter. the traces of the individual UEs move much smoother. an output to a Cell Visual can be selected. ‘PROBABILITY’. Dst. ‘LIN STDDEV’. ‘LIN AVERAGE (BEST)’. — — Values Most Reliable Values — — Continuous Plot — Raster Plot Interpolation — — Pixel Size / Avg. ‘LOG AVERAGE’. ‘MIN’. refer to section 12.Dev. as an alternative to the Mapped Surface Plot output. only the values lying in a range of +/. For a parameter with cell names as ID. around the average in each pixel are considered for the binning. When used within a Layer Slide Show. Each of these subperiods gets plotted into a separate surface plot.5. A comparison operator and a numerical reference value can be chosen. Here. the parameter is shown in a table sorted with respect to the associated position / site / cell / carrier. In case this switch is activated. ‘COUNT’.actix. For a parameter with cell names as ID. Evaluate in Subperiods m — # of Periods Smooth Animation # — www. the areas between the originally set pixels are filled with interpolated values. if several values fall into a single pixel. this value specifies the average distance between pixels. there could be single extreme values that are clearly wrong and that would distort the average or other statistical measure. In case of a continuous plot. and ‘LOG STDDEV’. Especially in case of analysing measurements. In contrast to the Mapped Surface Plot. a raster plot with the given pixel size will be created. if the ‘PROBABILITY’ combination function is selected. thus. This option is useful for plots that usually consist of single. where the cell-based values are mapped to the cell symbols.2*Std.com . refer to section 12. the subperiods are as twice as long and overlap by 50 percent. This feature is especially useful in connection with the Layer Slide Show.5. Using the Interpolation flag. The pixel width and height for the surface plot. for the Cell Visual no best serving cell areas caluculation is required. a continuous plot will be created where each value is presented as an individual pixel at its exact associated position.10. where the cell-based values are mapped to the best serving area of the cell. distant pixels. — — Raw Data (Table) Function If this radio button is checked.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 259 Table 12-3 Surface plot result configuration Parameter Description Unit Surface Plot or Mapped Surface Plot Output to Cell Visual If this radio button is checked. the parameter is shown in a surface plot creating a new layer.

a UE profile (ID) can be selected from the list box. Secondly. carrier frequencies. COUNT: The number of data items related to the ID / Assigned NE and frame is stored into the field. LOG SUM: The logarithmic sum of all values is stored into the field.4. only graphs for those cells are created where a connection was available.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 260 12. the parameter ‘DL_TxPower_DPCH – Cell [dBm]’ must be chosen by double-clicking it. all the available data is presented in one common curve or column in the table. This feature can be useful. if more than one UE of this type were activated. MAX: The maximal value is stored into the field. the user wants to create a set of charts for the downlink transmit power on a DPCH for a specific UE instance for each cell. This option is useful. The result of this group function is like: (COUNT > 0) ? 1: 0. First. For instance. for instance if events such as handover requests shall be drawn over time. This group function is recommended for values in dB/dBm. Also this option enables the direct comparison of equal measurements obtained from different simulation runs represented by different result sets. A label text can be defined in the Y Axis Label field. if the data of different parameter sets shall be compared. the ALL item shall be active in the Assigned NE box. If no group function was selected. This text is only applied to a graph. a group function can be specified to combine all the available data related to this field. The underlying algorithm is comparable to a cross table. Radioplan suppresses ‘empty’ graphs. Assigned NEs. the chart is not cleared – the currently selected parameter set is displayed in the same chart distinguished by colors and usually other line styles or in the same table as another column. if different parameter sets shall be compared graphically in one chart. A scaling factor can be specified additionally. special group functions were introduced.2. To create charts for all cells. but the ranges differ www. an Instance must be chosen. Like COUNT.3 Chart Graphs Most of the dynamics of a radio network can be observed by representing measurements over time. where the rows represent the UMTS frames. In order to create a separate graph for each of the cells. if any of the group functions are inactive. Instances. This group function enables the display of string messages in time charts. Thus. this group function enables the display of string messages in time charts. In the following. A line style can be specified using the Style list box. and a separate column is created for each ID or network element assigned to it.com . In order to allow for a quick and easy access to graphs related to one or more IDs. Thus. The default style is a line without symbols. one of the following group functions can be chosen: • • • • • • • • FIRST VALUE: The first value (with respect to its position in the database) is stored into the field. respectively. An example shall demonstrate the usage of the group function capabilities. it is a Boolean group function. Using the Add to Existing Chart or Add to Existing Table options. In some cases it may be useful to present a graph by discrete symbols without connections between adjacent points. LAST VALUE: The last value (with respect to its position in the database) is stored into the field. Otherwise. MIN: The minimal value is stored into the field. the Group Assigned NE’s checkbox must be switched on. Since for each pair of frame and ID / Assigned NE exactly one field is available in such a cross table. A graph can be drawn as a combination of lines and symbols. If one of the checkboxes Group ID’s or Group Assigned NE’s is selected. EVENT: The pure existence of at least one event related to the ID / Assigned NE and frame is stored into the field. or groups of them. the ID or Assigned NE is applied to the corresponding graph as a label to distinguish between several graphs created in one step. It is possible to add a set of data to a chart (or table) that already contains items.actix. SUM: The sum of all values is stored into the field.

it may be useful to scale the Active Set size graph by a factor of 10. The presentation of the parameter sets in tables is a convenient way to statistically evaluate the data inside Radioplan or to export the data for a post-processing in other applications. the snapshot index is mapped on the x-axis (instead of UMTS frame number or time). Finally. If this checkbox is checked. Instead. The label of the time curve in the chart. the parameter is shown as a time plot in a chart. occurring NaNs can be suppressed by checking the box Suppress NaNs. ‘SUM’. For instance. the parameter is shown in a table sorted with respect to the associated frame number / time stamp. An overview of the result configuration options for chart graphs is given in Table 12-4. If this radio button is checked. ‘EVENT’. If this checkbox is checked. for each selected ID a separate graph (time chart) / column (table) is created. This parameter is usually initialized with the parameter name (without unit). If this checkbox is checked. if one of the group checkboxes is switched on. Add to Existing Chart Parameter over Time (Table) Add to Existing Table Group ID’s Group Assigned NE’s Group Function Y Axis Label Style Suppress NaNs Scaling Factor www. and ‘MIN’. a time axis given either in seconds or in UMTS frames. The time unit is determined by the respective selection in the Temporal Restrictions group to the right of the results selection dialog. If the data are shown in a table. The options to choose from are: ‘FIRST VALUE’. If this checkbox is selected. if an Active Set size graph and downlink Tx power DPCH graph(s) shall be drawn in one chart. the parameter is shown as a curve vs. it can be chosen if the data are presented graphically in a diagram (checkbox Parameter over Time (Chart)) or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Parameter over Time (Table)). occurring NaN or Infinite values can be suppressed if the data are presented in a table. ‘LAST VALUE’. Instead.actix. This option is only active. More precisely. for each selected Assigned NE a separate graph (time chart) / column (table) is created. ‘COUNT’. the new curve is added to the chart in another color and according to the current line style. ‘LOG SUM’. Table 12-4 Time chart result configuration Parameter Description Parameter over Time (Chart) If this radio button is checked. if handover requests are shown graphically over time. ‘MAX’. For instance. this feature may be useful. NaN values as well as infinite values force a break in the curve of the graph. the chart display is not cleared when a new parameter is to be viewed. the new data are added to the table as another column. The analysis of the non-numeric (string) data is always possible using the table option. When creating a chart graph from snapshot simulation results. if NaN values were found between them.com . If this checkbox is selected. Data items of numerical values are not connected. the table display is not cleared when a new parameter is to be viewed. A numerical value that scales the values of the graphs to be created. A line style related to the chart graphs to be created can be specified. String values cannot be displayed in a diagram except one of the group features is switched on and the group function is equal to ‘COUNT’ or ‘EVENT’.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 261 significantly. A function can be specified that is used to combine the data for each pair of frame / time stamp and ID / Assigned NE.

com . the result analysis is confined to the analysis area. the analysis of the results can be restricted to a certain area and/or a time interval. the parameter is shown in a table that contains the values of the histogram. — hh:mm:ss www. Additionally to the histogram a CDF can be created. A bin width in units of the currently selected parameter can be adjusted to define the resolution of the histogram.4. If this checkbox is active. the time scale of all diagrams will be given in seconds. Table 12-6 Results analysis restrictions Parameter Description Unit Spatial Restrictions Whole Area Simulation Area Analysis Area Using this radiobutton. the all results are used for analysis. Using this radiobutton.4. It is clear that histograms can only be generated from numeric data. — 12. the parameter is shown in a histogram.actix. the mean value and the standard deviation are calculated under the assumption that the histogram was created from logarithmic values (usually given in dB). Table 12-5 Histogram result configuration Parameter Description Unit Histogram (Chart) Histogram (Table) If this radio button is checked. The start time of the temporal selection of the currently analyzed result parameter. or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Histogram (Table)). Using this radiobutton. — — Bin Width according to the parameter — — Show CDF Show Mean Value and Std. The data of the histogram can be presented graphically (checkbox Histogram (Chart)). Deviation Mean and StdDev. — — — Temporal Restrictions Use Time Information Start Time If this radiobutton is selected. If this checkbox is active. These results analysis settings are defined as given in Table 12-6. If this radio button is checked. The bin width for the histogram. Inside the diagram the mean value and the standard deviation can be shown as a label optionally.2.2. as Logarithmic Values (dB / dBm) A second graph / column is added that represents the CDF of the histogram. respectively. NaN values will be automatically suppressed.4 Histograms A histogram is frequently used to determine the statistical distribution of a parameter set. The items in the result dialog are summarized in Table 12-5. the result analysis is confined to the simulation area. the mean value and the standard deviation for the histogram is shown as an additional legend.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 262 12.5 Spatial and Temporal Restrictions In the right part of the dialog.

The legend shows the color palette with the current data scaling (for numeric data). 12-8. instance. for comparison between planning and measured data).5 Results Analysis with Surface Plots A surface plot consists of a legend to the left and a plot area to the right. the strings are shown in the lower left corner of the plot area as an additional legend. the analysis would be restricted to the range between the first and the last snapshot. and each string is assigned a different color. The first frame of the result parameter value to be considered.g. www. Detect Data Range Restrict Analysis to a Time or Frame Period On pressing this button. the valid time period is determined for the currently selected parameter based on the loaded result data.4) by clicking into the legend area to the left.) are used for creating the surface plot. the according values are mapped onto the cell coverage areas using unambiguous color codes for each cell scrambling code. Using this technique.com . There are two possibilities to create a result surface plot. — The different checkboxes can be used to enforce an analysis that is specific to a time period or a region (whole area. or analysis area). only those parameters are regarded where the associated network element is situated inside the chosen area. If this checkbox is activated. For cell/site specific parameters. Numeric values are scaled automatically and are mapped by the currently selected color palette to presentation colors. and value (numeric or nonnumeric) for the underlying item located at the current position of the mouse pointer.actix. Either the parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window is double-clicked to open the results selection dialog. This period can be specified in terms of a start/end time or a first/last UMTS frame below. the actual parameter that is displayed. this value contains the first snapshot to be considered. The plot area contains the values for the previously selected parameters.5. 12. If parameters associated with cells are displayed. different blocking/dropping reasons or cells can be distinguished by their colors. only positions inside the (possibly) chosen area are considered. the number of different strings is determined. hh:mm:ss — UMTS frames / snapshots UMTS frames / snapshots — Last The last frame of the result parameter value to be considered.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 263 Parameter Description Unit End Time Use Frame/Snapshot Information First The end time of the temporal selection of the currently analyzed result parameter. If non-numeric values (strings) are detected in the result data. simulation area.g. For UE related parameters. However. In case of snapshot simulation results. An example of a result surface plot is given in Fig. Depending on the data combination function. There the radio button Surface Plot (Graphic) must be selected. and some further information. This way it is possible to overlay several cell based parameter plots and compare the cell coverage (e. the results analysis is restricted to the given time period. regarding the data combination function within a pixel etc. In case of snapshot simulation results. the current settings in this dialog (e. The other possibility is to choose the entry Direct Surface Plot from the context menu of the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. In case of snapshot simulation results. a tooltip shows the ID. The scale and the color palette can be modified in the layer settings dialog (see section 3. Then a surface plot is created directly without showing the results selection dialog. the time scale of all diagrams will be given in UMTS frames. this value contains the last snapshot to be considered. If this radiobutton is selected.

12. just double-click on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. Interesting graphical properties of result layers for a flexible analysis are.e. Alternatively. A corresponding warning appears in the message window. Layers can have individual graphical presentations. In order to bring up or push down a certain layer. one can reorder the layers by the Move <…> functions from that layer’s context menu. i. such that their presentation is constantly toggled. The described analysis functions can be used for any type of layer. Furthermore it is possible to save this picture into a bitmap (for instance a JPEG file) using the File Save Plot as Image menu item. www.com . also for configuration data layers and image layers.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 264 Infinite or NaN values are suppressed. This enables a free comparison • • • 5 Read more on the database filter functions of the results selection dialog in section 12. All available result layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window. 12-8) can be transferred to any other application via the clipboard using the normal copy/paste functions. among others.1 Result Surface Plot Layers For every displayed result parameter with a certain database filtering5 a new layer is created. the alpha blending factor (opacity). the color palette. etc. the individual color range transparency. Fig.1.actix. all the usual layer evaluation functions can be used. For an efficient result analysis. just active the corresponding checkbox in the Layers tab of the tree window.5. The properties of the currently active layer can be edited in the layer settings dialog by clicking into the black legend area to the left. 12-8 Sample view of a surface result plot The currently displayed contents of the viewing area (including legend as shown in Fig.4. An impressive way of comparing two layers is to alternately double-clicking on either of them.2. a layer can be dragged graphically by the mouse to another level in the layers list. the following options seem to be interesting: • To display an already existing single layer. Layers can be overlaid. In particular. To make a distinct layer visible.

This is very useful for a quick overview of the spatial distribution of that parameter across the entire simulation area. then this special parameter item can be investigated by choosing the menu entry Investigate this Item….4. if it e. This situation is shown in the left part of Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 265 between network configuration data. the MIN or MAX functions should be used when creating the surface plot to ensure. Fig. usually a parameter is shown for several IDs/Instances simultaneously. Now the user has a variety of opportunities to further analyze the trouble spot: • • By simply clicking the OK button in the results selection dialog. Note that this function is only available if the chosen pixel contains a single value. Instance. 12-9 Identifying a trouble spot for further analysis The results selection dialog is opened where the identified item (in terms of ID.5. Radioplan offers an individual network trouble-shooting by using the same basic result parameter evaluation methods as previously introduced in conjunction with the parameter filtering functions. and optimized network setups. the identified parameter could be presented solely in a new surface plot layer. www. etc. a context menu is shown. and Assigned NE) is highlighted which is shown in the right part of Fig.actix. However.2 Identifying a Certain Data Item for Trouble Shooting In a surface plot. simulation results. the value cannot be associated with a certain network element instance.com . that each pixel only contains a single value. 12. If a valid result pixel was hit. Consequently. to identify and localize a special problem in the network at a certain time stamp. 12-9 as an example. real measurement data. Otherwise. 12-9. A detailed description on the layer concept of Radioplan can be found in section 3. Further constraints could be chosen for the identified parameter ID such as another data combining function. another pixel size. it must be possible to investigate a certain result item from a position. contains an average value or a probability. This is required for an effective trouble-shooting analysis of the network.g. On right-clicking at an identified trouble hot-spot in a result data surface plot.

5. Only pixels inside the analysis area are manipulated.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 266 • • • Since the particular ID and possibly the Instance of the trouble parameter are already identified. Table 12-7 Parameters to manipulate a layer Parameter Layer Options Description Use only Pixels inside the Simulation Area Use only Pixels inside the Analysis Area Target Layer Only pixels inside the simulation area are manipulated. www. it can be manipulated in various ways to either create a new layer or update the original one. For pixels containing 0 this function creates empty pixels.3 Manipulating a Surface Plot Layer Once having created a surface plot layer. ‘SUB’. ‘EQUAL’. i. Generally speaking. 12-10. Available comparison functions are ‘LESS’. Generally speaking. ‘UNEQUAL’. A function to compare the values of a layer with a reference. A function to calculate the reciprocal of the values in a layer. the time span could be further limited.com . Overwrite this Layer Output Convert [dBm] -> [W] A function to convert logarithmic power values (assumed being given in dBm) into linear power values (given in Watts). The elements of it are described in Table 12-7. Last but not least. Available operations are ‘ADD’. A radiobutton to reuse the surface plot layer that the manipulate layer function was called from. ‘GREATER OR EQUAL’. the trouble parameter could be displayed in a chart graph.e. ‘MUL’. Invert (Multiply by -1) Reciprocal (1/x) Function Compare A function to invert the values of an existing layer. in a histogram. A function to process the layer with a value. another parameter can be chosen to find out the connection between different parameters for the same ID/Instance in the trouble spot. This function can be applied to any kind of layer. The resulting layer pixels are either 1 (if condition fulfilled) or 0 (if condition not met). ‘LESS OR EQUAL’. e. it delogarithmizes the values of the original layer. Create new Layer A radiobutton to create a new surface plot layer from the given layer. Convert [W] -> [dBm] A function to convert linear power values (assumed being given in Watts) into logarithmic power values (given in dBm). The way of data presentation can be changed. This dialog is shown in Fig. 12. This function can be applied to any kind of layer. and ‘DIV’. Then the dialog is shown where several manipulation functions are offered. or in a table. where the pixels of the resulting layer are calculated from the pixels of the original layer by a selectable function. the unit is not checked. the unit is not checked. This function is invoked by using the entry Manipulate this Layer… from a layer’s context menu in the Layers tab of the tree window.g. it logarithmizes the values of the original layer. These are just some proposals for possible options to further track down a potential problem and to investigate the network behavior in detail.actix. ‘GREATER’.

network performance counters. 12. 12-10 Manipulate layer dialog The manipulate layer function can be applied to the following types of layers: • • • • • configuration layers.4 Coinciding Surface Plot Layers Another interesting option is to investigate the possible relation between two different parameters. Here. drive test data. This dialog is shown in Fig. Using the entry Coincide with other Layer/Visual… from a layer’s or cell visual’s context menu in the Layers tab of the tree window. simulation results. result layers with the continuous plot option) cannot be manipulated either. For cell visuals only a combination function can be chosen. Furthermore. a dialog is shown where another layer or cell visual and different options for comparison can be chosen.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 267 Fig. optimization layers.5. measurement layers. either be it network configuration data.g.actix. and post-processing layers. layers with continuous pixels (e. The elements of it are described in Table 12-8. result layers. www. It is not possible to manipulate image layers or graphics layers because they contain no value information in pixels. 12-11. the starting point can be surface plot layers or cell visuals of the data. or optimization plots.

‘AND’. Only pixels inside the analysis area are coincided. ‘SUM’. If this checkbox is enabled. A radiobutton to create a scatter statistics plot from the given two layers. and ‘XOR’. Available functions are ‘MIN’. and the second layer is mapped on the x-axis. ‘MAX’. A radiobutton to create a scatter graph from the given two layers. 12-11 Coincide layers dialog Table 12-8 Parameters to coincide layers Parameter Description Current Layer Reference Layer Use only Pixels inside the Simulation Area Use only Pixels inside the Analysis Area Ignore Transparent Pixels Create new Layer The layer from which the dialog was called (cannot be changed). Each pixel that fulfils a certain coverage criterion in both layers is plotted in a color determined from the reference layer’s legend. A radiobutton to create a new surface plot layer from the given two layers.com . a line for the linear function X = Y is added to the XY scatter graph as a reference. The first layer is mapped on the y-axis. creating a new layer. Function Create XY Scatter Graph Add X = Y Line Create XY Scatter Table Create Scatter Statistics (Surface Plot) www. A radiobutton to create a scatter table from the given two layers. Transparent pixels in either layer are excluded from the combination. A function to interrelate two layers. The data in the table is the same as is created by the XY Scatter Graph function. a dot is set in the resulting graph. ‘QUOTIENT’.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 268 Fig. Only pixels inside the simulation area are coincided.actix. ‘DIFFERENCE’. For each pixel pair of the layers. where the pixels of the layers are interrelated pair wise by a selectable function. ‘PRODUCT’. ‘OR’. All available surface plot layers from the Layers tab are listed in this list field. The second layer for the comparison.

i. The results are listed in a table.g. but no blocking occurred.e. A possible result is shown in Fig. i. In the resulting layer (see Fig. The coinciding layers function can be applied to the following types of layers: • • • • • • configuration layers.and y-axes of the graph (XY scatter graph). Each pixel that fulfils a certain coverage criterion in both layers is counted. This result is underlined by the Figure to the right where additionally the blocked services (green) are shown that fill those empty regions.com . At first it shall be demonstrated how this function can be exploited to identify those regions in a network where users could directly get access. www. layers with continuous pixels (e. 12-12 to the left) it can clearly be seen that there are regions especially at the cell borders where users did not get direct network access. and the resulting coverage probability is calculated. the relation between the best pilot Ec/I0 over the mean pathloss shall be investigated. Furthermore.e. result layers. This can be accomplished by combining the parameters ‘ServiceRequest’ and ‘ServiceBlocked’ from the Service category by an XOR function. these regions are empty in the view. as another example. 12-13. 12-12 Direct access of services in brown (left) and blocked access attempts in green (right) If. cell visuals. and post-processing layers or cell visuals.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 269 Parameter Description Create Scatter Statistics (Table) A radiobutton to create a scatter statistics table from the given two layers. It is not possible to coincide image layers or graphics layers because they contain no value information in pixels.actix. Fig. the coincide layers function can be used to create a chart graph from the values of these two layers mapped onto the x. optimization layers. measurement layers. where there was a service attempt. result layers with the continuous plot option) cannot be coincided either.

also scatter statistics can be calculated from coinciding two layers.5. As a special case. Chart graphs and tables from coincided layers can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while pressing the OK button of the coincide layer dialog. www. 12-14. it is recommended to select the Use Color Steps option in the color palette dialog of the respective layers and then specify the thresholds. The principle of the scatter statistics is that the coverage percentage of both layers according to certain threshold combinations are determined and listed in a table. The resulting scatter statistics table contains both the coverage percentage values for the compound threshold settings (in the upper part) as well as the corresponding absolute number of pixels that fulfill the corresponding criteria (in the lower part).actix. in the above example the combined coverage of pilot RSCP and pilot Ec/I0 in a UMTS network were calculated. For this particular case there is also a special function available which is described in section 12. The applied thresholds are directly derived from the color legend of the layers.com .9. An example of a scatter statistics table is shown in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 270 Fig. In order to choose certain dedicated thresholds. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them. 12-13 Sample chart graph of two coincided layers Similar to the scatter graph.

Using the functions of the submenu Results Histogram from Surface Plot.5 Deriving Histograms from Surface Plots The data of the currently active surface plot layer can be easily translated into a histogram view. respectively. Fig. Histograms from surface plot layers can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while selecting the according menu entry. This feature may be useful if a spatial distribution instead of a temporal distribution is required.com .7. 12-15.5. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them. www. 12-14 Scatter statistics between pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 from a UMTS/FDD measurement 12. This procedure is demonstrated in Fig. 12-15 Creating a histogram from a surface plot layer The presentation of the histogram can further be modified as described in section 12. The same functions can be reached from the context menu of result data layers (submenu Histogram from Surface Plot) which can be displayed by right-clicking into a surface plot of that result parameter. the underlying pixel data of the surface plot is translated into a statistical distribution shown in a chart or a table.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 271 Fig.actix.

This feature may be useful to e. First the respective layer must be activated by clicking on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. The resulting table contains a mapping between the cell IDs and their respective values from the cell visual. Tables from surface plot layers or cell visuals can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while selecting the according menu entry.5. 12. the underlying pixel data of the surface plot is transferred into a table.6 Extracting Tables from Surface Plots and Cell Visuals The pixel-oriented data of the currently active surface plot layer can be easily extracted into a table. 12-16.8.8. In this case.7 Cell Statistics from a Layer Each layer can be statistically evaluated over the best cell areas based on the pathloss maps and cell (pilot) powers.5. Using the functions of the submenu Results Data Table from Surface Plot. www. 12-16 Creating a table from a surface plot layer This function is also available for cell visuals. it can only be invoked from the context menu when right-clicking into the cell visual in the viewing area and choosing Data Table from Cell Visual.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 272 12.2) or an external application.g. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them.actix. 12-17. Choose one of the subentries of Cell Statistics from this context menu to evaluate statistical measures of the selected layer over the best cell areas as shown in Fig. Fig. make the data from a coincided layer available for further analysis in the embedded clipboard (see section 12. Then a right mouse click into the viewing area lets the surface plot context menu appear. The data in the table can further be modified and post-processed as described in section 12. The same functions can be reached from the context menu of result data layers (submenu Data Table from Surface Plot) which can be displayed by right-clicking into a surface plot of that result parameter. This procedure is shown in Fig.com .

12-18 Example of the cell statistics for a pilot Ec/I0 plot www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 273 Fig.actix. 12-18 for an example. 12-17 Deriving cell statistics from a surface plot layer The result of this function is a table giving various statistical measures (e.g.com . See Fig. the table is opened in a separate window. Fig. Cells that have no best cell pixel in the selected area are suppressed in the table. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the function. average and standard deviation) of the values from the chosen layer for each cell area in combination with the number of relevant bins for statistical puposes.

8.8 Clutter Statistics from a Layer Each layer can be statistically evaluated over the clutter classes defined by the clutter matrix. The thresholds are directly derived from the color scale of the layer which can be seen when comparing the two Figures above. www. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the function.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 274 This table can be directly used to plot the statistical measures on the best cell areas in a new surface plot layer.com . 12-19. The given number of bins per clutter class can be used to weigh the importance of each percentage value in a statistical evaluation. It remains to specify the column containing the Graph Selection cell IDs and proper plot caption/tree label and unit in the appearing dialog. Fig. More details about the mapped surface plot function from a table can be found in section 12.actix. First the respective layer must be activated by clicking on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. Choose one of the subentries of Clutter Statistics from this context menu to evaluate the “coverage” of the selected layer according to different thresholds for each clutter class as shown in Fig. 12. 12-20 for an example. The according column containing the values to be mapped must be selected by clicking the respective header field of the table. Then a right mouse click into the viewing area lets the surface plot context menu appear. 12-19 Deriving clutter statistics from a surface plot layer The result of this function is a table giving the percentage of the values of the chosen layer being above different thresholds over each clutter class in combination with the number of relevant bins for statistical puposes. See Fig. Clutter classes that do not occur in the selected area are suppressed in the table. the table is opened in a separate window. the color scale of the layer can be modified accordingly. In this case it is recommended to choose the option Use Color Steps in the color palette dialog. In order to choose dedicated thresholds. The function to choose is Mapped Surface Plot.7. Then the table grid context menu is displayed by right-clicking into the marked column.

the resulting discretized layer would have equally distributed steps between the maximal and minimal values of the legend. 12-21.5. or to coincide it with other layers to assess the coverage of certain parameters. This slide show presents multiple surface plots from the layer tree consecutively in the order of their creation.4. Here. ten layers of the Maximum of ‘DL_SIR_DPDCH [dB]’ shall be produced for a layer slide show.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 275 Fig. and Smooth Animation is commented.10 Layer Slide Show In order to better understand the manifold of interacting mechanisms in a live UMTS network. If continuous color shading as applied instead. as apparent from Fig.4. 12. The basics for the work with layers in Radioplan are explained in section 3. It is recommended to define discrete color steps for the original layer. Radioplan offers a slide show of multiple layers of surface plots. 12-21 Settings in the results selection dialog to produce a layer slide show www. Then the exact legend thresholds will be used for discretizing. The resulting discretized layer could be further used to e. analyze the portions in each value range in a histogram from that layer. etc.actix. Fig. # of Periods.9 Discrete Value Layers The values of an existing layer can be discretized according to the current legend thresholds. These ten layers can be created with the following settings of the mentioned three parameters. As an example.g.5. where the layer shall be analyzed according to defined value ranges. the use of the parameters Evaluate in Subperiods. The currently displayed layer can be discretized by right-clicking into the layer presentation in the viewing area and choosing Surface Plot Tools Set Pixel Values to Legend Thresholds from the appearing context menu. the configuration of surface plots was described in section 12. This function is particularly useful when using discrete color steps. Moreover.2. it might be enlightening to animate the dynamics in the network after a dynamic simulation or to visualize drive test data (play-back). 12-20 Example of the clutter statistics for a best pilot power plot 12.2. Then immediately all pixel values of the layer are exchanged by the corresponding lower legend threshold according to the defined ranges.

Alternatively. Furthermore. It is also possible to show some layer(s) permanently in the background during the slide show.11 Printing Surface Plots Spatial views with all possibly overlapping surface plot layers can be printed true-to-scale. the layer slide show can be started by pressing the OK button.e. When everything is set up right.g. 12-23. Furthermore. there is also an icon ( . see Fig. The slide show stops when the user presses the Abort Slide Show button in the appearing pop-up dialog. choose Results Layer Slide Show from the menu. 1:100. This is especially useful when specifying a dedicated scale factor for the plot to be printed. the included layers are repeated one after the other with the chosen time interval between the switching in a loop. Now. The created layers are handled like normal layers. tooltip Start Layer Slide Show) in the views toolbar to start a layer slide show. Once the view is set up properly.actix. all layers to be included in the slide show should be selected in the Include column.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 276 As a result of these settings. the printing process can be started either out of the print icon (tooltip preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the Print) from the standard toolbar. Fig. 12. Then the layer slide show dialog is opened. This can be accomplished by selecting them in the Show Always column. www. several surface plot layers will be automatically created that represent (partly overlapping if option Smooth Animation is selected) time periods within the entire configured time range. Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar.5. i. 12-22.com .000. the black legend is automatically displayed in white in all printouts. the time interval between the switching of the layers in the slide show can be chosen between 0 and 5 seconds. To start a layer slide show. they could be presented normally by double-clicking them in the Layers tab of the tree window. Then distances in the printout could be directly measured with a ruler. 12-22 Layer slide show dialog with deactivated image layers In this dialog box. e. An example of the print the preview is shown in Fig.

and y-axes each have labels that are automatically set by default. described later in section 12. The x.com . An example of a diagram showing the transmit power of a speech user while moving through several cells with Soft Handovers in a dynamic network simulation is given in Fig. 12-24 Sample view of a chart www. Fig. 12-24.actix. Each chart has a freely configurable title (by default derived from the current settings in the results selection dialog).4.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 277 Fig.6. Several settings for the diagrams can be modified using the axis scale and diagram settings dialog.6 Results Analysis with Charts (Plots over Time) A chart graph presents data in a chart. 12-23 Sample print preview with white legend and true-to-scale alignment 12.

it is also possible to create a new chart graph in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the diagram. Copy Graph Menu Copies the chart to the Windows clipboard.3. See [R-Sim] for details. Restores the default diagram settings. Table 12-9 Functions of the menu in a chart graph window Menu Entry File Menu Function Print Save as Image… Close Edit Menu Opens the print dialog. by consecutively adding • www.6.1 Creating a Chart Graph Arbitrary result parameters (either from measurements or simulations) can be presented in a chart graph.com . by consecutively adding curves to a diagram (see below). the chart graph is immediately shown in the viewing area. newly created chart graphs are displayed in the viewing area. one zoom stage can be reverted by this command.6.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Chart Graphs When creating a chart graph. see section 12. see section 12. Shows a file save dialog to save the diagram as an image. the <F4> key can be used. As an example. All new curves in a chart will use the same specified scaling factor.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 278 12. the option Parameter over Time (Chart) must be selected. A scaling factor can be specified for the graph presentation. different line styles can be chosen for the distinct lines.4. Using this option. Once the user has zoomed into the graph. Create Table from Graph Zoom Out Creates a table with two columns representing the x. the <F3> key can be used.6. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog. Each of the Radioplan Modules can have special kinds of chart graphs. Closes the chart graph window. the zoom can be set back to the entire graph by this command. The chart graph configuration in the results selection dialog is also briefly explained in section 12. Alternatively.6.2.4. In the appearing dialog. the following settings can be made: • A special line style can be chosen for the graph presentation. The functions of the menu are explained briefly in Table 12-9. several chart graphs can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. All new curves in a chart will inherit the selected style properties. Opens the axis scale and diagram settings dialog to modify the graph presentation. the time course of the number of active UEs during a dynamic simulation can be shown by choosing Results Simulation Results Active UEs as Chart. The separate chart graph windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar.and y values of the graph in a separate window. By default. the user can choose some additional settings in the results selection dialog to influence the data presentation in the chart in certain ways. In particular.actix. However. Once the user has zoomed into the graph. The key to create a chart graph from a result parameter is the results selection dialog. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. Alternatively. Fit To Window Axis Scale and Settings… Reset to default styles 12. However. However.

e. when investigating simulation results it is better to select the time axis in UMTS frames in order to assure a correct presentation of the time curves. An analogous function is available for adding columns in a temporal data table. Note that when choosing the latter time scale. the new curve(s) are added to the possibly existing ones. irrespective the current mouse pointer mode. This Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. a tooltip appears showing the coordinates (time stamp and value) of the closest vertex on the curve. Usually. an old chart is not deleted. the data can be further evaluated in the following ways: • • Single values can be inspected in tooltips. 12. • By selecting the Add to Existing Chart option when displaying a parameter in a chart. 12-25 gives an example of the zoom function in chart graphs. fit to window <F4>) are available. the same function can be called from the Graph www.6.g.actix. Fig.3 Creating a Table from a Graph The x. a parameter is presented in a single curve in a chart graph. the snapshot index will be mapped on the x-axis of a chart. Also some of the normal zoom functions (zoom out <F3>. However. 12-24 is an example of a parameter that is shown for a single selected ID/Instance (UE) and grouped for the Assigned NEs (cells).Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 279 curves to a diagram (see below). The zoom function in chart graphs is always active. measurement data or dynamic simulation results). It is not useful to use this function for displaying time and frame based result data together in one chart. Thus. 12-25 Zooming into a chart graph Charts can be transferred to another application via the clipboard. In this case it is recommended to choose the option Use Frame Information in the Temporal Restrictions group of the results selection dialog. the time axis of the chart graph can either be given in UMTS frames or in seconds (hh:mm:ss format).and y values of a chart diagram can be extracted into a table with two columns. It is easy to zoom into a chart at an interesting region by dragging a box with the left mouse button.com . or they can be saved as Save Plot as Image… item from the menu bar in different an image using the File graphics formats. different scaling factors can be applied to the distinct lines. In order to display separate curves for each of those IDs / Assigned NEs. For time related results (e. for each cell associated with that parameter there is a separate curve in the graph. i. values at a certain time stamp could be associated with different IDs and/or Assigned NEs of that parameter. For snapshot simulation results without time relation. the chart is updated with new scaling settings. Instead. In is accomplished by using the View Create Table separate graph windows. • • • Once a chart graph was created. the smallest resolution of the time axis is generally 1 second. Fig. When the mouse button is released. Moving the mouse pointer on a curve. Fig. the according grouping functions can be used.

depending on the settings in the results selection dialog. The axis scaling can be done automatically by Radioplan (Autoscale checkbox is switched on). If the checkbox Rember Settings is active and the OK button is clicked. The annotation character size can be used to adjust the mean spacing between characters inside the legend. The fill style can be ‘Solid Color’ (only the first color is used). Radioplan stores these background settings for the chart type persistently into the Windows registry.actix. Furthermore it is possible to select one or more graphs here to remove them from the current chart. A dialog appears similar to Fig. the limits for both X and Y axes can be specified manually.6. that can be opened using the View Axis Scale and Settings… item from the menu bar. Using one of the latter three options. As default the current minimum and maximum limits are pre-selected. it is possible to assign XY-graphs. Note that this value represents a mean size for the maximum amount of characters of labels due to the non-mono spaced font used for the legend. accessible from the View Setup… menu item.6. 12. 12-26. So a title and the labels for the X and Y axes can be modified in the Title / Labels group.2) or in an external application. www.8.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 280 from Graph menu entry. The background settings are stored for each graph type separately into the registry. respectively. this menu entry is also available.com . The size and the orientation of the chart on the page can be Graph Page adjusted using the chart page setup dialog. In separate chart graph windows the same dialog can be accessed from File Print. 12-27. In a separate chart graph window. the background color can be modified using two colors and a fill style. The dialog is shown in Fig. Thus. If this feature is deactivated. the usage is self-explanatory. ‘Vertical Shape’. ‘Horizontal Shape’. a shape is drawn defined by the fill style and the two specified colors. The time scale of the diagram can be specified in terms of either UMTS frames or normal time stamps. 12. or ‘45° Shape’. 12-26 Axis scale and diagram settings dialog In the upper part of the dialog the general appearance of the chart can be influenced. histogram graphs. Moreover.4 Customization of Charts The initial scaling of a chart is determined automatically. It is possible to define the axis Graph limits manually using the axis scale dialog. and polar graphs (antenna diagrams) a different background. In the table available in the lower right part of the dialog the annotations of all currently drawn graphs can be modified.5 Printing a Chart Graph Charts can also be printed. Fig. The table data can be further post-processed by means of the statistical evaluation functions available in Radioplan (refer to section 12.

12-28. also the CDF as well as the mean value and the standard deviation of the selected parameter can be inspected. Besides the actual histogram (quantized version of the probability density function). Fig. Basically. 12-28 Sample view of a histogram www.7 Results Analysis with Histograms Histograms are an important means to statistically evaluate network performance data. An example for the histogram of the number of visible cells recorded during a UMTS drive test is presented in Fig. 12. 12-27 Chart page setup dialog Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. a histogram represents the probability distribution of a parameter and can thus reveal statistical properties that could not directly be extracted from a surface plot or a time course of that parameter. Histograms can only be generated for numeric values of the parameters. the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by icon (tooltip Print) from the using the print command from the File menu or the standard toolbar.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 281 Fig.actix. Once the chart is set up the properly.com . Possibly occurring NaNs are not considered when generating the histogram.

1 Creating a Histogram Arbitrary result parameters (either from measurements or simulations) can be presented in a histogram.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 282 12. Shows a file save dialog to save the histogram as an image. Both options are described in the following: • One possibility to create a histogram from a result parameter is the results selection dialog. There is a fundamental difference between these two histogram versions of a parameter. or based on an existing surface plot. the data is normalized so that the sum of the bars is equal to 1. • The generation process of a histogram is basically performed in two substeps. the position. one can create a surface plot from the respective parameter. irrespective the time stamp. In the second case. www. the histogram is generated based on the complete amount of values of the parameter at hand. However.7. the simulation area. there was a certain pre-filtering with regard to the positions of the distinct values. it is also possible to create a new histogram in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the histogram. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. several values in a pixel were combined according to the choice of the data combination function in the results selection dialog. As a second possibility. In particular. (despite the configured restrictions/filtering). Copy Copies the histogram to the Windows clipboard. several histograms can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. however. The functions of the menu are very similar to that of chart graphs. Using this option. First. for each bin (defined by the bin width parameter in the results selection dialog).actix.com . There are generally two ways to create a histogram: either directly from the results selection dialog. the limits for the minimum and maximum values are determined. etc. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog. newly created histograms are displayed in the viewing area. the same function could be invoked from the menu bar Histogram from Surface Plot. or the analysis area. the number of parameter sets is calculated. The separate histogram windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar. they are given below in Table 12-10. Secondly. In the first case. Table 12-10 Functions of the menu in a histogram window Menu Entry File Menu Function Print Save as Image… Close Edit Menu Opens the print dialog. the option Histogram (Chart) must be selected. So this type of histogram represents a kind of spatial statistics of the parameter. By default. The reference area can be the entire area. Then click with the right mouse button into the surface plot to view the context menu and choose one of the subentries from the Histogram from Surface Plot entry. In the appearing dialog. Finally. Closes the histogram window. the histogram is immediately shown in the viewing area. given by the range of the underlying parameter. For convenience. Alternatively. Then the histogram based on by choosing Results the surface plot layer values is immediately displayed in the viewing area. This means that all values of the parameter are handled equally.

respectively. a dialog appears that can simply be left by pressing the OK button.3 Creating a Table from a Histogram The x values as well as the PDF and CDF values of a histogram can be extracted into a table with three columns. fit to window <F4>) are available. More details about the threshold evaluation methods in histograms can be found in section 12. Shows the histogram settings dialog to modify bin size. By choosing the proper method.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 283 Menu Entry Graph Menu Function Create Table from Graph Zoom Out Fit To Window Histogram Settings… Axis Scale and Settings… Reset to default styles Creates a table with three columns representing the x values and the PDF and CDF values of the histogram in a separate window. When the mouse button is released.7.8. 12. Zooms back to the last larger zoom after a zoom in mouse action. It influences the resolution of the histogram.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Histograms When creating a histogram.7.7.7.. Opens the axis scale and diagram settings dialog to modify the graph presentation.5. 12. see section 12.4. the same function can be called from the Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. • Histograms can be transferred to another application via the clipboard. Alternatively. the following settings can be made: • • The bin width can be specified. Then the histogram is updated with new scaling settings. limits. Also some of the normal zoom functions (zoom out <F3>. The table data can be further post-processed by means of the statistical evaluation functions available in Radioplan (refer to section 12. The histogram configuration in the results selection dialog is also briefly explained in section 12. Optionally the CDF can be shown as additional graph. the <F4> key can be used.com . Restores the default histogram settings. the <F3> key can be used. The mean value and the standard deviation can be added to the chart as additional label. the coverage of a parameter can be exactly evaluated at a certain threshold.4. 12. the data can be further evaluated in the following way: • It is easy to zoom into a histogram at an interesting region by dragging a box with the left mouse button. The latter characteristics can be calculated on the basis of linear or logarithmic values. There are different threshold evaluation methods available in histograms. In particular. In separate histogram windows. These settings can also be modified afterwards in the histogram settings dialog as shown in Fig. etc.7.actix. Here the histogram limits and the bin resolution (either in terms of a bin size or the number of bins) www.2) or in an external application. Alternatively. the user can choose some additional settings in the results selection dialog to influence the data presentation in the histogram in certain ways. 12-29. or they can be Save Plot as Image… item from the menu bar in saved as an image using the File different graphics formats.4. This is accomplished by using the View Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. The zoom function in histograms is always active. irrespective the current mouse pointer mode. Zooms on the entire histogram to the fit into the window. Once a histogram was created.4 Customization of Histograms The initial scaling of a histogram is determined automatically.2.

The coverage of such a parameter is equivalent to the normal CDF of the histogram. Fig.5. a coverage level at a given threshold is defined as the percentage of area where the values x <= thres. If the option Mean and StdDev. This dialog can be opened using the View Graph Axis Scale and Settings… item from the menu bar. If then a table is created from the histogram. typically given in dB. it reaches from half the bin resolution below the threshold to half the bin resolution above the threshold. the mean value. as Logarithmic Values (dB / dBm) is chosen. Additionally. If then a table is created from the histogram. a coverage level at a given threshold is defined as the percentage of area where the values x >= thres. 12. See section 12. and the standard deviation can be controlled.4 for the usage of this dialog. • • www. Coverage Evaluation below Threshold: On the contrary. i. the coverage at a given threshold can be directly read from the table in the respective row. This option is selected by choosing the radio button thres – 0. Furthermore.7. Coverage Evaluation above Threshold: When evaluating a parameter that is interpreted as being better the higher the values are (such as best pilot Rx power or Ec/I0). the coverage at a given threshold can be directly read from the table in the respective row. This option is selected by choosing the radio button x <= thres (normal CDF). The coverage of such a parameter is equivalent to the inverse CDF of the histogram.e.5 * binres. 12-29 Histogram settings dialog The threshold evaluation methods in the dialog are explained in greater detail in section 12. the according characteristics are calculated based on logarithmic values.6.actix.7. If the option Skip Values outside Limits is selected.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 284 can be specified. each bin is centred around the corresponding threshold value. the visibility of the CDF. These options are described below: • Normal Threshold Evaluation: In the standard setting for histograms. This option is selected by choosing the radio button x >= thres (inverse CDF). using the axis scale dialog can be used to set the axis limits manually in a way similar to chart graphs.com .5 * binres <= x < thres + 0. this menu entry is also available.5 Threshold Evaluation Methods in Histograms The histogram settings dialog contains three options that influence the creation of the histogram and that can be used to evaluate the coverage of the respective parameter at a certain threshold. all values out of the configured limits are not considered in the creation of the histogram. In a separate histogram window. when evaluating a parameter that is interpreted as being better the lower the values are (such as pathloss or Active Set size).

choose an integer bin resolution (e.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 285 The following example demonstrates the usage of the threshold evaluation method in order to determine the pilot RSCP coverage in a UMTS network at a given threshold. Fig. A histogram from this layer is created by choosing one of the functions from the Histogram from Surface Plot submenus which can be reached by a right mouse click into the plot. How to evaluate the network coverage at a given threshold? The starting point is a surface plot of the predicted or measured pilot RSCP which is presented in the viewing area.actix. It is recommended to hold down the <Shift> key while clicking the menu entry. select the threshold evaluation method x >= thres (inverse CDF). 12-30 Histogram function in the context menu on a surface plot Then open the histogram settings dialog and make the following adjustments: • • • set the upper and lower limits to an integer nearby (preferrably outside the initial range). The final settings can be seen in the dialog below. 1dB).com . www.g.

the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by icon (tooltip Print) from the using the print command from the File menu or the standard toolbar.7.7. accessible from the View Setup… menu item.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 286 Fig. Now a table can be created from the histogram as described in section 12. 12-31 Histogram Settings dialog These settings have immediate effect on the histogram after confirming them with OK.actix.3. 12-32 Histogram Data Table created from a histogram For example. The RSCP coverage of the network can now be directly read from the ‘CDF’ column at a given threshold.6. The size and the orientation of the histogram on the page Graph Page can be adjusted using the page setup dialog. the network RSCP coverage at a threshold of -80dBm is 83. www. Fig. Print Preview or by clicking Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. see section 12.com . Once the histogram is set up the properly.6 Printing a Histogram Histograms can also be printed.5 for details. The usage is comparable to the page setup for chart graphs. In separate histogram windows the same dialog can be accessed from File Print. 12.9%.

respectively. In the following. and histograms can alternatively be displayed in a table. the same functions Histogram from could be invoked from the menu bar by choosing Results Surface Plot as Table or DataTable from Surface Plot. • Creating a table from a result parameter is mainly controlled from the results selection dialog. Then click with the right mouse button into the surface plot to view the context menu and choose one of the subentries from the Histogram from Surface Plot or Data Table from Surface Plot entries.8 Results Analysis with Tables All the network performance data presented in surface plots.8. similar to Excel. All data filtering adjustments are incorporated in the generation of a table. the table is immediately shown in the viewing area. charts.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 287 12. 12-33 where the UMTS DL transmit power on a DCH for a single UE instance was evaluated when making a cell reselection from cell to another. or histograms can also be displayed in tables.actix. As another possibility. Besides this. 12. Also powerful copy and export functions are available. presenting time-related data from a diagram in a table is done by choosing Parameter over Time (Table) (with the option a add more columns for other parameters using the Add to Existing Table flag). such as selection of single fields. one can create a surface plot from the respective parameter. An example that demonstrates the parameter filtering is given in Fig. and post-processing of the data contained in them.1 Creating a Table Since the data of surface plots. Fig. the main access point for doing this is the results selection dialog. chart graphs. The distinct Radioplan Modules have some specialized tables as well as summary reports (which are also tables in turn). each row contains a single parameter value. 12-33 Sample view of a table A table is a grid.com . Alternatively. There are three options to choose from: presenting location-oriented data from a surface plot in a table is done by choosing Raw Data (Table). some details are given on the mentioned opportunities. and columns. • www. This type of data representation is most intuitive regarding the understanding of the data filtering mechanisms of Radioplan. also a histogram from a surface plot can be displayed as a table. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog. Each filter criterion is represented as a separate column in the table. So many known usage concepts of tables are adopted in Radioplan. rows. Then the tabular data of the histogram or the data table per pixel based on the surface plot layer values are immediately displayed in the viewing area. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. presenting histogram data in a table is done by choosing Histogram (Table).

Stores this table as a report in the project. Closes the table window.” problem). specialized tables of different Radioplan Modules can be created as described in the respective chapters of this user guide. Arbitrary parts of a table can be selected and then be copied to the clipboard. Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Copy Table Find… Replace… Undoes the last editing action in the table. Furthermore. the data can be modified. • By default. The same menu entry is also available in any other table window. Exports the table as tab-delimited ASCII file.com . Cuts a selection from the table (and copies it to the clipboard).” or “. Opens a replace dialog valid for the current selection in the table. Data can also be copied into a table from another table at an arbitrary position. www. Pastes the clipboard contents into the table starting at the selected field. This table offers very flexible data choosing Edit analysis functions. reordered.8. Copies a selection of the table to the clipboard. The easiest way to import a new file is to open the embedded clipboard by choosing Edit Embedded Clipboard (Table) and use the menu entry File Import Text File in the appearing grid window. The separate table windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar. it is also possible to create a new table in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the table. Using this option. 12. Table 12-11 Functions of the menu in a table window Menu Entry File Menu Function Import Text File Export Text File Store in Project… Close Edit Menu Imports a tab-delimited ASCII file into this table window.actix. See section 12. These summary reports can be reached from the according menu entries or toolbar icons. several tables can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. For example. Opens a find dialog for the current selection in the table. Redoes the last change in the table. The functions of the menu are given in Table 12-11.4 for more details. newly created tables are displayed in the viewing area (except for the embedded clipboard table).2 Data Import into Tables It is possible to import a tab-delimited ASCII file into a table grid in a separate window.8. data can be copied via the clipboard into this table at arbitrary positions. The BIFF-8 format (MS Excel 97/2000) is supported that translates locale differences. the user can open a new window with an empty table by Embedded Clipboard (Table). some Modules provide a summary report per results set that is also displayed as a table. However. 12.8. Last but not least. Copies the table data to the Windows clipboard. in particular the decimal delimiter (“. Read in the next Section how to copy data from a table. or used to create other presentations of the data as chart graphs or surface plots.3 Data Export from Tables Radioplan provides mighty copy functions to allow for an unlimited post-processing of the network performance data in other applications.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 288 • Likewise.

Last but not least. www. This is done by using the menu entry File File. Alternatively the table can Export Export Grid Data also be exported as plain ASCII data using the menu item File in ASCII Format.000 fields. table data in a separate table window can be exported Export Text into a tab-delimited ASCII file. because it can be very time consuming. and additionally it is editable and extendible. This can be done using the Edit (shortcut <Ctrl-Shift-C>). 12-34 shows an example with two saved reports in the project. and table rows and columns can be dragged & dropped with the mouse. Export Export Grid Data A table can be saved as an Excel 97/2000 file using the File in Excel 97 Format menu item.4 Saving a Table/Report in the Project Any tabular data such as summary reports. The same function is also available in Store in Project…. To this end. the Open entry can be selected from its context menu. the maximum table size is limited to 10. The embedded clipboard is resizable and minimizable which allows for an efficient working.com . 12-35 shows an example of the embedded clipboard filled with collected data. Every new report is stored under its description at a special node called Saved Reports in the Results tab of the tree window. an arbitrary selection of fields can be done with the mouse pointer while holding down the left mouse button. If larger Copy menu item (shortcut <Ctrl-C>) is pressed. Fig. If a selection is copied to the embedded clipboard that has more columns or rows than initially provided by the clipboard. other tabular reports. 12. it is automatically extended. or ordinary tables containing data can be stored in a project. Selecting a complete row or column of the table is accomplished by clicking the corresponding header field. 12-34 The Results tab of the tree window with some saved reports In order to reopen a report.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 289 Due to performance issues. the entire table is selected by clicking the upper left corner of the table. Fig. Lastly.8. Likewise. This can for example be useful to save summary reports or optimization results beyond the temporary lifetime of the underlying data. Radioplan has an embedded clipboard that basically is an empty table grid. This table can be reached from the menu by Embedded Clipboard (Table). Copy Table as Text menu item headers to the clipboard. Alternative. it can be saved by using the menu entry View Table Save Report…. Then a small dialog is shown that separate table windows as File queries the user for a description of the report. its item can be double clicked in the tree window. The selection of fields in a table is intuitive as known from other spread sheet applications. 12. A second copy function transfers the entire table incl. the values of individual table fields can be entered and modified.5 Embedded Clipboard Sometimes it seems to be useful to collect tabular data from several sources in order to compare them and to collectively evaluate them. In particular. a tables are selected and the Edit warning appears in the message window and the selected items will be transferred as plain ASCII text into the clipboard.actix. It is not recommended to export a grid to an Excel file with more than 2000 rows. In particular. a report can be removed from the project by choosing Delete from the context menu. choosing Edit The embedded clipboard offers the same functionality as normal data tables. If the table or summary report is displayed in the viewing area. Fig.8.

The available table evaluation functions are described in Table 12-12. Deviation Log. first a relevant selection of values in the table must be made. Fig.actix. 12-36.6 Statistical Data Evaluation in Tables Numerical values in tables can be evaluated in various ways. This function should be used for values given in dB. Calculates the linear standard deviation of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. 12-36 Statistical evaluation of numerical table data Table 12-12 Statistical evaluation functions in a table Context Menu Entry Evaluate Selection Function Linear Average Log.8. The result value is shown in a dialog. The workflow of statistically evaluating a table selection is demonstrated in Fig. In order to use the functions. The data evaluation functions are accessible from the context menu of a table field.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 290 Fig. Calculates the logarithmic standard deviation of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. Linear Std. Std. Then the chosen evaluation function is applied to the selected data.com . Deviation www. Average Calculates the linear average of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. Calculates the logarithmic average of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. 12-35 Embedded clipboard for data collection and statistical evaluation 12. This function should be used for values given in dB.

Shows a scatter graph from the value pairs of two consecutive selected columns in the table. The value pairs are depicted as (X. Histogram The workflow of creating a graphical presentation from a table selection is demonstrated in Fig.actix.8. Creates a cell-mapped surface plot from the values of the selected column. The resulting plot can either be created as raster plot (where the cell related values are mapped to the best cell areas) or as cell visual. www. In case of a diagram/histogram. Determines the histogram of a selected column of numerical values in a separate histogram window. Table 12-13 Graphical presentation functions from a table Context Menu Entry Graph Selection Function Surface Plot Creates a surface plot layer from the values of the selected column.7 Transforming Table Data into Graphical Presentations Selected values in a table can be transformed into graphical presentations as chart graph. histogram. As an option. In order to map these values to pixels. Mapped Surface Plot Time Chart Scatter Chart Shows a curve of a selected column of numerical values vs. their index (“time”) in a separate chart graph window. another column can be selected that is assumed to contain valid cell IDs. In order to map these values to the cell coverage areas. it is possible to weight the cell-based values relative to the associated cell areas. or surface plot by using the entries in the Graph Selection submenu of the table grid context menu. a separate window is opened with the chart or histogram. Determines the number of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 291 Context Menu Entry Function Sum Min Max Count Calculates the sum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. a new result layer is created.and y-coordinates.com . 12. in case of a surface plot.Y) dots in the graph. Determines the maximum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. two other columns can be selected to define the x. The available presentation functions are described in Table 12-13. 12-37 with a histogram as example. Determines the minimum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.

It must be ensured that the function is called from function Graph Selection the column that contains the values to be plotted. www. tree label (to appear in the Layers tab). and there must be two other columns that define the Cartesian coordinates (x. Then a dialog appears as shown in Fig. and unit for the new plot. pixel size.y pair) of each value. Then a dialog appears as shown in Fig.7. then ‘No header row’ should be selected here. If there are no headers on top of the columns. The surface plot is eventually created when pressing the OK button of the dialog. Below that the columns specifying the x.1 Creating a Surface Plot from Table Data A surface plot from position related values can be created by using the context menu Surface Plot.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 292 Fig.actix. It must be ensured that the function is called from the column that contains the cell related values to be plotted. Fig.y coordinates of the pixel locations must be determined.7. the user can specify plot title (to appear in the black legend in the viewing area). 12-38. 12-37 Graphical presentation of numerical table data 12.com .8. and there must be another column that define the corresponding cell IDs. Furthermore.8. 12. 12-38 Create surface plot from table dialog In the field Header Row one can select the table row that contains the column headers. 12-39.2 Creating a Mapped Surface Plot or Cell Visual from Table Data A surface plot from cell related values can be created by using the context menu function Graph Selection Mapped Surface Plot.

tree label (to appear in the Layers tab).. then ‘No header row’ should be selected here. come from a measurement device or an RNP tool. The reason for this is that the new result set is always added to the current project. Note that when creating a mapped raster layer. i. The actual conversion can be initiated by clicking with the right mouse button into the table grid and choosing Import Table as Result Set from the appearing context menu as shown Data Conversion in Fig. the user can specify plot title (to appear in the black legend in the viewing area). will be used.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 293 Fig. In the following. for cell visuals generally all data from the table. the cell-based values can be weighted with the according cell areas by selecting the checkbox Weight Values by Covered Cell Area. Make sure that the project is currently open that the table data shall be imported into. the cell values are directly displayed in the cell visuals. An interesting option is to first load a tab-delimited ASCII file with some data to be analyzed into the embedded clipboard table. The data could. Furthermore. an example is given how to further evaluate simulation results created by ATOLL [ATL-UM] with Radioplan. In the field Header Row one can select the table row that contains the column headers. all the data evaluation and filtering functions available from the results selection dialog can be applied to them. The surface plot is eventually created when pressing the OK button of the dialog.e. in the latter one. The simulation results can be transferred to Radioplan via the Windows Clipboard and are copied into the embedded clipboard. 12. However.8 Converting Table Data into a Result Set As a further option. pixel size. 12-40. www.g. If a raster layer is to be created. any kind of data from a table can be converted into a result set which opens an unforeseen flexibility of data analysis. and then to convert it into a result set.actix. the cell values are mapped on the best cell areas. In the first case. 12-39 Creating a cell visual from cell related values There are two types of surface plots in which the cell related values can be displayed: as raster layer or as cell visual. independent of the active network layer(s).com . though the embedded clipboard is independent of any project. only data from the currently active network layer(s) will be considered. If the data have once been converted to a result set. If there are no headers on top of the columns.8. and unit for the new plot. Below that the column specifying the cell IDs must be determined. e.

Fig. Fig. The according entries of the dialog are explained in Table 12-14. This makes it easier to identify the distinct columns in the conversion procedure.com . it is recommended to have the column descriptions in the first row of the imported table data. 12-41 Convert table to result set dialog www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 294 Further. It is possible to define up to five parameters in the new result set. 12-40 Converting a table into a result set Then the conversion dialog is shown where the user can determine the role of the distinct data columns during the conversion procedure. An example of this dialog is given in Fig.actix. 12-41.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 295 Table 12-14 Parameters for the conversion of table data into a result set Parameter Description Header Row If there is a row containing headers. indicated by the symbol A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as simulation data. refer to Fig. Choose the column to be interpreted as instance numbers of the parameter ID. data. and the activity indicator as Assigned NE.com . This enables the user to evaluate the imported parameters e. the service was chosen as parameter ID. then row 0 can be chosen (default). Make sure that the correct projection coordinate system is chosen. This flag must be set if the positions are given in geographic coordinates. according to UEs only active in UL or DL. A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as measurement . . This name can be changed easily by double-clicking on it and entering the new name in the appearing dialog. initially with the default name “From Table”. For each parameter. In the example. it can be selected here. . All rows above the header row including itself will be excluded from the data import.g. After the data have been converted. Choose the column to be interpreted as time or frame information. i. 12-42. indicated by the symbol A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as generic data. Result Parameter Columns Parameter 1…5 Choose the column to be interpreted as a parameter for the new result set. Fig. the new result set is shown in the Results tab of the tree window.actix. If there is no header row. 12-42 New simulation result set as imported from the embedded clipboard www. indicated by the symbol Measurement Data Simulation Data Generic Data Meta Data Columns Pos X or Longitude Pos Y or Latitude Convert Geographic Coordinates ID Assigned NE Time or Frame Instance Number Choose the column to be interpreted as x-coordinate (given in m) or longitude (given in °). respectively. it is assumed that the data start in the row below the header row. This will ease the selection of the other columns later. Choose the column to be interpreted as Assigned NE. a name and a unit can be given to the right. respectively. Choose the column to be interpreted as y-coordinate (given in m) or latitude (given in °).e. Choose the column to be interpreted as parameter ID.

Fig.actix. This is accomplished with the settings given in Fig. www.9 Customization of Tables The initial scaling of the rows and columns in a table is determined automatically. This is accomplished by double-clicking the respective header field of the row/column.8. Note that such an ordering operation generally causes a permutation of columns or rows. The data in the table can be ordered with respect to a certain row or column. sometimes a column may be too narrow thus hiding a part of the field contents. 12-43 Results selection dialog for non-speech users active in UL Fig. or a multiline head row of a table only shows a part of the header. However. the histogram of the total UE transmit power for non-speech users active in UL shall be generated.com . 12-44 Histogram of the total UE transmit power for non-speech users 12. 12-43. That is why the width of table rows and columns can be modified afterwards by simply dragging the border lines between rows/columns with the mouse pointer.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 296 In order to demonstrate the data evaluation. 12-44. The resulting histogram is shown in Fig.

These functions are available from the Modify Grid submenu in the table context menu. Read more on the table display settings in appendix 13.9. 12-46. www. The appearance can be adjusted in the grid page setup dialog. Their functionality is self-explanatory.10 Printing a Table Tables can also be printed. histograms. Fig. these functions are applied to the entire table. accessible from the View Table Page Setup… menu item. Both generic and customized plugins are available for different technologies. If there is no active selection. it can be decided. All these functions can be accessed from the Table menu. The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are described in Table 12-15. The page setup dialog is shown in Fig. These kind of plug-ins make use of all previously described means of network performance analysis like surface plots. In order to modify the data in a table. can be specified.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 297 For flexible table handling. if the grid should be printed in color or not.com . Find and Replace functions are available.8. tables.3.actix. 12-45 Page setup dialog for tables Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the icon (tooltip Print) from the standard toolbar.1 UMTS KPI Analysis The UMTS KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. Note that selecting the menu entry Tools in the moment of invoking this function at least one UMTS network layer must be selected in order to get the UMTS KPI analysis functions. the page orientation. and summary reports. rows and columns can be inserted or deleted. 12. For instance. These features can be initiated from the Edit menu of a table window and are applied to the current selection in the table. Once the table is set up the properly. Here only generic plug-ins are covered.9 Network KPI Analysis Radioplan offers several plug-ins for fully automatic network KPI analysis. 12. The outfit of tables can be modified in various ways. printing of column and row headers etc. 12-45.2. 12. Moreover. The plug-in dialog is opened by Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 298 Fig. The minimum required pilot RSCP for providing cell coverage.com . — % — Total Cell Tx Power dBm www. the pilot RSCP coverage will be evaluated. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the RSCP study. — dBm Enable Pilot Ec/I0 Study Minimum Pilot Ec/I0 Cell Overlap Study If this checkbox is active. The cell overlap margin below the best pilot RSCP to be considered for cell overlap. the cell overlap will be evaluated. The constant total cell Tx power that is assumed in all cells for the pilot Ec/I0 study in case the option “Constant Cell Tx Power “ is selected. Three different evaluation thresholds of the pilot Ec/I0 for the Ec/I0 study. If this checkbox is active. A radio button to use a constant cell Tx power in all cells for Ec/I0 plot creation. 12-46 Generic UMTS KPI analysis dialog Table 12-15 UMTS KPI analysis thresholds Parameter Pilot RSCP Study Description Unit Enable Pilot RSCP Study Minimum Pilot RSCP Pilot Ec/I0 Study If this checkbox is active. the pilot Ec/I0 coverage (assuming a constant cell total power) will be evaluated.actix. The constant network load in all cells in case the option “Constant Network Load” is selected. — dB Enable Cell Overlap Study Minimum Pilot RSCP Cell Overlap Window Calculation — dBm dB Constant Network Load Network Load Constant Cell Tx Power A radio button to use a constant network load in all cells for Ec/I0 plot creation.

Otherwise. The assumed shadowing margin of the mobile radio channel.actix. the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left. A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the analysis area. Various georeferenced raster formats are supported. a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool. An example of such a KPI analysis summary is given in Fig.com . After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button. It is also possible to specify an alternative traffic map for the study. 12-47.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 299 Parameter Description Unit Individual Cell Tx Power A radio button to use individual cell Tx powers for Ec/I0 plot creation. the KPI summary report will additionally contain individual statistics for all cells. When the processing is finished. Optionally. If this checkbox is active. the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. — — The study applies the traffic map data of the project in terms of masking the non-zero traffic areas. an alternative traffic map can be specified for the KPI analysis. If this checkbox is active. The effective calculation pixel size for all studies of the KPI analysis.g. proper surface plots for the selected studies will be created. www. Furthermore. only the global statistics for the entire network will be given. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e. — MS Noise Figure Shadowing Margin Calculation Pixel Size Calculate Statistics per Cell dB dB m — Create Plots Alternative Traffic Map — — Area Filter Simulation Area Analysis Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the simulation area. The assumed average noise figure at the mobile terminal.

The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are identical to those for UMTS which are described in Table 12-15.9.2 CDMA2000 KPI Analysis The CDMA2000 KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. 12-48 Generic CDMA2000 KPI analysis dialog The study applies the traffic map data of the project in terms of masking the non-zero traffic areas. Fig. 12-48.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 300 Fig.com . www. The plug-in dialog is opened by Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. 12-47 UMTS KPI analysis summary report 12.actix. It is also possible to specify an alternative traffic map for the study. the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button. Note that selecting the menu entry Tools in the moment of invoking this function at least one CDMA2000 network layer must be selected in order to get the CDMA2000 KPI analysis functions.

com .9. a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area. Fig. This function is invoked by selecting the menu entry Tools KPI Measurement Analysis while at least one CDMA2000 network layer is active. The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are described in Table 12-16. there is another CDMA2000 KPI analysis plug-in that allows to compare the network performance from measurements with Radioplan the planning data. 12-49. The plug-in dialog is opened by selecting Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. its parameters are described in Table 12-17. on the other hand it delivers a statistical comparison between the measurements and the network planning data. 12. Note that in the the menu entry Tools moment of invoking this function at least one GSM network layer must be selected in order to get the GSM KPI analysis functions. Furthermore. for an example see Fig. 12-49 Generic GSM KPI analysis dialog www. 12-50. 12-47.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 301 When the processing is finished. Thus the resulting report contains two sections “Measurement Analysis” and “Difference to Planning Data” which give statistical measures for each cell. The KPI analysis summary for CDMA2000 is similar as for UMTS.actix.3 GSM KPI Analysis The GSM KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left. In addition to the pure planning data related KPI analysis. This KPI analysis plug-in accomplishes two purposes: On the one hand it performs a comprehensive statistical analysis of the measurement data. This KPI analysis dialog is identical to the one shown in Fig.

the clutter specific pathloss offsets will be applied on the Rx Level Threshold. Cell Overlap Count Step Size Max. — dBm dB Min. m — Create Plots — www. The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the RSCP study. This will mark the upper end of the plot color palette. — — Threshold Rx Level C/I Study dBm Enable C/I Study Use Frequency Plan If this checkbox is active. If this checkbox is active. the KPI summary report will additionally contain individual statistics for all cells. the frequency plan is considered in the interference calculation. If this checkbox is active. If this checkbox is active. Otherwise. Otherwise.com . proper surface plots for the selected studies will be created. This will mark the upper end of the C/I plot color palette. The minimum required Rx Level for providing cell coverage. This will mark the lower end of the C/I plot color palette. the Rx Level coverage will be evaluated. This will mark the lower end of the plot color palette.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 302 Table 12-16 GSM KPI analysis thresholds Parameter Rx Level Study Description Unit Enable Rx Level Study Use Clutter Offsets If this checkbox is active. The minimum C/I to be evaluated. — — Minimum Rx Level Minimum C/I Step Size Maximum C/I Cell Overlap Study dBm dB dB dB Enable Cell Overlap Study Minimum Rx Level Cell Overlap Window If this checkbox is active. The step size between the minimum and maximum Cell Overlap Count. all BCCH and TCH channels would be assumed on the same frequency. Cell Overlap Count Calculation # # # Calculation Pixel Size Calculate Statistics per Cell The effective calculation pixel size for all studies of the KPI analysis. the BCCH C/I coverage will be evaluated.actix. The maximum C/I to be evaluated. The maximum Cell Overlap Count to be evaluated. The minimum required Rx Level for providing cell coverage. If this checkbox is active. The step size between the minimum and maximum C/I. The minimum Cell Overlap Count to be evaluated. This effectively models indoor coverage. It is defined by an upper and a lower limit. The cell overlap window below the best BCCH Rx Level to be considered for cell overlap. the cell overlap will be evaluated. Then the resulting C/I would mirror the general overlap / interference situation between all cells. only the global statistics for the entire network will be given.

This KPI analysis dialog is shown in Fig. Various georeferenced raster formats are supported. there is another KPI analysis plug-in that allows to compare the network performance from measurements with the planning data.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 303 Parameter Description Unit Alternative Traffic Map Optionally. A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the analysis area. The technology used for the KPI plug-in is determined by the currently active network layer(s). the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left. its parameters are described in Table 12-17. 12. the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. Furthermore. 12-50. an alternative traffic map can be specified for the KPI analysis. a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area. 12-50 Generic measurement KPI analysis dialog www.4 KPI Analysis with Measurements In addition to the pure planning data related KPI analysis plug-ins of the previous sections. — — The study applies the traffic map data of the project in terms of masking the non-zero traffic areas. When the processing is finished. This function is available for all supported Radioplan KPI technologies and can be invoked by selecting the menu entry Tools Measurement Analysis.actix.com . Fig. — Area Filter Simulation Area Analysis Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the simulation area. It is also possible to specify an alternative traffic map for the study. After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button.9.

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 304

Table 12-17 Measurement KPI analysis settings

Parameter Project

Description

Unit

Project

The project that the measurement results set(s) shall be taken from for comparison.

Measurement Results Sets

Result Set

A list field with available results sets. One or more result sets from the selected project can be chosen for the KPI comparison.

Calculation

Cell Overlap Window Measurement Data Bin Size
Area Filter

The Rx power range below the best cell Rx power that is applied to assess the cell overlap. The binning size applied to the measurements in the KPI comparison.

dB m

Simulation Area Analysis Area

A radio button to confine the measurement KPI analysis to the simulation area. A radio button to confine the measurement KPI analysis to the analysis area.

— —

This KPI analysis plug-in accomplishes two purposes: On the one hand it performs a comprehensive statistical analysis of the measurement data, on the other hand it delivers a statistical comparison between the measurements and the network planning data. Thus the resulting report contains two sections “Measurement Analysis” and “Difference to Planning Data” which give statistical measures for each cell. An example of the measurement KPI analysis report is presented in Fig. 12-51.
Radioplan UMTS Measurment Analysis for Project 'CS Capacity Opt Sample ORG Tuned'
Created Pixel Size [m2] Cell Overlap Window [dB] Filter Area Cell/SC 25.04.2006 10:41:03 50x50 6.00 Simulation Area Measurement Analysis Area [bins] Measured Best Server Area [Bin] Area [Bin]

Area [km2] Outside Best Measured Server Area Area [km2] [Bin]

Best Server Area [km2]

Distance to Cell Outside Best Distance Min Distance Server Area [m] Mean [m] [km2]

Measured Values Distance Max Mean RSCP Mean RSCP [m] [dBm] Best [dBm]

Mean Cell Overlapping

02-1 SC 25 02-2 SC 33 02-3 SC 41 05-1 SC 97 05-2 SC 105 05-3 SC 113 06-1 SC 121 06-2 SC 129 06-3 SC 137 07-1 SC 145

52 102 40 87 62 1 13 74 80 4

19 23 15 12 15 0 0 20 43 0

33 79 25 75 47 1 13 54 37 4

0.13 0.26 0.10 0.22 0.16 0.00 0.03 0.19 0.20 0.01

0.05 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.04 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.11 0.00

0.08 0.20 0.06 0.19 0.12 0.00 0.03 0.14 0.09 0.01

37.83 37.83 37.83 471.14 471.14 594.99 49.32 42.52 49.32 158.74

802.04 831.36 399.89 1216.85 962.05 594.99 488.74 833.18 693.60 364.23

1519.96 1680.62 1519.96 2306.95 2153.73 594.99 905.23 1965.02 2221.56 577.73

-83.98 -81.09 -82.10 -86.36 -87.10 -82.60 -79.87 -79.85 -83.07 -93.14

-78.67 -74.53 -69.86 -79.05 -78.89

1.89 1.78 1.60 2.42 1.93

-66.32 -79.34

1.25 1.84

Fig. 12-51 Sample measurement KPI report

12.9.5 UMTS Combined RSCP and Ec/I0 Analysis
Network quality is determined by both radio coverage (in UMTS: pilot RSCP) and interference ratio (in UMTS: pilot Ec/I0). Thus it is interesting to analyze the area or the traffic percentage where both parameters are above a certain required threshold. This analysis can be performed in the combined RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis plug-in. Combined Pilot A new combined study can be started by selecting the menu entry Tools RSCP/EcIo Analysis. Then a dialog is opened where the user can configure the required thresholds for the pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 coverage and some further relevant parameters. This analysis study dialog is shown in Fig. 12-52, the configuration is explained in Table 12-18.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 305

Fig. 12-52 Combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis dialog for UMTS Table 12-18 UMTS combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis thresholds

Parameter RSCP / Ec/I0 Study

Description

Unit

Minimum Pilot RSCP Minimum Pilot Ec/I0
Calculation

The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the combined study. The minimum pilot Ec/I0 evaluation threshold for the combined study.

dBm dB

Constant Network Load Network Load Constant Cell Tx Power Total Cell Tx Power

A radio button to use a constant network load in all cells for Ec/I0 calculation. The constant network load in all cells in case the option “Constant Network Load” is selected. A radio button to use a constant cell Tx power in all cells for Ec/I0 calculation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The constant total cell Tx power that is assumed in all cells for the pilot Ec/I0 study in case the option “Constant Cell Tx Power “ is selected. A radio button to use individual cell Tx powers for Ec/I0 calculation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e.g. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool. The assumed total noise threshold being composed of the thermal background noise and the average noise figure at the mobile terminal. The effective calculation pixel size for the combined analysis. If this checkbox is active, plots of the analysis parameters will be created when the study is executed.

— % —

dBm

Individual Cell Tx Power

Total Noise Threshold

dB

Calculation Pixel Size Create Plots

m —

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 306

The study produces a summary report that shows the combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 coverage in the simulation/analysis areas in relation to the covered area and the covered traffic. If the option Create Plots was selected, coverage plots of the various coverage areas are created and listed in the Layers tab to the left. An exemplary summary report of this combined study is given in Fig. 12-53.

Fig. 12-53 Sample combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 report

12.10 Traffic Matrix Generation
Radioplan can automatically create traffic matrices from live network data such as cell counters collected from a switch. By means of the Traffic Matrix Generation wizard, which is called by the menu entry Tools Traffic Matrix Generation , for any service type a traffic matrix can be generated that:

• • •

distributes the cell counter traffic to the best serving cell areas, optionally only to areas with a minimum beacon signal received power, optionally considers clutter weights, is attached to a Service Profile previously defined in the Radioplan project tree.

This functionality can be used as an alternative to importing traffic data from a radio network planning tool (refer to section 5.5.1). The following sections describe the prerequesites for that as well as the wizard-based traffic matrix generation itself.

12.10.1 Prerequisites
Before starting the Traffic Matrix Generation wizard, the following prerequisites should be observed:

Select the Network Layer(s) for the best serving cell calculation The best serving cell areas will be calculated for the Radioplan project configuration of the selected network layer(s) (refer to section 5.2). Thus, the calculation can be based on predictions imported from a planning tool as well as on predictions tuned afterwards in Radioplan by measurements.

• • •

Only the active cells will be considered for traffic matrix generation. The Simulation Area defines the area for traffic matrix generation. Define a Service Profile as part of the Radioplan project user configuration, to which the generated traffic matrix shall be attached to. A set of profiles representing a generic user can be created easily by selecting Add Generic User Profiles from the context menu of the User folder in the project tree (refer also to section 6.6.5). Through the Network Layer setting of each UE Profile that references the Service Profile the traffic matrix can also be assigned to a specific network layer. For more information on the user configuration in a Radioplan project, please refer to section 6.6.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 307

• •

If the traffic shall be weighted during the distribution to the best serving areas based on the clutter matrix, a clutter matrix must be defined in the Radioplan project. If the traffic shall be weighted during the distribution to the best serving areas based on another raster map, this raster map must be displayed as a surface plot in the Radioplan Layers tab. This surface plot can be created, for example, by importing a raster data file (refer to section 3.4.12), by displaying any matrix of the Radioplan project (e.g. clutter matrix; refer to section 6.4.1.5), and by creating any other surface plot based on the comprehensive Radioplan analysis capabilities (refer to section 12.5).

The input data with the cell-based traffic (counter) values must be available as a list of cell names (cell IDs as in the Radioplan project) associated with the cell traffic value. It may be provided in a spreadsheet application for copy-paste via the clipboard or as a tab- or comma-separated file: *.txt , *.csv , or *.dat .

The traffic value may be basically any type. As what type it is interpreted by Radioplan, depends on the Service Profile to which the traffic matrix is attached to, e.g.:

• • •

Erlang – for service profiles with Traffic Model “Speech /Video” – i.e. a served traffic value for circuit-switched services number of potential users – for service profiles with Traffic Model “AtollCompatible …” – i.e. an offered traffic value number of simultaneously active users (of a certain type) – for service profiles with any other Traffic Model – i.e. a served traffic value for any type of service

The traffic matrix in Radioplan will always represent this traffic value as a spatial density <any_trafic_funit>/km2 , because this is independent of the pixel size.

12.10.2 Traffic Matrix Generation
The traffic matrix generation is started by the menu entry Tools Traffic Matrix Generation . It opens a 3-page wizard that guides the user through the configuration options. At the first page of the wizard, the input data can be specified and verified against the Radioplan project, Fig. 12-54.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 308

Fig. 12-54 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Input Data

In order to provide the input data, either copy-paste the corresponding two columns from a spreadsheet application into the two-column grid or click the Load Traffic From File… button. In order to paste into the grid, simply select the first Cell ID field. As the next step, by clicking the Check Input Data button, the provided list of Cell IDs is compared to the cells of the network layer(s) selected in the Radioplan project. Thereby, all lines where the Cell ID field does not correspond to any cell in the selected Radioplan network layer(s), are automatically removed from the grid. The result is indicated in a message box:

• •

Traffic Input Data Are Valid : There is a traffic value defined for each cell of the selected Radioplan network layer(s).

Close the message box and click Next to proceed.
n Cells were found without Traffic Value. Please check the Validity of Input Data! For one or more cells of the selected Radioplan network layer(s) there is no traffic value specified (either the field is empty or the cell ID is not listed.

After closing the message box the respective cells are also listed in the grid having “No Traffic Value”. In the latter case the following options are possible:

• •

Simply add the missing traffic values by editing the respective fields in the grid, eventually Check Input Data again, and proceed by clicking Next. There area two scenarios to cope with missing traffic values:
▫ Consider Cells with Traffic Value only : The values are not available for cells, which had not been active in the network, when the counters where collected. Then, the traffic input data only represents the active cells of the live network and should also be distributed to those cells serving areas only. Accordingly, the traffic matrix generation will be executed only for the cells with a traffic value.

By checking Permanently deactivate Cells without Traffic Value , the cells
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 309

without traffic values will remain deactivated in the Radioplan project as a result of the traffic matrix generation. Otherwise, they are only deactivated during the Traffic Matrix Generation.
▫ Consider all Cells : In this case, the traffic matrix generation assumes zero traffic for the undefined cells, but calculates the best serving cell areas also for those cells. Accordingly, no traffic is spread to the undefined cells, thus creating zero traffic areas.

At the second page of the wizard, optionally, the traffic weighting can be specified, Fig. 12-55. In the distribution of the cell traffic values to each cell’s best serving area weight based on the clutter or based on a raster layer can be considered. A formula for the clutter weighting is given in section 6.6.6.7. In any case the Weighting Factors are used as relative weights, i.e. a pixel with weighting factor 10 will get 10 times the traffic of a clutter pixel with weighting factor 1. Moreover, a Weighting Factor of zero results in zero traffic for the respective area. At the same time, the total traffic in each cell area will remain the same as the input traffic value; only the relative distribution of the traffic across each cell area may be different.

Weighting by Clutter Matrix : For each clutter class a Weighting Factor can be specified by editing the Weighting Factor column. Then the weight to be applied to each pixel depends on the pixels clutter class. The clutter weights can be pre-configured in the TrafficMatrixGeneration.ini configuration file, which is located in the configuration\resultanalysis\ subdirectory of the Radioplan installation (see [R-Admin] for more information). Weighting by Raster Layer : If one or more surface plots are available in the Layers tab, they are available for selection in the associated drop-down list. If a raster layer is selected, then the weight to be applied to each pixel is taken from that surface plot.

Fig. 12-55 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Traffic Weighting

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 310

Then, at the third page of the wizard, the calculation and output options can be specified, Fig. 12-56.

Fig. 12-56 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Calculation and Output Options

The calculation and output options include:

• • • • •

The Pixel Size [m] for the traffic matrix to be generated. If Enable Area below Min. Rx Power [dBm] is enabled, the traffic is only distributed to areas where the beacon signal power received from the best serving cell exceeds the specified Min. Rx Power. The Scaling Factor is applied to each pixel of the generated traffic matrix. The traffic matrix to be generated must be assigned to a Service Profile. All service profiles defined in the user configuration of the Radioplan project are availabel for selection from the associated drop-down list. If Generate Plot of Traffic Matrix is enabled, a surface plot of the generated traffic matrix is automatically created at the end. The unit that will be displayed in the layer settings of that surface plot can also be defined. Note that the specified unit does not affect the traffic matrix generation process nor the contents of the generated traffic matrix; it is just a display property of the generated surface plot layer.

By clicking Run , the traffic matrix generation is executed. As the result a new traffic matrix is created and attached to the specified service profile in the Radioplan project tree. And if Generate Plot of Traffic Matrix was enabled, it is also already displayed as a surface plot. The end of the processing is also logged in the Message window.

12.11 Interference Matrix Generation
Radioplan can automatically create interference matrices from the project data. Such interference matrices are typically used for frequency planning.

www.actix.com

the following prerequisites should be observed: • • • • Only the active Network Layer(s) will be considered for interference matrix generation (refer to section 5.252492538 adj 0.com . 12.002303266 0.121672505 0. where: C/I values must be integer in ascending order per row.09121122 0.90878878 0. The Simulation Area defines the area for interference matrix generation.36944134 0. For example: co 0.009815329 0.5 0.566183833 0.11.841344746 0.747507462 0.01513014 0.001349898 0.047790352 0. all traffic matrices will be considered that are referenced through their Service Profile by an active UE Profile and where the UE Profile either references an active network layer or ALL network layers. a C/I mapping table with 3 columns is required as an input to the interference matrix generation: • • • • • C/I 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 .63055866 0..txt file..933192799 0.878327495 0.158655254 0. predictions tuned afterwards in Radioplan by measurements.797671619 0. 1st column: C/I threshold 2nd column: co-channel interference probability for the respective C/I thresholds 3rd column: adjacent-channel interference probability for the respective C/I thresholds These values can be specified in a tab-separated *.003830381 0.433816167 0.actix. the resulting interference matrices can be based on: • • • predictions as imported from a planning tool.2).022750132 0. if the pathloss matrices were created from measurements.033376508 0. The following sections describe the prerequesites for that and how to create interference matrices as well as the contents of the interference matrix result set and how to export interference matrices. and rows not starting with such an integer number are ignored. Moreover. or measurements only.006209665 0.000770985 www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 311 Since a Radioplan project may contain different types of pathloss matrices. Only the active cells will be considered for interference matrix generation.691462461 0.066807201 0. For generating an interference matrix using Traffic Weighting.308537539 0.1 Prerequisites Before starting the Interference Matrix Generation wizard.

com . The title of the Result Set that will be created as a result of interference matrix generation. the interference matrix generation is executed and the progress and end is logged in the Message window. The default is “Interference Matrix”. Table 12-19 Create Interference Matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit C/I Mapping Table File The file with the mapping of C/I thresholds to probabilities of co-channel and adjacent-channel interference – as specified in section 12. Accordingly. — Title (Result Set) — Noise Threshold dBm Pixel Resolution Weighting m — By clicking OK .2 Create an Interference Matrix Result Set The interference matrix generation is started by the menu entry Tools Interference Matrix Create Interference Matrix… which opens the Create Interference Matrix dialog. Use Traffic Weighting: considers the traffic matrices configured in the project (refer to section 12.11.11.1. 12.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 312 12. 12-57 Create Interference Matrix dialog A C/I mapping table – as specified in section 12.11. Use Area (homogeneous traffic): ignores the traffic configuration of the project and calculates the probabilities of interfered area.3 Interference Matrix Result Set An “interference matrix” actually represents interference probabilities for a number of cellto-cell relations.11.1 – is a mandatory input. www.1) for weighting the probabilities of interfered area. Pixels with a best server beacon signal received power (for GSM: RxLev_DL) not exceeding this threshold are ignored by the interference matrix generation.actix. Fig. Fig. The pixel size that is applied for generating the interference matrix. At the end a new Result Set with the specified name is added (appended) to the Results tab. thus yielding probabilities of interfered traffic. but cell-based values that refer to another cell. the Interference Matrix Result Set does not contain pixelbased values.11. 12-57. with the configuration parameters defined in Table 12-19.

in the opened Parameters for Active Project dialog. For example.com . In the interference matrix generation process.actix. for each best cell i (‘C’ representing the received signal level): for each other cell k != i: for each best server area pixel of cell i: calculate Ci/Ik (thereby ignoring C or I levels below Noise Threshold) map it to the 2 probabilities: for co-channel and for adjacent-channel interference multiply the probability with: the bin size (for interfered area) and. but measures that indicate accordingly higher or lower interference probability. 12-59. with the total traffic density value of the bin (thereby ignoring bins with zero traffic density) Accumulate the weighted probabilities over the bins yielding: the probable interfered traffic or area for co-channel and adjacent channel interference Fig. 12-58. Fig. Both parameter either represent interfered area. for interfered traffic. 1]. Use Traffic Weighting was selected in the Create Interference Matrix dialog. www. selecting Parameter over Time (Table) in the Graphical Settings. two values are distinguished: • • a measure for co-channel interference probability: IM – CoChannel [Num] and a measure for adjacent channel interference probability: IM – AdjChannel [Num] .4 Export an Interference Matrix An Interference Matrix Result Set can be exported to a tab-delimited file in Cellopt AFP 2 Interference Matrix Export Interference Matrix… . if Use Area (homogeneous traffic) was selected as Weighting. format by the menu entry Tools which opens the Export Interference Matrix dialog. a list of the cell-to-cell relations for each Result Set parameter can be created a double-click on the parameter and then.4). 12-58 Calculation principle of the values in the Interference Matrix Result Set The Interference Matrix Result Set can be further analyzed and displayed by all usual functions for a Radioplan result set (refer to section 12. Both values actually are not probabilities in the range [0. or interfered traffic.11. these values are calculated as illustrated in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 313 In the Result Set. 12.

traffic data measured at a switch over a certain period can be aggregated in order to use it as representative input to traffic matrix generation. www.1). Thus.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 314 Fig. 12-60.11. 12. For such a Generic result set.com .12 Result Set Aggregation Radioplan can be used to aggregate data that has been imported by the Performance Counter measurement import plugin into a Generic Radioplan result set (refer to section 5. The contents of such a generated file in Cellopt AFP 2 format may look as follows: 12.9. Even if only one is listed.5 Customizing the Interference Matrix Generation Some default settings of the interference matrix generation can be pre-configured in the winesinterferencematrix. Fig. it must be selected.actix. the result set aggregation can be started by selecting the entry Aggregate Result Set… from the context menu of the result set name. automatic neighbor list planning. for example.ini file in the configuration data folder %APPDATA%\configuration (see [R-Admin] for details). 12-59 Export Interference Matrix dialog In this dialog. or automatic parameter optimization in Radioplan. the user must: • • specify the name of the interference matrix file to be created and select the Interference Matrix Result Set. All Interference Matrix result sets are listed.

One of them has to be selected as the master counter in order to determine the Busy Hour or Busy Period. more generally. i. That result set contains the average value of N_Best Busy Hour values for each cell.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 315 Fig.com . The availability range Start Time and End Time is initialized with the period for which the selected Master counter is available in the underlying result set. The counter of one hour could be missing to still achieve 95% data availability.e. where N_Best means is specified by the Number of Days. This time range may be further delimited to get a shorter time focus.actix. if the Measurement Period is set to 60 minutes. Typically the master counter represents some kind of traffic. all performance counter parameters of the result set are listed. www. 24 counter measurements for a particular cell and day. will be discarded. Fig. a Busy Period for each cell and day ▫ If the Average flag is checked. one for each hour of the day. All other counters will be aggregated for the same Busy Hour or Busy Period time stamps. Counter measurements for which the data availability threshold is not exceeded. how many values for each measurement object the selected master counter consists of. There are two methods available to aggregate the result set data: • Calculate the Busy Hour or. • Calculate the Maximum Value for each cell In the Select Master drop-down list. 12-61. For example. and Time Range. e. Based on that the data availability is checked before the result set aggregation for each cell and day. a further result set in addition to the Busy Hour result set will be created. have to be available to achieve a Data Availability per Day of 100%. The Average Number of Values per Object indicates to the user. The Data Availability per Day [%] that is required to use the data for aggregation and the Measurement Period [minute] can be specified. It is automatically generated for the selected Master counter. when aggregating a huge amount of performance counters. 12-60 Generic result set context menu This opens the result set aggregation dialog.g. Measurement Period.

At the end a new … (Busy Period) result set with the name corresponding to the processed result set is created. 12-61 Result Set Aggregation dialog By clicking OK in the result set aggregation dialog.com . www. the data aggregation is executed.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 316 Fig.

1. Every project needs its own data and should thus have an own data directory.1.1 Network Configuration Data Specification 13. The names of the configuration files can be chosen arbitrarily.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 317 13 Appendix This appendix contains additional information and reference guides about Radioplan in general. then there must be three corresponding configuration files in the config\utran\nodeb directory.2 Network Configuration File Format Most of the network configuration files are in ASCII format. three different sites in the simulation setup. however. All files (if not unique) contain an identifier inside to uniquely distinguish between different objects. for instance. Inside this project directory. Each line contains first a parameter name (starting with capital letter) followed by an equation sign (“=”) and subsequently a value of the parameter. see section 6. 13. Normally. they must be unique inside a certain directory. Comments start with a “#” and continue until the end of line.com . It is also possible to give comments in the configuration files.g.1 Directory Structure of the Network Configuration Files The network configuration files are ordered in a hierarchical directory structure. every leaf directory in the tree contains all possible data sets in separate files. 13. It is characterized by line based data.actix. pathloss data). Always use Radioplan to modify the network configuration! www. The parameters (“Java properties”) can appear in arbitrary order in the files. the hierarchical directory structure resides as shown in Fig. the network configuration files should not be changed manually although they are in a readable ASCII format. Fig. The configuration files use the Java properties file format in general. If there are.1. 13-1 Directory structure of the configuration files In general. The only exception is large binary files for grid-based data (e. This structure is also mirrored in the tree structure that is displayed in the Configuration tab of the tree window in Radioplan. 13-1.

actix. File Menu Creates a new project Loads configuration data (creates a new project) Saves configuration data of the current project Functions related to current project (see File Saves the current plot as image (not for tables) Connect/Disconnect Atoll session Import functions (see File Export functions (see File Import) Export) Current Project) Shows print dialog for current view Shows print preview Shows printer setup dialog Quits the application File Import Imports a raster file into an image layer Imports a vector file into an image layer Imports a Radioplan layer Imports a graphics layer Imports a Radioplan project from another database Imports a new Asset project Imports a new ATOLL project Imports a new TCPU project Imports a new NetPlan project Imports a new Odyssey project Imports a new Planet EV project Imports a new Wizard project Imports a new CellOpt AFP project Imports measurement data from a measurement device Imports tuned pathloss matrices into the project Imports network configuration data from the OSS File Export Updates an Asset project with changes Updates an ATOLL project with changes Updates an Odyssey project with changes Updates a Planet EV project with changes Updates a Wizard project with changes Exports a CellOpt AFP plan Exports tuned predictions to Asset Exports tuned predictions to Atoll Exports data in Excel 97 format (for tables only) Exports data in ASCII format (for tables only) Exports all tuned pathloss matrices from the project Updates OSS network configuration data with changes www.1 Menus The following overview gives a summary of the available functions that are accessible from the menus.2.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 318 13.2 Window Controls Reference 13.com .

com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 319 Edit Menu Undoes the last action Redoes the last action Cuts a selection (stored to clipboard) Copies a selection (stored to clipboard) Copies a selection as plain text Pastes the clipboard contents at the cursor Shows the find dialog Shows the replace dialog Selects all items in current view Opens the embedded clipboard in a separate window View Menu Shows the projection settings dialog Select configuration data to be viewed (see View Graph edit functions (see View Table edit functions (see View Zoom functions (see View Graph) Table) Configuration Data Plots) Zoom) Visible Components) Paint) Viewing area component switches (see View Graphical edit functions (see View View Configuration Data Plots Shows composite pathloss layer Shows composite pathloss layer with antenna patterns Shows best cell received power layer Shows interference ratio layer Shows best serving cell layer Shows cell overlap layer Shows frequency plan Shows RSSI layer (for CDMA systems only) Shows carrier-to-adjacent interferer layer (for GSM only) Shows clutter data layer Shows DEM layer View Graph Creates a table from the shown diagram/histogram Shows the axis scale dialog Shows the histogram settings dialog Shows the chart page setup dialog Resets chart view to default styles The graph submenu is only active if a chart/histogram is displayed in the viewing area.actix. www.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 320 View Table Stores table/report in project Shows the page setup dialog for printing Shows the header/footer dialog for printing Allows page breaks in tables Splits up a table to pages with given # rows/columns The table submenu is only active if a table is displayed in the viewing area.2. see section 13. if available Copies tuned predictions into this network layer www.2. View Visible Components Checkbox for viewing sites Checkbox for viewing cells Checkbox for viewing area boundaries Checkbox for viewing streets Checkbox for viewing site/cell labels Checkbox for viewing additional legend These entries are identical with the checkboxes of the components toolbar.actix. View Zoom Shows an enlarged part of the view Shows a downsized part of the view Fits the view to the window size (total configuration data) Fits the simulation area to the window size Fits the analysis area to the window size These entries are identical with the respective icons in the standard toolbar. see section 13.2.2. View Paint Default paint mode (no paint option active) Switches to zoom mode Switches to pan mode (to shift the displayed surface plot) Distance measurement tool Switches to simulation area paint mode Switches to analysis area paint mode Switches to streets paint mode Switches to matrix editing mode Switches to Site and Cell add mode Switches to Site and Cell configuration mode Shows the grid size dialog Measurements Menu Starts the measurement software Clears the measurement layers Opens the Measurement Module settings dialog Opens a dialog to tune all pathloss matrices with measurements Reverts pathloss tuning Creates pathloss matrices from measurements.com .

actix.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 321 Optimization Menu Starts the optimization engine Stops the optimization engine Releases the optimization engine Opens the general optimization settings dialog UMTS & CDMA analysis plots (see Optimization GSM & iDEN analysis plots (see Optimization WiMAX analysis plots (see Optimization Revenue analysis plots (see Optimization Shows optimization summary report Shows optimization progress chart Checkbox for the automatic plot update during optimization Loads optimization settings Saves optimization settings CDMA & UMTS Analysis Plots) GSM & iDEN Analysis Plots) WiMAX Analysis Plots) Revenue Analysis Plots) Optimization CDMA & UMTS Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP coverage Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 coverage Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the RSSI per pixel Shows a cell overlap plot (pilot pollution areas) Shows a mapped surface plot of the cell overlap ratio per cell Shows a mapped surface plot of the site overlap ratio per site Shows a surface plot of the equivalent traffic Shows a surface plot of the absolute traffic in terms of users Shows a surface plot of the relative load per cell Shows a surface plot of the relative traffic per cell Shows a surface plot of the number of users per cell Shows a surface plot of the cell sizes per cell Shows a surface plot of the CQI Best cell areas display functions (see Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas) Optimization GSM & iDEN Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the BCCH coverage Shows a surface plot of the BCCH RxLev threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I coverage Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the BCCH RxLev from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the best cell area overlap Shows a mapped surface plot of the cell overlap ratio per cell Shows a mapped surface plot of the site overlap ratio per site Shows a surface plot of the absolute traffic in terms of users Shows a surface plot of the number of users per cell Shows a surface plot of the cell sizes per cell Best cell areas display functions (see Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas) www.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 322 Optimization WiMAX Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the RSSI coverage Shows a surface plot of the RSSI coverage threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the CINR coverage Shows a surface plot of the CINR coverage threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the RSSI from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the CINR from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the best cell area overlap Shows a mapped surface plot of the cell overlap ratio per cell Shows a mapped surface plot of the site overlap ratio per site Shows a surface plot of the absolute traffic in terms of users Shows a surface plot of the number of users per cell Shows a surface plot of the cell sizes per cell Best cell areas display functions (see Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas) Optimization Revenue Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the total revenue Shows a surface plot of the covered revenue Shows a surface plot of the lost revenue Shows a surface plot of the total revenue per cell Shows a surface plot of the covered revenue per cell Shows a surface plot of the lost revenue per cell Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Shows best cell areas of all cells Best Cell Areas Shows best cell areas of all reconfigurable cells Shows best cell areas of all relevant cells Simulation Menu Opens the simulation settings dialog Applies network element templates (see Simulation Starts a dynamic network simulation Stops a dynamic network simulation Shows the project series dialog Loads the latest simulation results Flag to automatically load simulation results Toggles the backup function Enables simulations on the local machine Available remote connections Network Configuration) Simulation Network Configuration Applies template settings to sites in project Applies template settings to cells in project www.actix.com .

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 323 Results Menu See Results -> Measurement Results See Results -> Simulation Results Histogram from plot functions (see Results -> Histogram from Surface Plot) Table from plot functions (see Results -> Data Table from Surface Plot) Starts a layer slide show Results Measurement Results Shows the measurement summary report Results Simulation Results Shows the simulation result summary report Creates default result layers Shows chart with active UEs per UE profile Shows table with active UEs per UE profile Results Histogram from Surface Plot Creates a histogram from all plot pixels Creates a histogram from the plot pixels in the simulation area Creates a histogram from the plot pixels in the analysis area Creates a histogram table from all plot pixels Creates a histogram table from the plot pixels in the simulation area Creates a histogram table from the plot pixels in the analysis area Results Data Table from Surface Plot Creates a data table from all plot pixels Creates a data table from the plot pixels in the simulation area Creates a data table from the plot pixels in the analysis area Tools Menu Opens the general settings dialog Opens the display settings dialog User-defined workspace functions (see Tools Neighbor list optimization (see Tools User Settings) Neighbor Lists) Interference Matrix) Interference matrix generation (see Tools Database functions (see Tools -> Database) License management functions (see Tools -> License Management) List of additional plug-ins www.com .actix.

3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 324 Tools User Settings Exports the color legend presets Imports the color legend presets Export the workspace Import a workspace definition Reset the workspace to factory defaults Opens the layer template manager for the workspace Tools Neighbor Lists Shows the neighbor list optimization dialog Exports the neighbor list definitions Tools Interference Matrix Creates an interference matrix Exports the interference matrix Tools Database Automatically updates all projects in the database Shows a list of all projects currently in the database Cleans up and compresses the database Deletes all cached matrices (to free disk space) Deletes cached matrices in current project Deletes all temporary files (to free disk space) Tools License Management Shows the license registration dialog Needed for license transfer to another computer The usage of the license handling menu entries is described in section 2.actix. Window Menu Checkbox for the standard toolbar Checkbox for the status bar Checkbox for the message window Checkbox for the tree window Minimizes all separate windows Closes all separate windows List of current separate windows Help Menu Opens the online help window Shows the info dialog of WiNeS www.com .

2.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 325 13.2 Toolbars Standard Toolbar Creates a new project Loads the configuration data of a project Saves the configuration data of a project Cuts the selection and adds it to the clipboard Copies the selection to the clipboard Pastes the clipboard contents at the cursor position Undoes last action Redoes last action Shows print dialog for current view Shows print preview dialog Zooms in (scale-up) Zooms out (scale-down) Zoom undo Fits current view (total configuration data) to window size Fits simulation area to window size Fits analysis area to window size Shows the last surface plot Shows the last chart graph Shows the last histogram Shows the last table Shows the results summary report Context sensitive help function Views Toolbar Opens the network layer management dialog Currently active network layer(s) Filters the visible network elements to the active network layer(s) Creates best cell received power layer Creates interference ratio layer Creates best serving cell layer Creates cell overlap layer Creates clutter data layer Creates DEM terrain layer Shows raster image import dialog Starts a layer slide show Cell Search Toolbar Cell search field Find cell www.com .actix.

e. Simulator Toolbar Starts a dynamic network simulation Stops a dynamic network simulation Opens the simulation settings dialog Opens the simulation results import dialog Creates the simulation result summary report www. zoom mode need not be chosen to scale the diagrams. This mode works for surface plots only. If a chart graph is displayed in the viewing area. the user can draw a dragbox with the mouse pointer by holding down the left mouse button.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 326 Paint Toolbar Default paint mode Zoom mode Pan mode Distance measurement tool Simulation area paint mode Analysis area paint mode Site and Cell add mode Site and Cell configuration mode Matrix editing mode Street paint mode Graphics paint mode Define grid size In zoom mode. then zooming with the mouse pointer also works in the default mode.actix. i. Components Toolbar Checkbox for viewing sites Checkbox for viewing cells Checkbox for viewing simulation/analysis area boundaries Checkbox for viewing streets Checkbox for viewing site/cell labels Checkbox for viewing additional legend (string data only) Graphics Toolbar This toolbar is only visible in graphics paint mode.com . When releasing the mouse button. the viewing area is scaled to the just drawn dragbox. In pan mode the visible part of the viewing area can be shifted with the mouse by pressing and holding the left mouse button while moving the surface plot to the desired position.

Fig. The font can be changed by selecting a cell or range of cells.1) + (6. indicate the header alignment of the text in the cells below them.y) indicates the text contained in that cell and + indicates string concatenation. All of the text contained in the Left Aligned column (with the exception of the column header) will be left justified in the header/footer. 13-2 Header/footer dialog for tables There are 10 rows used for entering header/footer text. Centered.2. and Right Aligned. A standard font dialog will be displayed and the user can make the necessary changes. When the font dialog is closed via its OK button. 13-2).1) + (2. the Left Aligned header text is determined as follows: (1. The header/footer dialog for tables allows to set up headers and footers of the current table for printing (see Fig. In other words. The actual text printed to the page is pieced together by appending each of the cells to the previous.1) + (9. where (x.3 Additional Table Grid Settings When displaying a table.1) + (8.com . providing the user with a mechanism to mix fonts within the header/footer.1) + (10. All of these adjustments are available from the Table menu. labeled Left Aligned. and then clicking the font button. the changes will be applied back to the selected cells. The Centered column will be centered horizontally and Right Aligned will be right justified. www. The column headers.1).actix.1) + (7. several additional adjustments can be made.1) + (3.1) + (4.1) + (5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 327 Optimization Toolbar Measurement Toolbar Starts the measurement software Clears all measurement layers Opens the Measurement Module settings dialog Creates the measurement summary report 13.

Table Fit to [n. the grid will also accept the following predefined tokens (or escape sequences): Token Description $F $A $P $N $D $R Document file name Application name Current page number Total number of pages Current date Register / Tabsheet name Table Page Break Mode A page break feature can be switched on or off using the View menu item. Internally. the library is structured hierarchically as the network configuration data tree which is described in chapter 6.m] Pages checkbox is switched Radioplan scales the table if the View on.3 Library Overview A library with typical parameter settings for the radio network configuration items is provided in the \library\ directory below the Radioplan installation directory. that the table fits to the desired number of columns and rows. 13. The library directory structure is identical with the network configuration structure given in section 13. In particular.com . the library contains typical template profiles and sample matrices for the following items: • • • • • • • • • • sample clutter matrix equipment profiles mobility profiles service profiles sample traffic matrix UE profiles antenna patterns a generic cell a generic site sample pathloss matrices www.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 328 In addition to text.1. If activated. 13-3 Page configuration dialog In some cases it should be useful to print a table to a predefined number of pages. Fig. cyan lines appear that can be used to adjust the page breaks similar to Excel.

4 Examples Overview Altogether three example projects are provided in the \examples directory of the Radioplan installation CD-ROM. Germany.2.0 Vehicular: ⎛ R ⎞ ⎛ f ⎞ L[dB] = 40(1 − 4 ⋅10 −3 Δhb ) ⋅ log⎜ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ [km] ⎟ − 18 ⋅ log(Δhb ) + 21 ⋅ log⎜ [MHz ] ⎟ + 80 ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ R: f: base station – mobile station separation carrier frequency (2000 MHz) base station antenna height. straight movement) www.5 + 20 ⋅ log⎜ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ [ MHz ] ⎟ + 10 D ⋅ log⎜ [km] ⎟ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ UMTS 30.4.actix. the other four ones are calculated according to the vehicular propagation model as specified in [30. 13. They are summarized in Table 13-1. measured from the average rooftop level pathloss exponent Δh b : D: 13. movement along streets) and WWW UE (5Erl/km2. 13-4. diagonally aligned 6° Downtilt Antenna Freespace propagation model with pathloss exponent of 3 Speech UE (40Erl/km2. A realistic UMTS network scenario in the center of Dresden. The models used are explained in the following.com . Germany. Free space pathloss equation: ⎛ R ⎞ ⎛ f ⎞ L[dB] = 32. Table 13-1 Example projects Project Description Demo Project Dresden Example Dresden Example Optimized The demonstration project. The simulation area is shown in Fig.1 Demo Project The specifications of the Demo Project are given in Table 13-2.03]. See chapter 4 for details. Table 13-2 Specification of the Demo Project Configuration Item Specification Investigation area Network configuration Antennas Pathloss model UE profiles 1000m x 1000m 2 sites with three cells each.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 329 • • a generic RNC monitor template configuration (for simulator only) Seven sample pathloss matrices are provided in the library.03 version 3. Three of them are calculated with a freespace pathloss model. see chapter 4. in meters. An optimized UMTS network scenario with respect to capacity and QoS in the center of Dresden.

The simulation area is shown in Fig.4. other services mainly in hotspot areas. speech mainly concentrated to streets. placed with respect to surroundings. 10km2 10 sites (mostly 3-sectorized). Simple street grid (rectangle). 13-5.actix. Realistic street map of the center of Dresden. 13-4 Demo project 13.com . 13-6. Table 13-3 Specification of the Dresden example project Configuration Item Specification Simulation area Network configuration Antennas Pathloss model UE profiles Traffic Streets Polygonal area of approx. different antenna heights 6° Downtilt Antenna Empirical propagation model (COST 231 with 3-dimensional building model) [RPS] different user profiles for a typical service mix Different traffic matrices.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 330 Configuration Item Specification Traffic Streets Equally distributed within rectangles (different regions per UE profile). Both projects differ slightly in the network configuration. Fig. whereas the 3-dimensional building structure is shown in Fig.2 Dresden City Example The specifications of the Dresden scenarios are given in Table 13-3. www.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 331 Fig. 13-5 Dresden scenarios Fig.com .actix. 13-6 3-dimensional building database of downtown Dresden www.

wld or *. If no georeferencing information is available in the TIFF file itself.3. The usual extension for such a header file is *. They must be found at the location pointed to by the GEOTIFF_CSV environment variable. All common GeoTIFF projections are supported. the first line contains the xcoordinate and the latter line contains the y-coordinate of the vector or the position. and takes the form of an ASCII file. It contains information about the absolute location of the image as well as the scaling and alignment of the image pixels. or pathloss. Since Radioplan uses a Cartesian coordinate system internally. respectively.1.1 TIFF / Geo TIFF Format Most forms of TIFF and GeoTIFF files are supported where the latter ones are georeferenced.1.tab file (only control points used.5.5.5. an ESRI world file (see Section 13. They can either be loaded as image layers or as network configuration matrix for DEM. the accompanied image file is given in the TIFF format.3. The values are assumed being given in meters.tfw. Usually. The first two lines specify the pixel scaling vector for the x-direction.bil file). 13. and the last two lines locate the orientation point (usually the upper left corner) of the image. *. 13.wld file consists of six lines with a numeric value in each line. information on an affine georeferencing transform and some projections. coordinate system ignored) could be used. In either of these line pairs.1 Arc/Info ASCII Interchange Format This format is the ASCII interchange format for Arc/Info Grid. 13. clutter. The number of bands defined within the BIL matrix is restricted to one.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 332 13.5. the third and fourth lines give the pixel scaling vector in y-direction.5 Supported Raster Data File Formats A large number of raster data formats are supported for import.1 ESRI World File Format The ESRI World File format is an ASCII format to associate an image file with a geographical reference.wld. traffic.5.actix.tiffw or *. this is not an exclusive condition.com . In order to use some uncommon projected and geographic coordinate systems and translate them into OGC WKT.2 BIL File Format The BIL file format represents one or more matrices in binary format.prj file containing information on an affine georeferencing transform and some projections. Thus it is ensured that the image is aligned to the x. A *. or a list of GCPs.hdr file is used to specify the exact data format of the binary matrix (*. the value in the fourth line (pixel scaling vector in y-direction) must be negative because the y-vector points downward then. However.and yaxes of the underlying coordinate system. Both 8 and 16 bit precision formats with “I” or “M” byte order formats are supported. Georeferencing from GeoTIFF is supported in the form of one tie point and pixel size.csv files available. If the orientation point is the upper left corner of the image.5. it is necessary to have the EPSG *. a transformation matrix. as well as a MapInfo *. 13. and takes the form of a coverage level www. Grids are treated as signed 16bit integer unless the first scan line contains decimal values in which case the image is treated as 32bit floating point.3 Arc/Info Raster Formats 13. plus sometimes an associated *.2 Arc/Info Binary Grid Format This format is the internal binary format for Arc/Info Grid incl. The most common of these file formats are briefly introduced in the following Subsections with some remarks on special features and their georeferencing ability.tfw. Please refer to [ATL-TR] for further details about the BIL file format structure. 13. A *. the values in the second and third lines must be zero.1) with the extension *.5.

but palettes and georeferencing is captured. and may represent data for different regions. Generally. The import of remote sensing and geospatial datasets in form of raster images is supported.DAT. GIF files always appear as having one colormapped eight bit band. number of dimensions. JPEG files are represented as one band (grey scale) or three band (RGB) datasets with Byte valued bands.5.1.1). BAND2. They may differ in size. Overviews can be built for JPEG files as an external *. SDS is a multidimensional array filled by data. if an ESRI world file exists with the *. GIF files have no integrated support for georeferencing.5. To open the coverage select the coverage directory. There is no direct support for georeferencing information or metadata for JPEG files. Note that also tiled TIFF images with JPEG compressed tiles can be imported.mem.5.10 JPEG File Format The widely used JPEG JFIF format is supported. The format also includes support for georeferencing information and projections.adf) from within it.DAT. 13.g. f32. or an *. …) and a header file which must be called HEADER.1.5 Erdas Imagine Format The Erdas Imagine *.img format is supported with some limitations. and made a standard in the gravity/magnetic field.6 GIF File Format Normal and interlaced GIF files are supported. 13.5. This modification is suited for use with remote sensing data and fully compatible with underlying HDF.DAT. 13. s32.jgw suffices (see Section 13. These formats are completely different and not compatible. For georeferencing the HDF files.7 Grid eXchange File Format This is a raster exchange format propagated by Geosoft.com . u16.1). it will be read and used to establish the geotransform for the image. These files are represented as having one 32bit floating band with elevation data. 13.5. These files are a product of the Japanese Geographic Survey Institute. s16. HDF4 (4.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 333 directory in an Arc/Info database. Pyramid levels and metadata are ignored. s8. only HDF4 file import is supported. normally having the extension *. f64. For data storing. it will be read and used to establish the geotransform for the image. u32. Scientific Datasets (SDS) are most often used. However. It supports the Erdas band types u8.wld or *.4 EOSAT Fast Format EOSAT datasets normally consist of one or more raster data files (e.5. The georeferencing of the files is recognized as well as the coordinate system (always latitude/longitude on the Tokyo datum).8 Hierarchical Data Format (Release 4) There are two HDF formats. BAND1.x and previous releases) and HDF5.9 Japanese DEM Format Japanese DEM files can be imported. c64 and c128. the ASTER Level 1B and ASTER DEM formats are supported. 13. NASA's Earth Observing System (EOS) maintains its own HDF modification called HDF-EOS which is also supported for import.5. But if an ESRI world file exists with the *. 13.DAT file. One HDF file may contain several different SDS arrays.5. www. Georeferencing and other meta data is ignored. Only the raster data can be accessed.actix. To open the dataset select the HEADER. Hierarchical Data Format is a container for several different datasets.wld extension (see Section 13. 13.ovr file.adf file (such as hdr.5. Here.

However.5. *. and MSB (big-endian).5. the keyword BYTE_ORDER can be used which can take a value of LSB (little-endian). To open a PCI labeled file. pseudo-colored. 13.hdr file are ignored. unlabeled DOQ format and the new..1. Unrecognized keywords from the *.hdr file if required. Georeferencing. tile organized files (as produced by the Atlantis SAR Processor .14 USGS DOQ Format The USGS (US Geological Survey) DOQ (Digital Ortho Quad) format is supported. including reading of an affine georeferencing transform. labeled DOQ format can be handled. This may be manually added to the *.16 X11 Pixmap Format XPM (X11 Pixmap Format) image files are color-mapped one band images primarily used for simple graphics purposes in X11 applications. paletted. Single transparency values in grey scale files will be recognized as a nodata value.tfw or *.hdr file. MFF files are not normally portable between systems with different byte orders. and color tables will be reduced to about 70 colors automatically. Both the old.15 USGS SDTS DEM Format Support for reading USGS SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) formatted DEMs is included. The *.wld. *.APP) can be imported. To open a dataset select the *.x00. projections. 16. 32 and 64 bit data precisions in integer. .5.aux file (which must have a common base name) will be checked for automatically. 13. and other metadata is ignored.17 ERMapper Compress Wavelets Format Reading of JPEG2000 files and ERMapper Compress Wavelets (ECW) is supported.5. real and complex data types. www.5. Coordinate system and georeferencing transformations are read.5.1) will be read for georeferencing the PNG file.tifw (see Section 13.11 Atlantis MFF Raster File Format Atlantis Scientific's MFF datasets consist of a header file (typically with the extension *.DDF.com . In addition. Diverse data types are supported. 13. Projection and georeferencing information can also be extracted. 16S.) is supported but there is no support for reading affine georeferencing or projection information. SDTS datasets consist of a number of files.b00 and so on. 13. This should be selected to open the dataset. ESRI world files with the extensions of *.actix. and 32R) is supported. RGB and RGBA PNG files (with extension *. and capture of the projection string.5.aux labeled raw raster file format of all PCI data types (8U.5. 16U. The XPM interface does not support georeferencing (not available from XPM files) nor does it support XPM files with more than one character per pixel. Reading latitude/longitude GCPs (TOP_LEFT_CORNER. New XPM files must be colormapped or grey scale. select the raw data file itself. 13. and some degree of support is included for GeoJP2 (GeoTIFF-in-JPEG2000).png) are supported as well as precisions of eight and sixteen bits per sample. including 8. ERMapper GML-in-JPEG2000. USGS DEMs always have a data type of signed sixteen bit integer.. and the new GML-in-JPEG2000 specification developed at OGC.hdr) and a set of data files with extensions like *.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 334 13. 13. Each DEM should have one file with a name like XXXCATD.13 Portable Network Graphics Grey scale.12 PCI Labeled Raw Format The PCI *.

Arc/Info V7 and earlier) are supported. no info attributes will be appended to coverage layers. a whole directory of shape files is treated as a dataset. but the geometry should still be accessible. 13. The new ESRI measure values are discarded if encountered. however. and then it will be treated as a dataset with one single layer. Text sections are represented as point layers. MapInfo coordinate system information is also supported. In this case the directory name should be used as the dataset name. Polygon geometries are collected for polygon and region layers from the composing arcs. However. If available. and text sections of a coverage are all supported as layers.tab or *. Normally. arc. even for polygons with multiple outer rings. and a single shape file within that directory as a layer. If this is inaccessible or corrupt.g. arcs. or region where appropriate. several vector data formats are supported for import. but not specifically named to be attached to one of the existing geometric layers is currently not accessible. 13. it is also possible to use one of the files (*.6.mif) in a MapInfo set as the dataset name. or *. In this case the directory name should be used as the dataset name. 13.dbf) in a shape file set as the dataset name. or as simulation/analysis area or street data in the network configuration. A region subclass is named according to the subclass name. centroid. polygon. www. The Arc/Info binary coverage interface attempts to optimize spatial queries but due to the lack of a spatial index this is just accomplished by minimizing processing for features not within the spatial window. it is also possible to use one of the files (*. An arc (line) layer is named ARC if present. and a single file within that directory as a layer. A text section is named according to the section subclass. Note that usually polygons rather than multipolygons are imported.6. The label. Info tables associated with a coverage. polygons.6 Supported Vector Data File Formats In addition to raster images. A polygon layer is named PAL if present.1 Shape File Format All varieties of ESRI shape files are supported. and then it will be treated as a dataset with one layer. the projection information is read and translated.com .actix. The layers are named as follows: • • • • • • A label layer (polygon labels. Note that info tables are stored in an 'info' directory at the same level as the coverage directory.3 Arc/Info Binary Coverage File Format Arc/Info Binary Coverages (e. or free standing points) is named LAB if present.prj file in old Arc/Info style or new ESRI OGC WKT style is present. If a *.shx.2 MapInfo File Format MapInfo datasets in native (TAB) format and in interchange (MIF/MID) format are supported.shp. The most common of these file formats are briefly introduced in the following Subsections with some remarks on special features and their georeferencing ability. other information about text orientation is discarded. *. Attributes from INFO are appended to labels. it will be read and used to associate a projection with features. However.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 335 13. A centroid layer (polygon centroids) is named CNT if present. region. A whole directory of MapInfo files is treated as a dataset.6. Display height is preserved in the HEIGHT attribute field. They can either be loaded as image layers.

www.4 Planet ASCII Vector Format The ASCII vector format known from the Planet EV RNP tool is supported for reading. It may not be supported for other feature types.6.actix.5 Asset Vector Binary Format The binary VBF vector format known from the Asset RNP tool is supported for reading.com . 13. 13.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 336 Random (by FID) reads of arcs and polygons is supported.6.

actix. alternatively C/I Compressed Mode Component Object Model Common Packet Channel Common Pilot Channel Channel Quality Indicator Common Traffic Channel Channel Type Switching Database Dedicated Channel Digital Elevation Model Downlink Dedicated Physical Channel Dedicated Physical Control Channel Dedicated Physical Data Channel www.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 337 14 Abbreviations ACP A-DPCH AFP AICH ANP ARFCN ARQ ASM BCC BCCH BCH BIL BLER BS BSC BSIC BSS C/I CBR CC CDF CE CINR CIR CM COM CPCH CPICH CQI CTCH CTS DB DCH DEM DL DPCH DPCCH DPDCH Automatic Cell Planning Associated Dedicated Physical Channel Automatic Frequency Planning Acquisition Indicator Channel Automatic Neighbor List Planning Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number Automatic Repeat Request ATOLL Synchronization Module Base Station Color Code Broadcast Control Channel Broadcast Channel Band Interleaved by Line (graphics data format for multi-band images) Block Error Rate Base Station Base Station Controller Base Station Identification Code Base Station Subsystem see CIR Constant Bit Rate Convolutional Coding Cumulative Distribution Function Channel Element Carrier-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio Carrier-to-Interference Ratio.

com .actix. First Out Forward Paging Channel Forward Pilot Channel File Transfer Protocol Geographical Information System Global System for Mobile Communications Hybrid ARQ Hierarchical Cell Structure Hard Handover High Speed Downlink Packet Access High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel High Speed Downlink Shared Channel High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel High Speed Shared Control Channel High Speed Uplink Packet Access Hypertext Transfer Protocol Interarrival Time International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection Information Element Inter-Frequency Handover Internet Protocol Incremental Redundancy Interference Signal Code Power Inter-System Handover Key Performance Indicator Local Area Network Medium Access Control Multimedia Message Service www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 338 DSCH DTX E-AGCH ECEF E-DCH E-HICH EIRP EPSG E-RGCH EV-DO FACH FCH FDD F-DPCH FIFO FPCH FPICH FTP GIS GSM HARQ HCS HHO HSDPA HS-DPCCH HS-DSCH HS-PDSCH HS-SCCH HSUPA HTTP IAT ICNIRP IE IFHO IP IR ISCP ISHO KPI LAN MAC MMS Downlink Shared Channel Discontinuous Transmission Enhanced Absolute Grant Channel Earth Centered. Earth Fixed Enhanced Dedicated Channel Enhanced Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel Effective Isotropic Radiated Power European Petroleum Survey Group Enhanced Relative Grant Channel Evolution Data Only Forward Access Channel Fundamental Channel Frequency Division Duplexing Fractional Dedicated Physical Channel First In.

actix.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 339 NCC NE OGC OTSR OVSF PCCPCH PCPCH PCPICH PDCP PDSCH PDU PICH PM PRACH QoS RAB RACH RBC RL RLC RLF RLS RNC RNP RoHC ROI RPS RR RRC RRM RSCP RSN RSSI Rx SCCPCH SCH SDU SF SHO SIR SJF SMS Network Color Code Network Element Open GIS Consortium Omni Transmit Sectorial Receive Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor Primary Common Control Physical Channel Physical Common Packet Channel Primary Common Pilot Channel Packet Data Convergence Protocol Physical Downlink Shared Channel Protocol Data Unit Paging Indicator Channel Performance Management Physical Random Access Channel Quality of Service Radio Access Bearer Random Access Channel Radio Bearer Control Radio Link Radio Link Control Radio Link Failure Radio Link Set Radio Network Controller Radio Network Planning Robust Header Compression Return on Investment Radiowave Propagation Simulator Round Robin Radio Resource Control Radio Resource Management Received Signal Code Power Random Seed Number (Useful) Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Secondary Common Control Physical Channel Synchronization Channel or Supplemental Channel Service Data Unit Spreading Factor Soft Handover Signal-to-Interference Ratio (see CIR) Shortest Job First Short Message Service www.

com .actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 340 STTD TB TBS TC TCH TCP TDD TGP TPC TrCH TTI Tx UARFCN UE UL UMTS UTRA UTRAN VBR WiNeS WKT WWW Space-Time Transmit Diversity Transport Block Transport Block Set Turbo Coding Traffic Channel Transmission Control Protocol Time Division Duplex Transmission Gap Pattern Transmit Power Control Transport Channel Transmission Time Interval Transmitter UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number User Equipment Uplink Universal Mobile Telecommunications System UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network Variable Bit Rate Wireless Network System Simulator Well-Known Text (Format) World Wide Web www.

Sophia Antipolis. France. version 6. Sophia Antipolis.” Proceedings of the Symposium on Performance Evaluation of Computer and Telecommunication Systems (SPECTS’99). version 6. France. version 5.306] [25. 3GPP. 3GPP. Wagner. 3rd Generation Partnership Project.9. version 6. J. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. Lehnert. Sophia Antipolis. France.1.9.101] [25. USA. Sophia Antipolis. UE Radio Access Capabilities Definition (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network.0. Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol Specification (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. 3GPP. version 6. [23. AZ. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. version 6. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. Fischer.306. Sampath. Voigt. Schweigel.” Proceedings of the IEEE 47th Vehicular Technology Conference (VTC’97). [25. QoS Concept and Architecture (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 23. Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects. UE Procedures in Idle Mode and Procedures for Cell Reselection in Connected Mode (Release 5) – 3GPP TS 25. IL.107] 3rd Generation Partnership Project. Chicago. 3GPP. 1997. September 2005. Hunold. March 2006. version 6. Sophia Antipolis. Deissner. P. May 4-7. 3GPP.304] [25. 3rd Generation Partnership Project.0. and J.214] [25.0. 3rd Generation Partnership Project.0. September 2005. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. S. M.15 References [Fisc99] J. Kumar. M. 929-933. France.215. June 2002.322] 341 .214.4. “Object Oriented Modeling of a Generic Radio System for Dynamic System Simulation. Holtzman.215] [25. Physical Layer .101.322. France.0. pp. 3GPP. Vol. 1999. USA. “On Setting Reverse Link Target SIR in a CDMA System.8.107. Sophia Antipolis. July. pp.0.Measurements (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. 3GPP. UE Radio Transmission and Reception (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. D. France. 2. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. March 2006. September 2006. Phoenix. Sophia Antipolis. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. September 2006. 240247. and J. J.0. G. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network.10. Physical Layer Procedures (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. R.304. Fettweis. [Samp97] A.4. France.

Dresden. Actix GmbH.0. Wiley. 2008.433] [25. 3GPP. Sophia Antipolis. version 6. Wacker. 2008. France. Actix GmbH. Radioplan Documentation. 2004. Wiley. Sophia Antipolis. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. Radioplan Documentation. WiNeS Simulation Guide.3. WCDMA for UMTS. 2008. Dresden. France.401.433. Technical Reference of the WiNeS Dynamic Network Simulator. France. September 2005. [R-Snapshot] Radioplan Documentation.0. 3nd edition. Dresden.0. Dresden. 2008. 2008.922] [Holm04] [Laih02] [R-Sim] [R-TecRef] Radioplan Documentation. UTRAN Iub Interface NBAP Signalling (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. J.7.331. Germany. Actix GmbH. Neighbor List Planning Guide. Actix GmbH. France. Germany. Toskala (Editors). Sophia Antipolis.401] [25. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. Data Synchronization Guide for ATOLL. Dresden. 3GPP. H. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. Laiho. Radio Resource Management Strategies (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. Dresden. UTRAN Overall Description (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. and T. Sophia Antipolis. Actix GmbH. Radioplan Documentation. March 2006. December 2006. Germany. Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol Specification (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. A. [R-API] Radioplan Documentation. 2002. 2008. Technical Reference of the WiNeS Snapshot Simulator. Radioplan Documentation.922. A. Novosad (Ed. RRM API and Library of the WiNeS Dynamic Network Simulator. December 2006. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. Germany.Actix Radioplan User Guide References 342 [25. Dresden. Dresden. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. version 6. version 6. Germany. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. 3GPP. Germany. Automatic Cell Planning User Guide. Actix GmbH.0.12. Holma. 3GPP. Germany. version 6. Radio Access For Third Generation Mobile Communications. Actix GmbH. Germany. Radio Network Planning and Optimisation for UMTS. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network.actix. 2008. Actix GmbH.com . Measurement Guide.12. [25.331] 3rd Generation Partnership Project.). 2008. [R-Meas] [R-ACP] [R-ANP] [R-ASM] www. Radioplan Documentation.

France. Dresden. UK. April 1998. Actix GmbH. Sophia Antipolis. Germany. Actix Ltd. France. Blagnac.2. France.03] ETSI Document TR 101 112 V3. 2008. Cellopt miniAFP Module in Actix Radioplan. [miniAFP] Cellopt Documentation. Dresden. Radiowave Propagation Simulator. ATOLL Documentation. User Manual. 2008. [ATL-UM] [ATL-TR] [RPS] www. Actix GmbH. 1997-2008. ATOLL Documentation.com . Forsk.0 (UMTS 30. 2008. Blagnac. Selection procedures for the choice of radio transmission technologies of the UMTS.03): Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).Actix Radioplan User Guide References 343 [R-Admin] Radioplan Documentation.. Technical Reference Guide. Germany.actix. Administration Guide. 2008. [30. London. Forsk.

com .Actix Radioplan User Guide References 344 www.actix.

........................... 249 results...23 Actix products ActixOne.... 250 configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................13 Viewpoint .................................................................................................................. 249 additional antenna ........................274 creation from vector layers...................................115 clutter statistics ................... 237..................................274 coinciding layers ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 129..........................256 results selection dialog....................190 result import .............99 clutter statistics ............................................................................. 124 street category .............................................. 110 antenna... See W-CDMA Area Analyzer area management.......................126......................................99 configuration item ........ 172 demo project .... 290 coordinate system...............................16 diagram...................... 140................................................................................................................Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 345 16 Index A activation code ............................................................................ 158.. 142.............................100.................. 135..............................................122 raster file export............................................................................................................99 interference matrix....................... 106 RAN ........ 90 Radioplan ........... 277 dongle.........221 WiMAX ~ ....... 124 Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) ........... 107 CDMA2000 ............. 241 library ............................ 129 user behavior................ 205 WiMAX ................241 UMTS ~................ 40. 67.......................... 114 file format ......99.......................... 237 iDEN ...... 137 embedded clipboard ............28 D data management downtilt .......................................293 export/synchronization . 159 workspace.......... 219 chart graph ................................................. 245 projection..................................................................... 107 ARQ................................................................................... 41..........255 statistical ~.........................119 www...237 iDEN ~ ..47 project .................................................98 settings overview table to file ...........................................233 GSM ~ .......................... 105 database ............135...............................................271.... 169 cell statistics .......267 configuration scatter statistics ....................... See hardware dongle E editing functions B background image ........... 249 Analyzer ............... 114........................... 44................. 160............................ 271 XY scatter graph .289 environment copy/fill ........................ 270 area management.......98 RNP project update ...................... 83........................ 162 Area Analyzer........... 125 raster file import ..........329 export clutter ................................................................................... 249 analysis area................ 115 clutter matrix ..... 17................... 233 directory structure...............................245 equipment profile....... 272..................................... 164.............. 30......................................87 DEM....31....................... See network controller C Capital Planning............................................................................................ 147......................................... 99...... 317 GSM ............99 Actix CellRefs..... 259....... 274..........................35.............................. 282......................................129................................ 126..actix.......................... 252 BSC ......................................99 Cellopt AFP ........... 201 cell ...98 import/update... 329 Actix Cellopt AFP plan ................... 143 tuned pathloss matrices......... 292 channel element ................................... 127.... 114 DEM.. 313 layer ..................................................................... 170....................................................... 196 best server ....................................................260.... 147..................... 277 clutter ........119 raster file import............................... 328 project setup ................. 272 cell visual ................260...... 171 examples ....... 122......... 181 ATOLL ATOLL Synchronization Module concept of ~ ....................................................com ............. 165 UTRAN ........... 169..............124 binary file system.................................................................................... 140.....................................................49 clutter classes ................. 151..... 149 analysis........ 317 environment ..................... 128........................................................................................................................... 101...............289 parameter filtering.......... 249 raster file export ............................ 128 streets .............250 embedded clipboard ............................ 114 CDMA2000 ~ ............29 ActixOne ....................................................................... 160 compatible traffic models ......................... 151. 31.................. 86............................ 112................

....61 locked layers ..................23 threshold evaluation methods.......21 configuration folder........................................................................Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 346 cell visuals.........................................256 G graphics painting mode.........172......................................... 21.................. 135. 205........................................... 198..........................................40 ~ project from Radioplan database ...............................................116.....................301 ~ for UMTS....................284 ~ file...............................................See coinciding layers color settings ....................................................335 workspace ...................275 library ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 292 Measurement Module........................... 221 Softer ~ .............. 41...... 307 tuned pathloss matrices .....................................................22 user folder .............................. 297 OSS network configuration .....................................................................................................................................62 graphics layers.........................................42 layer slide show ................42 layer overview dialog......54 slide show ..............................41 coinciding layers .........170 parameter ~ ..................................63 polygon ......................................................................................................................88 external result data .....................312 K KPI analysis ............................................................................. 201 interference matrix ..................................61 drawing preferences ....................actix........................205 Soft ~ ............................40 layer functions .....................23 transaction key ...............................................................24 ~ file transfer .............14 mobility profile .... 23............... 25 activation code.313 generation .............................................22 hardware dongle............................332 vector data ~............332 result data ......................41 result layers................85 installation ~ of image layers ......................................83 network optimization ......................................................................... 117 file format filtering configuration ~ .................. 173 N neighbor lists ........ 281 I import Hard ~ ....................................63 text... 259.......... 87......... 22 histogram ..........205 Inter-System ~ ......................................................................266 mapped surface plot..........217 noise figure........... 328 license... 138 copy parameters from other network layer(s) .........................45 manipulating layers .........47 OSS network configuration ....................262...............43 layer templates..........................159 vector file ~ ......... 61 image layers........ 252........100 traffic matrix from measured traffic.........................312 result set .....................................153 network configuration ....... 49.......... 264 settings ........................................................................88 project ................... 143 layer ........................................com ...................................................................................................................................................... See manipulating layers post-processing layers . 310 export .......................................................................................................................................... 116 intra-scrambling code ~......................................................................................317 raster data ~ .............88 P pathloss matrix intracell inter-scrambling code ~ . 155 raster file import ........................................................................ 130 Network Controller ..............................................................205 Inter-Frequency ~.................................25 ~ registration ..................25 ~ update............................. 198....................................................................................................137..................................................23 floating ~ ..............................16 network performance counters.....................................335 during simulation..................48 network layer management ................................................. 154 www.241 network layer ...............................................................................293 from file to settings overview table......................87 raster file ~...................129............................................ 275 F fast fading ...... See configuration network controller .......297 L layer concept ......................85 duplicating network layers ........................................................... 205.........32 high/low-res ~..........23 hardware dongle .........................................................................................................................................................................314 network planning ..................................................57 graphics layers........................170 O orthogonality factor ~ based on ROI ............................... 118 ~ for CDMA2000 ....................48 ~ folder ................. 221 activation code.............................................61 line ....................300 ~ for GSM....... 271............................23 M manipulating layers ............................... 57 legend presets ...............................................................83 cell .63 H Handover layer functions........................................................................ See hardware dongle transaction key ...........................15 Node B ........

.................................................................................................23 Transport Channel Radio Resource Management ......................... 145 U UE result set ...............................................94 comparison........15 physical layer ................................ 205...................... 105 network layer management.................. 217 WiMAX ~.................. 221 FACH ......105 duplicating projects ....actix............... 221 HSUPA ........205.............271 service arrival process ...................16 T table .......................................................221 ...306 creation from layer........................................................................... 154....................................................180 statistical analysis ......................................... 241 UMTS ~ .......... 192...... 208 vendor specific .......................................... 212............... 208 Power Control ............................ 176........................................................ 205.......................................................................61 www.......... 221 RACH . 222 FPICH.. 314 revenue matrix..........................................52 layer settings.......................................96 configuration................................. 167 threshold evaluation methods ..................................................174................ See network controller S scatter statistics ............. 205 BCH ....... 178................ 223 Radio Bearer Translation ....................207 Compressed Mode ......................91 master ~ ..............................90 handling ................................129................221..................................................inner loop .. 190 traffic matrix.13 Radiowave Propagation Simulator ............................................................................................................................................ 76............................................. 87..................................................................... 170 position update interval ..... 179 radio propagation (fast) fading..................258.......................................................329 pathloss matrix ...............................................115 Admission Control ......................... 174.......................... 180 pilot Ec/I0................................................................ 223 Channel Type Switching ................. 221 DCH..... 205....... 254 UE profile..............................246 functions ..............235 GSM ~ ........................93 multi-layer ~ ....................54 W-CDMA Area Analyzer...................................................................................................open loop ................165 user rights management ............47 color palette ........................ 90.............. 307 ATOLL compatible ~........... 193 traffic type.......................... 179 transaction key............................................... 170 project ......................................... 221... 181 simulation...............................201 ..........................................221 SCCPCH .................. 193 traffic model.................... 160.......................... 83.......................Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 347 performance counters.... 221 ~ statistics....See mapped surface plot template........... 168 service profile........................284 traffic matrix ...... 221.......................................202 raster file import............................................................................. 115..........................................254 parameter ........................................... See network performance counters physical channel RNC .............................15 workspace .....96 ~ update ..287 mapped ~ ............................................ 221 Radioplan .................... 91 UTRA/FDD ......16 traffic matrix generation ............................................................... 165................... 232 PRACH....146 CDMA2000 ~ . 86........... 252.............57 display settings .282..239 iDEN ~ ............. 156 shadowing ................ 107 W watermark ...................................... 222 simulation area.................. 131 filtering ........ 166............. 289 R Radio Access Bearer ................................ 192 owner ...................... 263 CDMA2000 ~.............................166........................ 237 iDEN ~.... 221 HSDPA ..............205.............. 221................................................................ 251 result set aggregation................. 178............................................................................................... 201 cascaded ~... 194 raster file import ....................................................... 167 user behavior ... 174...............................................................................................................205............................................................................................................ 192 service portion............................................................................... 343 repeater ..............................................129.................................................205 Radio Link Monitoring ...............................81 maintenance wizard................................................................. 172 Power Balancing .................................................................................................................................130...................... 222...............................com creation from traffic matrix.... 86.............................................................. 207 Congestion Control ....................................................................................outer loop.............................................. See network layer management sub ~ ..... 169....101 spreading factor..........207 ACP.................................... 169.......15 activation ..............................................165........... 117 pathloss equation ....... 245 system level...............................................109 site ........................ 196 raster file export ...........................................192 store in project . 290 surface plot...................................................... 169....... 221 .. 223 AICH .............................243 UMTS ~....... 233.......... 233 GSM ~ .................................206........................................54 legend presets .......................... 236 PCCPCH................................... 222 PCPICH....231 WiMAX ~ ...................... 207.........101 merging projects .....................

........................................65 www...com .............54 Index 348 Z zoom functions ....................actix..Actix Radioplan User Guide watermark..................

Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 349 www.com .actix.

com .actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 350 www.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful